Installation and Configuration Guide

Informatica PowerCenter
(Version 7.1.1)

Informatica PowerCenter Installation and Configuration Guide Version 7.1.1 August 2004 Copyright (c) 19982004 Informatica Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. This software and documentation contain proprietary information of Informatica Corporation, they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and is also protected by copyright law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by any means (electronic, photocopying, recording or otherwise) without prior consent of Informatica Corporation. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in the applicable software license agreement as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7702-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the documentation, please report them to us in writing. Informatica Corporation does not warrant that this documentation is error free. Informatica, PowerMart, PowerCenter, PowerChannel, PowerCenter Connect, MX, and SuperGlue are trademarks or registered trademarks of Informatica Corporation in the United States and in jurisdictions throughout the world. All other company and product names may be trade names or trademarks of their respective owners. Portions of this software are copyrighted by DataDirect Technologies, 1999-2002. Informatica PowerCenter products contain ACE (TM) software copyrighted by Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University and University of California, Irvine, Copyright (c) 1993-2002, all rights reserved. Portions of this software contain copyrighted material from The JBoss Group, LLC. Your right to use such materials is set forth in the GNU Lesser General Public License Agreement, which may be found at http://www.opensource.org/licenses/lgpl-license.php. The JBoss materials are provided free of charge by Informatica, as-is, without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Portions of this software contain copyrighted material from Meta Integration Technology, Inc. Meta Integration is a registered trademark of Meta Integration Technology, Inc. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/). The Apache Software is Copyright (c) 1999-2004 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. DISCLAIMER: Informatica Corporation provides this documentation as is without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of non-infringement, merchantability, or use for a particular purpose. The information provided in this documentation may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Informatica could make improvements and/or changes in the products described in this documentation at any time without notice.

Table of Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
New Features and Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii PowerCenter 7.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii PowerCenter 7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx PowerCenter 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv About Informatica Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx About this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi Other Informatica Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii Visiting Informatica Customer Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii Visiting the Informatica Webzine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii Visiting the Informatica Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii Visiting the Informatica Developer Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii Obtaining Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii

Chapter 1: Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PowerCenter Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 PowerCenter Metadata Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Repository Server Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Administration Console Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Using the Repository Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Repository Manager Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

iii

Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Designer Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Loading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Workflow Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Workflow Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using PowerCenter Metadata Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Dashboards Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Find Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Locales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 System Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 User Locale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Input Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Data Movement Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Character Data Movement Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Changing Data Movement Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Code Page Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Operating System Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Choosing a Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Code Page Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 PowerCenter Code Page Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Relaxed Data Code Page Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Configuring the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Troubleshooting for Relaxed Code Page Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Case Study: Processing 7-bit ASCII Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Configuring the 7-bit ASCII Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ASCII Case Study: Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Case Study: Processing ISO 8859-1 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 The ISO 8859-1 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Configuring the ISO 8859-1 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ISO 8859-1 Case Study: Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

iv

Table of Contents

Chapter 3: Understanding Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 PowerCenter Client Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Connecting to the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Connecting to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Connecting to the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Repository Server Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Connecting to PowerCenter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Connecting to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 PowerCenter Server Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connecting to PowerCenter Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connecting to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connecting to the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Chapter 4: Installation and Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Working with 32-bit and 64-bit Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 PowerCenter Installation and Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Installing for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Upgrading from a Previous Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Client Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Performing a Standard Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Performing a Silent Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Uninstalling the PowerCenter Client Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Step 2. Install ODBC Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Uninstalling the ODBC Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Step 3. Connect to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table of Contents v

Code Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Creating Repository Server Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Step 1. Install the Repository Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Uninstalling the Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Step 3. Connect to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Step 4. Start the Repository Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Starting the Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Verifying Repository Server Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Verifying the Repository Server is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Stopping the Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 7: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Code Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Step 1. Install the Repository Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Step 3. Connect to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Step 4. Start the Repository Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Starting the Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Verifying the Repository Server is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Stopping the Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Creating a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Steps to Create a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

vi

Table of Contents

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Creating PowerCenter Server Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 PowerCenter Server Variable Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Uninstalling the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Configuring the Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Configuring the Repository Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Configuring the Licenses Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Configuring the Compatibility and Database Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Configuring the Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Configuring the JVM Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Configuring the HTTP Proxy Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Step 3. Connect to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Step 4. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Windows Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Workflow Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 pmcmd Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 DHCP (TCP/IP Connections Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 PowerCenter Server Variable Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Step 3. Update the License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Step 4. Connect to Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Step 5. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 UNIX Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Table of Contents

vii

Workflow Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 pmcmd Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Installing ODBC on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Using pmlic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Updating and Creating License Files (Update) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Displaying License File Contents (Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Chapter 11: Registering the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Registering the PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 PowerCenter Server Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Server Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Steps for Registering a PowerCenter Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Upgrading from a Previous Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Upgrade Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Step 1. Prepare the Repository and Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Preparing the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Preparing the Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Step 2. Create a Copy of the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Copying a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Restoring a Repository Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Step 3. Install PowerCenter 7.1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Installing the PowerCenter Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Installing the Repository Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Step 4. Upgrade the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Upgrade Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter . . . . . . . . . 207

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Product Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
viii Table of Contents

Importing the Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Importing the Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Importing the Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Importing the Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Importing the Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Step 3. Create a Data Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Step 4. Set Up Schedules for Cached Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Adding Reports to Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Starting Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Switching PowerCenter Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Upgrading Object Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Upgrading Transformation Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Upgrading Function Syntax to Conform to New Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Upgrading Expressions that Use RTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Upgrading Expressions that Use Nested Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Converting Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Converting Strings to Floating Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Returning the Last Row in a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Upgrading Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Upgrading Sessions and Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Upgrading a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Upgrading Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Upgrading Sessions with Use Absolute Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Upgrading Disabled Session and Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Run If Previous Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Upgrading Folder Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Sample Upgrade Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Upgrading Repository Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Upgrading pmcmd and pmrep Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Upgrading Session, Batch, and Connection Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Upgrading Updatedbconfig Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Upgrading Delete and Restore Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Table of Contents

ix

Upgrading Folder Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Upgrading Sessions for Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Upgrading Stored Procedure Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Upgrading External Procedure Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Recompiling Existing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Upgrading the Procedure Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Changes to Version 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Changes to Later Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Upgrading Advanced External Procedure Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Upgrading Custom Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Changes to Version 7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Upgrading $Source and $Target Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Upgrading TPump Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Creating Teradata TPump External Loader Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Upgrading Bulk Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Upgrading Incremental Aggregation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Upgrading Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank Cache Properties . . . . . . . 277 Upgrading from Versions 5.0 and 5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Upgrading from Version 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Upgrading Lookup Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Upgrading XML Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Upgrading Namespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Upgrading Circular References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Upgrading Column Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Upgrading XML Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Upgrading Transaction Control Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Connecting to an Informix Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Table of Contents

Connecting to Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Connecting to an Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Connecting to a Sybase Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Connecting to a Teradata Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Connecting to an Informix Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Connecting to an Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Connecting to a Sybase Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Configuring Native Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Connecting to a Teradata Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Configuring ODBC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Connecting to an ODBC Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Sample odbc.ini file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Appendix A: ODBC Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Client ODBC Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Server ODBC Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Appendix B: Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Supported Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Code Page Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table of Contents xi

Informatica Code Page Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Code Page Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Converting from MS Latin1 to Latin1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Converting from Latin1 to MS Latin1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Converting from MS Latin 2 to ISO-8859-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Converting from IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Converting from Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Converting from MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Converting from JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Converting from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Converting from JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Converting from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Converting from MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Appendix C: Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

PowerCenter Glossary Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

xii

Table of Contents

List of Figures
Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 1-1. PowerCenter Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. Connectivity Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3. Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4. Repository Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5. Repository Manager Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6. Repository Manager Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7. Sample Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8. Designer Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9. Workflow Manager Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10. Workflow Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11. Metadata Reporter Dashboards Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1. Required Code Page Relationships for Unicode Data Movement Mode . . . . . 2-2. Code Page Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3. 7-bit ASCII Mode Case Study Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4. ASCII Case Study Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5. ISO 8859-1 Case Study Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6. Summary of ISO 8859-1 Case Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1. PowerCenter Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2. ODBC Connectivity Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1. Sample Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2. Upgrade Workflow - Single Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3. Upgrade Workflow - Session with Event-Based Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4. Sequential Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5. Workflow Upgraded from Sequential Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6. Concurrent Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7. Workflow Upgraded from Concurrent Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8. Concurrent Batches in a Sequential Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9. Workflow Upgraded from Concurrent Batches in a Sequential Batch . . . . . . 14-10. Worklet Created from Concurrent Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11. Sequential Batches in a Concurrent Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12. Workflow Upgraded from Sequential Batches in a Concurrent Batch . . . . . 14-13. Worklet Created from Sequential Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14. Batched Session Using Absolute Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15. Workflow Upgraded from a Batch with Absolute Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16. Sequential Batch with a Disabled Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17. Workflow with Control Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18. Single-Level Batch with Run If Previous Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19. Workflow Upgraded from Figure 14-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20. Nested Batch with Run If Previous Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2 .. 6 .. 9 . 10 . 12 . 13 . 14 . 15 . 17 . 18 . 20 . 21 . 35 . 39 . 49 . 52 . 54 . 57 . 60 . 62 241 242 243 246 246 247 247 247 248 248 249 249 249 250 250 251 251 252 252 253

List of Figures

xiii

Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure

14-21. Worklet Upgraded from the Batch BC2 . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22. Concurrent Batch with Run If Previous Completed . . . 14-23. Workflow Upgraded from Concurrent Batch with Run 14-24. Upgraded Cache Directory Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1. ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................. ................. If Previous Completed ................. .................

. . . . .

.253 .254 .254 .278 .297

xiv

List of Figures

List of Tables
Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 2-1. Session and File Cache Handling After Data Movement Mode Change . . . . . . . . 2-2. Code Page Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1. Native Connect String Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2. Recommended Database ODBC Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3. PowerCenter Client Connectivity Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4. Repository Server Connectivity Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5. PowerCenter Server Connectivity Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1. Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1. Setup Options and Arguments (PowerCenter Client Tools Installation) . . . . . . . 5-2. Response File Parameters (PowerCenter Client Tools Installation) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3. Silent Installation Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1. Repository Server Configuration Parameters on Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1. Library Path for Repository Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2. Configuration Parameters for Repository Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1. New Repository - General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2. New Repository - Database Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3. New Repository - Network Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4. New Repository - Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1. Server Tab Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2. Repository Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3. Compatibility and Database Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows . . 9-4. Configuration Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5. JVM Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6. HTTP Proxy Tab Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows . . . . . . . . . . 10-1. Library Path for PowerCenter Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3. Update Options and Arguments (pmlic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4. Display Options and Arguments (pmlic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1. Server Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2. TCP/IP Settings to Register a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1. PowerCenter/PowerMart Compatible Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2. New Repository - General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3. New Repository - Database Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4. New Repository - Network Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5. New Repository - Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1. Data Connector Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Cached Report Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1. Repository Metadata Affected by Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2. Upgraded Values Available in the Latest Status Query Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3. Upgrade Rules for Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . 39 . 61 . 63 . 64 . 66 . 67 . 70 . 79 . 80 . 81 . 93 105 107 117 119 120 121 135 137 140 142 144 146 160 162 174 175 180 184 186 194 195 197 198 221 222 230 233 245

List of Tables

xv

Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table

14-4. External Procedure Functions that Will Be Removed . . . . . . . . . 14-5. Upgraded XML Datatypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1. PowerCenter Client ODBC Function Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2. PowerCenter Server ODBC Function Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1. Code Page Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2. Code Pages by Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3. Code Page Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4. Compatible Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6. MS Latin1 to Latin1 Character Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7. Latin1 to MS Latin1 Character Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8. MS Latin 2 to ISO-8859-2 Character Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9. IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin1 Character Conversion . . . . . B-10. Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English Character Conversion . . . . B-11. MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC Character Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . B-13. IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC Character Conversion . . . B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion . . . B-15. IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion . . B-16. MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.267 .284 .328 .330 .334 .336 .340 .342 .347 .358 .358 .359 .360 .360 .361 .363 .368 .370 .375 .376

xvi

List of Tables

Preface
Welcome to PowerCenter, Informaticas software product that delivers an open, scalable data integration solution addressing the complete life cycle for all data integration projects including data warehouses and data marts, data migration, data synchronization, and information hubs. PowerCenter combines the latest technology enhancements for reliably managing data repositories and delivering information resources in a timely, usable, and efficient manner. The PowerCenter metadata repository coordinates and drives a variety of core functions, including extracting, transforming, loading, and managing data. The PowerCenter Server can extract large volumes of data from multiple platforms, handle complex transformations on the data, and support high-speed loads. PowerCenter can simplify and accelerate the process of moving data warehouses from development to test to production.

xvii

New Features and Enhancements

This section describes new features and enhancements to PowerCenter 7.1.1, 7.1, and 7.0.

PowerCenter 7.1.1
This section describes new features and enhancements to PowerCenter 7.1.1.

Data Profiling

Data sampling. You can create a data profile for a sample of source data instead of the entire source. You can view a profile from a random sample of data, a specified percentage of data, or for a specified number of rows starting with the first row. Verbose data enhancements. You can specify the type of verbose data you want the PowerCenter Server to write to the Data Profiling warehouse. The PowerCenter Server can write all rows, the rows that meet the business rule, or the rows that do not meet the business rule. Session enhancement. You can save sessions that you create from the Profile Manager to the repository. Domain Inference function tuning. You can configure the Data Profiling Wizard to filter the Domain Inference function results. You can configure a maximum number of patterns and a minimum pattern frequency. You may want to narrow the scope of patterns returned to view only the primary domains, or you may want to widen the scope of patterns returned to view exception data. Row Uniqueness function. You can determine unique rows for a source based on a selection of columns for the specified source. Define mapping, session, and workflow prefixes. You can define default mapping, session, and workflow prefixes for the mappings, sessions, and workflows generated when you create a data profile. Profile mapping display in the Designer. The Designer displays profile mappings under a profile mappings node in the Navigator.

PowerCenter Server

Code page. PowerCenter supports additional Japanese language code pages, such as JIPSEkana, JEF-kana, and MELCOM-kana. Flat file partitioning. When you create multiple partitions for a flat file source session, you can configure the session to create multiple threads to read the flat file source. pmcmd. You can use parameter files that reside on a local machine with the Startworkflow command in the pmcmd program. When you use a local parameter file, pmcmd passes variables and values in the file to the PowerCenter Server.

xviii

Preface

SuSE Linux support. The PowerCenter Server runs on SuSE Linux. On SuSE Linux, you can connect to IBM, DB2, Oracle, and Sybase sources, targets, and repositories using native drivers. Use ODBC drivers to access other sources and targets. Reserved word support. If any source, target, or lookup table name or column name contains a database reserved word, you can create and maintain a file, reswords.txt, containing reserved words. When the PowerCenter Server initializes a session, it searches for reswords.txt in the PowerCenter Server installation directory. If the file exists, the PowerCenter Server places quotes around matching reserved words when it executes SQL against the database. Teradata external loader. When you load to Teradata using an external loader, you can now override the control file. Depending on the loader you use, you can also override the error, log, and work table names by specifying different tables on the same or different Teradata database.

Repository

Exchange metadata with other tools. You can exchange source and target metadata with other BI or data modeling tools, such as Business Objects Designer. You can export or import multiple objects at a time. When you export metadata, the PowerCenter Client creates a file format recognized by the target tool.

Repository Server

pmrep. You can use pmrep to perform the following functions:

Remove repositories from the Repository Server cache entry list. Enable enhanced security when you create a relational source or target connection in the repository. Update a connection attribute value when you update the connection.

SuSE Linux support. The Repository Server runs on SuSE Linux. On SuSE Linux, you can connect to IBM, DB2, Oracle, and Sybase repositories.

Security

Oracle OS Authentication. You can now use Oracle OS Authentication to authenticate database users. Oracle OS Authentication allows you to log on to an Oracle database if you have a logon to the operating system. You do not need to know a database user name and password. PowerCenter uses Oracle OS Authentication when the user name for an Oracle connection is PmNullUser.

Web Services Provider

Attachment support. When you import web service definitions with attachment groups, you can pass attachments through the requests or responses in a service session. The document type you can attach is based on the mime content of the WSDL file. You can attach document types such as XML, JPEG, GIF, or PDF.

Preface

xix

Pipeline partitioning. You can create multiple partitions in a session containing web service source and target definitions. The PowerCenter Server creates a connection to the Web Services Hub based on the number of sources, targets, and partitions in the session.

XML

Multi-level pivoting. You can now pivot more than one multiple-occurring element in an XML view. You can also pivot the view row.

PowerCenter 7.1
This section describes new features and enhancements to PowerCenter 7.1.

Data Profiling

Data Profiling for VSAM sources. You can now create a data profile for VSAM sources. Support for verbose mode for source-level functions. You can now create data profiles with source-level functions and write data to the Data Profiling warehouse in verbose mode. Aggregator function in auto profiles. Auto profiles now include the Aggregator function. Creating auto profile enhancements. You can now select the columns or groups you want to include in an auto profile and enable verbose mode for the Distinct Value Count function. Purging data from the Data Profiling warehouse. You can now purge data from the Data Profiling warehouse. Source View in the Profile Manager. You can now view data profiles by source definition in the Profile Manager. PowerCenter Data Profiling report enhancements. You can now view PowerCenter Data Profiling reports in a separate browser window, resize columns in a report, and view verbose data for Distinct Value Count functions. Prepackaged domains. Informatica provides a set of prepackaged domains that you can include in a Domain Validation function in a data profile.

Documentation

Web Services Provider Guide. This is a new book that describes the functionality of Real-time Web Services. It also includes information from the version 7.0 Web Services Hub Guide. XML User Guide. This book consolidates XML information previously documented in the Designer Guide, Workflow Administration Guide, and Transformation Guide.

Licensing
Informatica provides licenses for each CPU and each repository rather than for each installation. Informatica provides licenses for product, connectivity, and options. You store
xx Preface

the license keys in a license key file. You can manage the license files using the Repository Server Administration Console, the PowerCenter Server Setup, and the command line program, pmlic.

PowerCenter Server

64-bit support. You can now run 64-bit PowerCenter Servers on AIX and HP-UX (Itanium). Partitioning enhancements. If you have the Partitioning option, you can define up to 64 partitions at any partition point in a pipeline that supports multiple partitions. PowerCenter Server processing enhancements. The PowerCenter Server now reads a block of rows at a time. This improves processing performance for most sessions. CLOB/BLOB datatype support. You can now read and write CLOB/BLOB datatypes.

PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

PowerCenter Metadata Reporter modified some report names and uses the PowerCenter 7.1 MX views in its schema.

Repository Server

Updating repository statistics. PowerCenter now identifies and updates statistics for all repository tables and indexes when you copy, upgrade, and restore repositories. This improves performance when PowerCenter accesses the repository. Increased repository performance. You can increase repository performance by skipping information when you copy, back up, or restore a repository. You can choose to skip MX data, workflow and session log history, and deploy group history. pmrep. You can use pmrep to back up, disable, or enable a repository, delete a relational connection from a repository, delete repository details, truncate log files, and run multiple pmrep commands sequentially. You can also use pmrep to create, modify, and delete a folder.

Repository

Exchange metadata with business intelligence tools. You can export metadata to and import metadata from other business intelligence tools, such as Cognos Report Net and Business Objects. Object import and export enhancements. You can compare objects in an XML file to objects in the target repository when you import objects. MX views. MX views have been added to help you analyze metadata stored in the repository. REP_SERVER_NET and REP_SERVER_NET_REF views allow you to see information about server grids. REP_VERSION_PROPS allows you to see the version history of all objects in a PowerCenter repository.

Preface

xxi

Transformations

Flat file lookup. You can now perform lookups on flat files. When you create a Lookup transformation using a flat file as a lookup source, the Designer invokes the Flat File Wizard. You can also use a lookup file parameter if you want to change the name or location of a lookup between session runs. Dynamic lookup cache enhancements. When you use a dynamic lookup cache, the PowerCenter Server can ignore some ports when it compares values in lookup and input ports before it updates a row in the cache. Also, you can choose whether the PowerCenter Server outputs old or new values from the lookup/output ports when it updates a row. You might want to output old values from lookup/output ports when you use the Lookup transformation in a mapping that updates slowly changing dimension tables. Union transformation. You can use the Union transformation to merge multiple sources into a single pipeline. The Union transformation is similar to using the UNION ALL SQL statement to combine the results from two or more SQL statements. Custom transformation API enhancements. The Custom transformation API includes new array-based functions that allow you to create procedure code that receives and outputs a block of rows at a time. Use these functions to take advantage of the PowerCenter Server processing enhancements. Midstream XML transformations. You can now create an XML Parser transformation or an XML Generator transformation to parse or generate XML inside a pipeline. The XML transformations enable you to extract XML data stored in relational tables, such as data stored in a CLOB column. You can also extract data from messaging systems, such as TIBCO or IBM MQSeries.

Usability

Viewing active folders. The Designer and the Workflow Manager highlight the active folder in the Navigator. Enhanced printing. The quality of printed workspace has improved.

Version Control
You can run object queries that return shortcut objects. You can also run object queries based on the latest status of an object. The query can return local objects that are checked out, the latest version of checked in objects, or a collection of all older versions of objects.

Web Services Provider

Real-time Web Services. Real-time Web Services allows you to create services using the Workflow Manager and make them available to web service clients through the Web Services Hub. The PowerCenter Server can perform parallel processing of both requestresponse and one-way services. Web Services Hub. The Web Services Hub now hosts Real-time Web Services in addition to Metadata Web Services and Batch Web Services. You can install the Web Services Hub on a JBoss application server.

xxii

Preface

Note: PowerCenter Connect for Web Services allows you to create sources, targets, and

transformations to call web services hosted by other providers. For more informations, see PowerCenter Connect for Web Services User and Administrator Guide.

Workflow Monitor
The Workflow Monitor includes the following performance and usability enhancements:

When you connect to the PowerCenter Server, you no longer distinguish between online or offline mode. You can open multiple instances of the Workflow Monitor on one machine. You can simultaneously monitor multiple PowerCenter Servers registered to the same repository. The Workflow Monitor includes improved options for filtering tasks by start and end time. The Workflow Monitor displays workflow runs in Task view chronologically with the most recent run at the top. It displays folders alphabetically. You can remove the Navigator and Output window.

XML Support
PowerCenter XML support now includes the following features:

Enhanced datatype support. You can use XML schemas that contain simple and complex datatypes. Additional options for XML definitions. When you import XML definitions, you can choose how you want the Designer to represent the metadata associated with the imported files. You can choose to generate XML views using hierarchy or entity relationships. In a view with hierarchy relationships, the Designer expands each element and reference under its parent element. When you create views with entity relationships, the Designer creates separate entities for references and multiple-occurring elements. Synchronizing XML definitions. You can synchronize one or more XML definition when the underlying schema changes. You can synchronize an XML definition with any repository definition or file used to create the XML definition, including relational sources or targets, XML files, DTD files, or schema files. XML workspace. You can edit XML views and relationships between views in the workspace. You can create views, add or delete columns from views, and define relationships between views. Midstream XML transformations. You can now create an XML Parser transformation or an XML Generator transformation to parse or generate XML inside a pipeline. The XML transformations enable you to extract XML data stored in relational tables, such as data stored in a CLOB column. You can also extract data from messaging systems, such as TIBCO or IBM MQSeries.

Preface

xxiii

Support for circular references. Circular references occur when an element is a direct or indirect child of itself. PowerCenter now supports XML files, DTD files, and XML schemas that use circular definitions. Increased performance for large XML targets. You can create XML files of several gigabytes in a PowerCenter 7.1 XML session by using the following enhancements:

Spill to disk. You can specify the size of the cache used to store the XML tree. If the size of the tree exceeds the cache size, the XML data spills to disk in order to free up memory. User-defined commits. You can define commits to trigger flushes for XML target files. Support for multiple XML output files. You can output XML data to multiple XML targets. You can also define the file names for XML output files in the mapping.

PowerCenter 7.0
This section describes new features and enhancements to PowerCenter 7.0.

Data Profiling
If you have the Data Profiling option, you can profile source data to evaluate source data and detect patterns and exceptions. For example, you can determine implicit data type, suggest candidate keys, detect data patterns, and evaluate join criteria. After you create a profiling warehouse, you can create profiling mappings and run sessions. Then you can view reports based on the profile data in the profiling warehouse. The PowerCenter Client provides a Profile Manager and a Profile Wizard to complete these tasks.

Data Integration Web Services

You can use Data Integration Web Services to write applications to communicate with the PowerCenter Server. Data Integration Web Services is a web-enabled version of the PowerCenter Server functionality available through Load Manager and Metadata Exchange. It is comprised of two services for communication with the PowerCenter Server, Load Manager and Metadata Exchange Web Services running on the Web Services Hub.

Documentation

Glossary. The Installation and Configuration Guide contains a glossary of new PowerCenter terms. Installation and Configuration Guide. The connectivity information in the Installation and Configuration Guide is consolidated into two chapters. This book now contains chapters titled Connecting to Databases from Windows and Connecting to Databases from UNIX. Upgrading metadata. The Installation and Configuration Guide now contains a chapter titled Upgrading Repository Metadata. This chapter describes changes to repository

xxiv

Preface

objects impacted by the upgrade process. The change in functionality for existing objects depends on the version of the existing objects. Consult the upgrade information in this chapter for each upgraded object to determine whether the upgrade applies to your current version of PowerCenter.

Functions

Soundex. The Soundex function encodes a string value into a four-character string. SOUNDEX works for characters in the English alphabet (A-Z). It uses the first character of the input string as the first character in the return value and encodes the remaining three unique consonants as numbers. Metaphone. The Metaphone function encodes string values. You can specify the length of the string that you want to encode. METAPHONE encodes characters of the English language alphabet (A-Z). It encodes both uppercase and lowercase letters in uppercase.

Installation

Remote PowerCenter Client installation. You can create a control file containing installation information, and distribute it to other users to install the PowerCenter Client. You access the Informatica installation CD from the command line to create the control file and install the product.

PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

PowerCenter Metadata Reporter replaces Runtime Metadata Reporter and Informatica Metadata Reporter. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter includes the following features:

Metadata browsing. You can use PowerCenter Metadata Reporter to browse PowerCenter 7.0 metadata, such as workflows, worklets, mappings, source and target tables, and transformations. Metadata analysis. You can use PowerCenter Metadata Reporter to analyze operational metadata, including session load time, server load, session completion status, session errors, and warehouse growth.

PowerCenter Server

DB2 bulk loading. You can enable bulk loading when you load to IBM DB2 8.1. Distributed processing. If you purchase the Server Grid option, you can group PowerCenter Servers registered to the same repository into a server grid. In a server grid, PowerCenter Servers balance the workload among all the servers in the grid. Row error logging. The session configuration object has new properties that allow you to define error logging. You can choose to log row errors in a central location to help understand the cause and source of errors. External loading enhancements. When using external loaders on Windows, you can now choose to load from a named pipe. When using external loaders on UNIX, you can now choose to load from staged files.
Preface xxv

External loading using Teradata Warehouse Builder. You can use Teradata Warehouse Builder to load to Teradata. You can choose to insert, update, upsert, or delete data. Additionally, Teradata Warehouse Builder can simultaneously read from multiple sources and load data into one or more tables. Mixed mode processing for Teradata external loaders. You can now use data driven load mode with Teradata external loaders. When you select data driven loading, the PowerCenter Server flags rows for insert, delete, or update. It writes a column in the target file or named pipe to indicate the update strategy. The control file uses these values to determine how to load data to the target. Concurrent processing. The PowerCenter Server now reads data concurrently from sources within a target load order group. This enables more efficient joins with minimal usage of memory and disk cache. Real time processing enhancements. You can now use real-time processing in sessions that also process active transformations, such as the Aggregator transformation. You can apply the transformation logic to rows defined by transaction boundaries.

Repository Server

Object export and import enhancements. You can now export and import objects using the Repository Manager and pmrep. You can export and import multiple objects and objects types. You can export and import objects with or without their dependent objects. You can also export objects from a query result or objects history. pmrep commands. You can use pmrep to perform change management tasks, such as maintaining deployment groups and labels, checking in, deploying, importing, exporting, and listing objects. You can also use pmrep to run queries. The deployment and object import commands require you to use a control file to define options and resolve conflicts. Trusted connections. You can now use a Microsoft SQL Server trusted connection to connect to the repository.

Security

LDAP user authentication. You can now use default repository user authentication or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) to authenticate users. If you use LDAP, the repository maintains an association between your repository user name and your external login name. When you log in to the repository, the security module passes your login name to the external directory for authentication. The repository maintains a status for each user. You can now enable or disable users from accessing the repository by changing the status. You do not have to delete user names from the repository. Use Repository Manager privilege. The Use Repository Manager privilege allows you to perform tasks in the Repository Manager, such as copy object, maintain labels, and change object status. You can perform the same tasks in the Designer and Workflow Manager if you have the Use Designer and Use Workflow Manager privileges. Audit trail. You can track changes to repository users, groups, privileges, and permissions through the Repository Server Administration Console. The Repository Agent logs security changes to a log file stored in the Repository Server installation directory. The

xxvi

Preface

audit trail log contains information, such as changes to folder properties, adding or removing a user or group, and adding or removing privileges.

Transformations

Custom transformation. Custom transformations operate in conjunction with procedures you create outside of the Designer interface to extend PowerCenter functionality. The Custom transformation replaces the Advanced External Procedure transformation. You can create Custom transformations with multiple input and output groups, and you can compile the procedure with any C compiler. You can create templates that customize the appearance and available properties of a Custom transformation you develop. You can specify the icons used for transformation, the colors, and the properties a mapping developer can modify. When you create a Custom transformation template, distribute the template with the DLL or shared library you develop.

Joiner transformation. You can use the Joiner transformation to join two data streams that originate from the same source.

Version Control
The PowerCenter Client and repository introduce features that allow you to create and manage multiple versions of objects in the repository. Version control allows you to maintain multiple versions of an object, control development on the object, track changes, and use deployment groups to copy specific groups of objects from one repository to another. Version control in PowerCenter includes the following features:

Object versioning. Individual objects in the repository are now versioned. This allows you to store multiple copies of a given object during the development cycle. Each version is a separate object with unique properties. Check out and check in versioned objects. You can check out and reserve an object you want to edit, and check in the object when you are ready to create a new version of the object in the repository. Compare objects. The Repository Manager and Workflow Manager allow you to compare two repository objects of the same type to identify differences between them. You can compare Designer objects and Workflow Manager objects in the Repository Manager. You can compare tasks, sessions, worklets, and workflows in the Workflow Manager. The PowerCenter Client tools allow you to compare objects across open folders and repositories. You can also compare different versions of the same object. Delete or purge a version. You can delete an object from view and continue to store it in the repository. You can recover or undelete deleted objects. If you want to permanently remove an object version, you can purge it from the repository. Deployment. Unlike copying a folder, copying a deployment group allows you to copy a select number of objects from multiple folders in the source repository to multiple folders in the target repository. This gives you greater control over the specific objects copied from one repository to another.

Preface

xxvii

Deployment groups. You can create a deployment group that contains references to objects from multiple folders across the repository. You can create a static deployment group that you manually add objects to, or create a dynamic deployment group that uses a query to populate the group. Labels. A label is an object that you can apply to versioned objects in the repository. This allows you to associate multiple objects in groups defined by the label. You can use labels to track versioned objects during development, improve query results, and organize groups of objects for deployment or export and import. Queries. You can create a query that specifies conditions to search for objects in the repository. You can save queries for later use. You can make a private query, or you can share it with all users in the repository. Track changes to an object. You can view a history that includes all versions of an object and compare any version of the object in the history to any other version. This allows you to see the changes made to an object over time.

XML Support
PowerCenter contains XML features that allow you to validate an XML file against an XML schema, declare multiple namespaces, use XPath to locate XML nodes, increase performance for large XML files, format your XML file output for increased readability, and parse or generate XML data from various sources. XML support in PowerCenter includes the following features:

XML schema. You can use an XML schema to validate an XML file and to generate source and target definitions. XML schemas allow you to declare multiple namespaces so you can use prefixes for elements and attributes. XML schemas also allow you to define some complex datatypes. XPath support. The XML wizard allows you to view the structure of XML schema. You can use XPath to locate XML nodes. Increased performance for large XML files. When you process an XML file or stream, you can set commits and periodically flush XML data to the target instead of writing all the output at the end of the session. You can choose to append the data to the same target file or create a new target file after each flush. XML target enhancements. You can format the XML target file so that you can easily view the XML file in a text editor. You can also configure the PowerCenter Server to not output empty elements to the XML target.

Usability

Copying objects. You can now copy objects from all the PowerCenter Client tools using the copy wizard to resolve conflicts. You can copy objects within folders, to other folders, and to different repositories. Within the Designer, you can also copy segments of mappings to a workspace in a new folder or repository. Comparing objects. You can compare workflows and tasks from the Workflow Manager. You can also compare all objects from within the Repository Manager.

xxviii

Preface

Change propagation. When you edit a port in a mapping, you can choose to propagate changed attributes throughout the mapping. The Designer propagates ports, expressions, and conditions based on the direction that you propagate and the attributes you choose to propagate. Enhanced partitioning interface. The Session Wizard is enhanced to provide a graphical depiction of a mapping when you configure partitioning. Revert to saved. You can now revert to the last saved version of an object in the Workflow Manager. When you do this, the Workflow Manager accesses the repository to retrieve the last-saved version of the object. Enhanced validation messages. The PowerCenter Client writes messages in the Output window that describe why it invalidates a mapping or workflow when you modify a dependent object. Validate multiple objects. You can validate multiple objects in the repository without fetching them into the workspace. You can save and optionally check in objects that change from invalid to valid status as a result of the validation. You can validate sessions, mappings, mapplets, workflows, and worklets. View dependencies. Before you edit or delete versioned objects, such as sources, targets, mappings, or workflows, you can view dependencies to see the impact on other objects. You can view parent and child dependencies and global shortcuts across repositories. Viewing dependencies help you modify objects and composite objects without breaking dependencies. Refresh session mappings. In the Workflow Manager, you can refresh a session mapping.

Preface

xxix

About Informatica Documentation

The complete set of documentation for PowerCenter includes the following books:

Data Profiling Guide. Provides information about how to profile PowerCenter sources to evaluate source data and detect patterns and exceptions. Designer Guide. Provides information needed to use the Designer. Includes information to help you create mappings, mapplets, and transformations. Also includes a description of the transformation datatypes used to process and transform source data. Getting Started. Provides basic tutorials for getting started. Installation and Configuration Guide. Provides information needed to install and configure the PowerCenter tools, including details on environment variables and database connections. PowerCenter Connect for JMS User and Administrator Guide. Provides information to install PowerCenter Connect for JMS, build mappings, extract data from JMS messages, and load data into JMS messages. Repository Guide. Provides information needed to administer the repository using the Repository Manager or the pmrep command line program. Includes details on functionality available in the Repository Manager and Administration Console, such as creating and maintaining repositories, folders, users, groups, and permissions and privileges. Transformation Language Reference. Provides syntax descriptions and examples for each transformation function provided with PowerCenter. Transformation Guide. Provides information on how to create and configure each type of transformation in the Designer. Troubleshooting Guide. Lists error messages that you might encounter while using PowerCenter. Each error message includes one or more possible causes and actions that you can take to correct the condition. Web Services Provider Guide. Provides information you need to install and configure the Web Services Hub. This guide also provides information about how to use the web services that the Web Services Hub hosts. The Web Services Hub hosts Real-time Web Services, Batch Web Services, and Metadata Web Services. Workflow Administration Guide. Provides information to help you create and run workflows in the Workflow Manager, as well as monitor workflows in the Workflow Monitor. Also contains information on administering the PowerCenter Server and performance tuning. XML User Guide. Provides information you need to create XML definitions from XML, XSD, or DTD files, and relational or other XML definitions. Includes information on running sessions with XML data. Also includes details on using the midstream XML transformations to parse or generate XML data within a pipeline.

xxx

Preface

About this Book

The Installation and Configuration Guide is written for the system administrators who are responsible for installing and configuring the PowerCenter product. This guide assumes you have knowledge of your operating systems, relational database concepts, and the database engines, flat files, or mainframe systems in your environment. This guide also assumes you are familiar with the interface requirements for your supporting applications. The material in this book is available for online use.

Document Conventions
This guide uses the following formatting conventions:
If you see It means The word or set of words are especially emphasized. Emphasized subjects. This is the variable name for a value you enter as part of an operating system command. This is generic text that should be replaced with user-supplied values. The following paragraph provides additional facts. The following paragraph provides suggested uses. The following paragraph notes situations where you can overwrite or corrupt data, unless you follow the specified procedure. This is a code example. This is an operating system command you enter from a prompt to run a task.

italicized text boldfaced text

italicized monospaced text

Note: Tip: Warning:

monospaced text bold monospaced text

Preface

xxxi

Other Informatica Resources

In addition to the product manuals, Informatica provides these other resources:

Informatica Customer Portal Informatica Webzine Informatica web site Informatica Developer Network Informatica Technical Support

Visiting Informatica Customer Portal

As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica Customer Portal site at http:// my.informatica.com. The site contains product information, user group information, newsletters, access to the Informatica customer support case management system (ATLAS), the Informatica Knowledgebase, Informatica Webzine, and access to the Informatica user community.

Visiting the Informatica Webzine

The Informatica Documentation team delivers an online journal, the Informatica Webzine. This journal provides solutions to common tasks, detailed descriptions of specific features, and tips and tricks to help you develop data warehouses. The Informatica Webzine is a password-protected site that you can access through the Customer Portal. The Customer Portal has an online registration form for login accounts to its webzine and web support. To register for an account, go to http://my.informatica.com. If you have any questions, please email webzine@informatica.com.

Visiting the Informatica Web Site

You can access Informaticas corporate web site at http://www.informatica.com. The site contains information about Informatica, its background, upcoming events, and locating your closest sales office. You will also find product information, as well as literature and partner information. The services area of the site includes important information on technical support, training and education, and implementation services.

Visiting the Informatica Developer Network

The Informatica Developer Network is a web-based forum for third-party software developers. You can access the Informatica Developer Network at the following URL: http://devnet.informatica.com

xxxii

Preface

The site contains information on how to create, market, and support customer-oriented addon solutions based on Informaticas interoperability interfaces.

Obtaining Technical Support

There are many ways to access Informatica technical support. You can call or email your nearest Technical Support Center listed below or you can use our WebSupport Service. WebSupport requires a user name and password. You can request a user name and password at http://my.informatica.com.
North America / South America Informatica Corporation 2100 Seaport Blvd. Redwood City, CA 94063 Phone: 866.563.6332 or 650.385.5800 Fax: 650.213.9489 Hours: 6 a.m. - 6 p.m. (PST/PDT) email: support@informatica.com Africa / Asia / Australia / Europe Informatica Software Ltd. 6 Waltham Park Waltham Road, White Waltham Maidenhead, Berkshire SL6 3TN Phone: 44 870 606 1525 Fax: +44 1628 511 411 Hours: 9 a.m. - 5:30 p.m. (GMT) email: support_eu@informatica.com Belgium Phone: +32 15 281 702 Hours: 9 a.m. - 5:30 p.m. (local time) France Phone: +33 1 41 38 92 26 Hours: 9 a.m. - 5:30 p.m. (local time) Germany Phone: +49 1805 702 702 Hours: 9 a.m. - 5:30 p.m. (local time) Netherlands Phone: +31 306 082 089 Hours: 9 a.m. - 5:30 p.m. (local time) Singapore Phone: +65 322 8589 Hours: 9 a.m. - 5 p.m. (local time) Switzerland Phone: +41 800 81 80 70 Hours: 8 a.m. - 5 p.m. (local time)

Preface

xxxiii

xxxiv

Preface

Chapter 1

Product Overview
This chapter covers the following topics:

Introduction, 2 Using the Repository Server Administration Console, 8 Using the Repository Manager, 11 The Design Process, 14 Loading Data, 16 Using PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, 19 Getting Started, 22

Introduction
PowerCenter provides an environment that allows you to load data into a centralized location, such as a datamart, data warehouse, or operational data store (ODS). You can extract data from multiple sources, transform the data according to business logic you build in the client application, and load the transformed data into file and relational targets. PowerCenter provides the following integrated components:

PowerCenter repository. The PowerCenter repository is at the center of the PowerCenter suite. You create a set of metadata tables within the repository database that the PowerCenter applications and tools access. The PowerCenter Client and Server access the repository to save and retrieve metadata. PowerCenter Repository Server. The PowerCenter Repository Server manages connections to the repository from client applications. It inserts, updates, and fetches objects from the repository database tables. It also maintains object consistency. PowerCenter Client. Use the PowerCenter Client to manage users, define sources and targets, build mappings and mapplets with the transformation logic, and create workflows to run the mapping logic. The PowerCenter Client has the following client applications: Repository Manager, Repository Server Administration Console, Designer, Workflow Manager, and Workflow Monitor. PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server extracts the source data, performs the data transformation, and loads the transformed data into the targets.

Figure 1-1 illustrates the architecture of PowerCenter:

Figure 1-1. PowerCenter Architecture

Source

Server

Target

Source data

Transformed data Instructions from metadata

Repository

Sources
PowerCenter accesses the following sources:

Relational. Oracle, Sybase, Informix, IBM DB2, Microsoft SQL Server, and Teradata.

Chapter 1: Product Overview

File. Fixed and delimited flat file, COBOL file, and XML. Application. You can purchase additional PowerCenter Connect products to access business sources, such as PeopleSoft, SAP R/3, Siebel, IBM MQSeries, and TIBCO. Mainframe. You can purchase PowerExchange for faster access to IBM DB2 on MVS. Other. Microsoft Excel and Access.

Note: The Designer imports relational sources, such as Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Access, and

Teradata using ODBC. For more information about sources, see Working with Sources in the Designer Guide.

Targets
PowerCenter can load data into the following targets:

Relational. Oracle, Sybase, Sybase IQ, Informix, IBM DB2, Microsoft SQL Server, and Teradata. File. Fixed and delimited flat file and XML. Application. You can purchase additional PowerCenter Connect products to load data into SAP BW. You can also load data into IBM MQSeries message queues and TIBCO. Other. Microsoft Access.

You can load data into targets using ODBC or native drivers, FTP, or external loaders. For more information about targets, see Working with Targets in the Designer Guide.

Repository
The PowerCenter repository resides on a relational database. The repository database tables contain the instructions required to extract, transform, and load data. PowerCenter Client applications access the repository database tables through the Repository Server. You add metadata to the repository tables when you perform tasks in the PowerCenter Client application, such as creating users, analyzing sources, developing mappings or mapplets, or creating workflows. The PowerCenter Server reads metadata created in the Client application when you run a workflow. The PowerCenter Server also creates metadata, such as start and finish times of a session or session status. You can develop global and local repositories to share metadata:

Global repository. The global repository is the hub of the domain. Use the global repository to store common objects that multiple developers can use through shortcuts. These objects may include operational or Application source definitions, reusable transformations, mapplets, and mappings. Local repositories. A local repository is within a domain that is not the global repository. Use local repositories for development. From a local repository, you can create shortcuts to objects in shared folders in the global repository. These objects typically include source

Introduction

definitions, common dimensions and lookups, and enterprise standard transformations. You can also create copies of objects in non-shared folders.

Version control. A versioned repository can store multiple copies, or versions, of an object. Each version is a separate object with unique properties. PowerCenter version control features allow you to efficiently develop, test, and deploy metadata into production.

You can connect to a repository, back up, delete, or restore repositories using pmrep, a command line program. For more information on pmrep, see Using pmrep in the Repository Guide. For more information about global repositories and version control, see Understanding the Repository in the Repository Guide. You can view much of the metadata in the Repository Manager. The Informatica Metadata Exchange (MX) provides a set of relational views that allow easy SQL access to the Informatica metadata repository. For more information, see Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views in the Repository Guide. You can also view metadata through the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter.

Repository Server
The Repository Server manages repository connection requests from client applications. For each repository database registered with the Repository Server, it configures and manages a Repository Agent process. The Repository Server also monitors the status of running Repository Agents, and sends repository object notification messages to client applications. The Repository Agent is a separate, multi-threaded process that retrieves, inserts, and updates metadata in the repository database tables. The Repository Agent ensures the consistency of metadata in the repository by employing object locking. For more information about the Repository Server, see Understanding the Repository in the Repository Guide.

PowerCenter Client
The PowerCenter Client consists of the following applications that you use to manage the repository, design mappings, mapplets, and create sessions to load the data:

Repository Server Administration Console. Use the Repository Server Administration console to administer the Repository Servers and repositories. Repository Manager. Use the Repository Manager to administer the metadata repository. You can create repository users and groups, assign privileges and permissions, and manage folders and locks. Designer. Use the Designer to create mappings that contain transformation instructions for the PowerCenter Server. Before you can create mappings, you must add source and target definitions to the repository. The Designer has five tools that you use to analyze sources, design target schemas, and build source-to-target mappings:

Source Analyzer. Import or create source definitions.

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Warehouse Designer. Import or create target definitions. Transformation Developer. Develop reusable transformations to use in mappings. Mapplet Designer. Create sets of transformations to use in mappings. Mapping Designer. Create mappings that the PowerCenter Server uses to extract, transform, and load data.

Workflow Manager. Use the Workflow Manager to create, schedule, and run workflows. A workflow is a set of instructions that describes how and when to run tasks related to extracting, transforming, and loading data. The PowerCenter Server runs workflow tasks according to the links connecting the tasks. You can run a task by placing it in a workflow. Workflow Monitor. Use the Workflow Monitor to monitor scheduled and running workflows for each PowerCenter Server. You can choose a Gantt Chart or Task view. You can also access details about those workflow runs.

Install the client tools on a Microsoft Windows machine. For more information about installation requirements, see Minimum System Requirements on page 70. A tip of the day displays when you start one of the PowerCenter Client tools. These tips help you use the PowerCenter Client tools more efficiently. You can display or hide the tips by choosing Help-Tip of the Day.

PowerCenter Server
The PowerCenter Server reads mapping and session information from the repository. It extracts data from the mapping sources and stores the data in memory while it applies the transformation rules that you configure in the mapping. The PowerCenter Server loads the transformed data into the mapping targets. The PowerCenter Server can achieve high performance using symmetric multi-processing systems. The PowerCenter Server can start and run multiple workflows concurrently. It can also concurrently process partitions within a single session. When you create multiple partitions within a session, the PowerCenter Server creates multiple database connections to a single source and extracts a separate range of data for each connection, according to the properties you configure. You can install the PowerCenter Server on a Windows or UNIX server machine. For more information about installation requirements, see Minimum System Requirements on page 70. You can communicate with the PowerCenter Server using the pmcmd program. For more information, see Using pmcmd in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Connectivity
PowerCenter uses the following types of connectivity:

Network protocol Native drivers

Introduction

ODBC

The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC and native drivers to connect to source and target databases. It uses TCP/IP to connect to the Repository Server. The Repository Server uses native drivers to connect to the repository database. The Workflow Manager and the PowerCenter Server use TCP/IP to communicate with each other. The PowerCenter Server uses native drivers to connect to the databases to move data. You can optionally use ODBC to connect the PowerCenter Server to the source and target databases. It uses TCP/IP to connect to the PowerCenter Client. Figure 1-2 shows the connectivity used within the PowerCenter architecture:
Figure 1-2. Connectivity Overview

Database Connections
The Repository Server maintains a pool of reusable database connections for serving client applications. The server generates a Repository Agent process for each database. The Repository Agent creates new database connections only if all the current connections are in use. For example, if 10 clients send requests to the Repository Agent one at a time, the agent requires only one connection. It reuses the same database connection for all the requests. If the 10 clients send requests simultaneously, the Repository Agent opens 10 connections. You can set the maximum number of open connections using the DatabasePoolSize parameter in the repository configuration file. For a session, a reader object holds the connection for as long as it needs to read the data from the source tables. A writer object holds a connection for as long as it needs to write data to the target tables.

Chapter 1: Product Overview

The PowerCenter Server maintains a database connection pool for stored procedure or lookup databases in a workflow. You can optionally set the MaxLookupSPDBConnections parameter to limit connections when you configure the PowerCenter service. The PowerCenter Server allows an unlimited number of connections to lookup or stored procedure databases. If a database user does not have permission for the number of connections a session requires, the session fails. For pre-session, post-session, and load stored procedures, consecutive stored procedures reuse a connection if they have identical connection attributes. Otherwise, the connection for one stored procedure closes and a new connection begins for the next stored procedure.

PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

You can use PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, a web-based application, to run prepackaged dashboards and reports against PowerCenter repository metadata. These reports help give you insight into your repository, which enhances your ability to analyze and manage your repository efficiently. You can run PowerCenter Metadata Reporter from a browser on any workstation, even a workstation that does not have PowerCenter tools installed.

Introduction

Using the Repository Server Administration Console

Use the Repository Server Administration Console to administer Repository Servers and repositories. A Repository Server can manage multiple repositories. You use the Repository Server Administration Console to create and administer the repository through the Repository Server. You can use the Administration Console to perform the following tasks:

Add, edit, and remove repository configurations. Export and import repository configurations. Create a repository. Promote a local repository to a global repository. Copy a repository. Delete a repository from the database. Back up and restore a repository. Start, stop, enable, and disable repositories. Send repository notification messages. Register and unregister a repository. Propagate domain connection information for a repository. View repository connections and locks. Close repository connections. Register and remove repository plug-ins. Upgrade a repository.

For details on working with repository configurations, creating repositories, promoting repositories, repository architecture, and connectivity, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide. For details on upgrading a repository, see Upgrading a Repository on page 185.

Administration Console Windows

The Administration Console can display the following windows:

Console Tree. Repository Servers and managed repositories. The Administration Console displays a different set of Action menu items depending on which node you select in the Console Tree. You can also right-click a node to access the Action menu items. The Console Tree contains the following nodes:

PowerCenter Repository Servers Repository Server name Repositories

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Repository name Connections Locks Activity Log Backups Packages

Main. The Main window displays details of the node you select in the Console Tree. For example, if you select a repository in the Console Tree, the Main window displays the properties of the repository, such as the status and start time. The Main window displays results in the following views:

List view. Displays a collection of items that includes an icon and a label. Figure 1-3 on page 9 shows the Administration Console in List view. HTML view. Displays repository information as a dynamic HTML page. The Administration Console only displays repositories in HTML view. Figure 1-4 on page 10 shows the Administration Console in HTML view.

Figure 1-3 shows the Administration Console:

Figure 1-3. Administration Console

Main Window

Console Tree

Nodes

Using the Repository Server Administration Console

Figure 1-4 shows repository details:

Figure 1-4. Repository Details

HTML View

Hypertext Link

10

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Using the Repository Manager

Use the Repository Manager to administer your repositories. The Repository Manager allows you to navigate through multiple folders and repositories, and perform the following tasks:

Manage the repository. You can perform repository management functions, such as copying, creating, starting, and shutting down repositories. You launch the Repository Server Administration Console to perform these functions. Implement repository security. You can create, edit, and delete repository users and user groups. You can assign and revoke repository privileges and folder permissions. Perform folder functions. You can create, edit, copy, and delete folders. Work you perform in the Designer and Workflow Manager is stored in folders. If you want to share metadata, you can configure a folder to be shared. View metadata. You can analyze sources, targets, mappings, and shortcut dependencies, search by keyword, and view the properties of repository objects.

For more information about the repository and the Repository Manager, see the Repository Guide.

Repository Manager Windows

The Repository Manager can display the following windows:

Navigator. Displays all objects that you create in the Repository Manager, the Designer, and the Workflow Manager. It is organized first by repository, then by folder and folder version. Viewable objects include sources, targets, dimensions, cubes, mappings, mapplets, transformations, sessions, and workflows. You can also view folder versions and business components. Main. Provides properties of the object selected in the Navigator window. The columns in this window change depending on the object selected in the Navigator window. Dependency. Shows dependencies on sources, targets, mappings, and shortcuts for objects selected in either the Navigator or Main window. Output. Provides the output of tasks executed within the Repository Manager, such as creating a repository.

Using the Repository Manager

11

Figure 1-5 shows the windows in the Repository Manager:

Figure 1-5. Repository Manager Windows

Navigator

Main

Dependency

Output Status Bar

12

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Figure 1-6 shows the Repository Manager Navigator:

Figure 1-6. Repository Manager Navigator Repository

Deployment Groups

Folders Mappings Sessions Workflows Shared Folder

Worklets

Repository Objects
You create repository objects using the Repository Manager, Designer, and Workflow Manager client tools. You can view the following objects in the Navigator window of the Repository Manager:

Source definitions. Definitions of database objects (tables, views, synonyms) or files that provide source data. Target definitions. Definitions of database objects or files that contain the target data. Multi-dimensional metadata. Target definitions that are configured as cubes and dimensions. Mappings. A set of source and target definitions along with transformations containing business logic that you build into the transformation. These are the instructions that the PowerCenter Server uses to transform and move data. Reusable transformations. Transformations that you can use in multiple mappings. Mapplets. A set of transformations that you can use in multiple mappings. Sessions and workflows. Sessions and workflows store information about how and when the PowerCenter Server moves data. A workflow is a set of instructions that describes how and when to run tasks related to extracting, transforming, and loading data. A session is a type of task that you can put in a workflow. Each session corresponds to a single mapping.

Using the Repository Manager

13

The Design Process

The goal of the design process is to create mappings that depict the flow of data between sources and targets, including changes made to the data before it reaches the targets. However, before you can create a mapping, you must first create or import source and target definitions. You might also want to create reusable objects, such as reusable transformations or mapplets. For a list of objects you create in the Design process, see Repository Objects on page 13. Perform the following design tasks in the Designer: 1. 2. Import source definitions. Use the Source Analyzer to connect to the sources and import the source definitions. Create or import target definitions. Use the Warehouse Designer to define relational, flat file, or XML targets to receive data from sources. You can import target definitions from a relational database or a flat file, or you can manually create a target definition. Create the target tables. If you add a target definition to the repository that does not exist in a relational database, you need to create target tables in your target database. You do this by generating and executing the necessary SQL code within the Warehouse Designer. Design mappings. Once you have source and target definitions in the repository, you can create mappings in the Mapping Designer. A mapping is a set of source and target definitions linked by transformation objects that define the rules for data transformation. A transformation is an object that performs a specific function in a mapping, such as looking up data or performing aggregation. Create mapping objects. Optionally, you can create reusable objects for use in multiple mappings. Use the Transformation Developer to create reusable transformations. Use the Mapplet Designer to create mapplets. A mapplet is a set of transformations that may contain sources and transformations. Debug mappings. Use the Mapping Designer to debug a valid mapping to gain troubleshooting information about data and error conditions. Import and export repository objects. You can import and export repository objects, such as sources, targets, transformations, mapplets, and mappings to archive or share metadata.

3.

4.

5.

6. 7.

Figure 1-7 shows a sample mapping with source and target definitions and transformations:
Figure 1-7. Sample Mapping

Source Definition

Transformations

Target Definition

For more information about the Designer, see the Designer Guide.

14

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Designer Windows
You can display the following windows in the Designer:

Navigator. Connect to repositories, and open folders within the Navigator. You can also copy objects and create shortcuts within the Navigator. Workspace. Open different tools in this window to create and edit repository objects, such as sources, targets, mapplets, transformations, and mappings. Output. View details about tasks you perform, such as saving your work or validating a mapping. Status bar. Displays the status of the operation you perform. Overview. An optional window to simplify viewing a workspace that contains a large mapping or multiple objects. Outlines the visible area in the workspace and highlights selected objects in color. Instance data. View transformation data while you run the Debugger to debug a mapping. Target data. View target data while you run the Debugger to debug a mapping.

Figure 1-8 shows the default Designer windows:

Figure 1-8. Designer Windows

Workspace

Navigator

Output

Status Bar

The Design Process

15

Loading Data
In the Workflow Manager, you define a set of instructions to execute tasks, such as sessions, emails, and shell commands. This set of instructions is called a workflow. After you create a workflow in the Workflow Designer, the next step is to add tasks to the workflow. The Workflow Manager includes tasks, such as the Session task, the Command task, and the Email task so you can design your workflow. The Session task is based on a mapping you build in the Designer. You then connect tasks with links to specify the order of execution for the tasks you created. Use conditional links and workflow variables to create branches in the workflow. When the workflow start time arrives, the PowerCenter Server retrieves the metadata from the repository to execute the tasks in the workflow. You can monitor the workflow status in the Workflow Monitor.

Workflow Manager
The Workflow Manager consists of three tools to help you develop a workflow:

Task Developer. Create tasks you want to accomplish in the workflow in the Task Developer. Workflow Designer. Create a workflow by connecting tasks with links in the Workflow Designer. You can also create tasks in the Workflow Designer as you develop the workflow. Worklet Designer. Create a worklet in the Worklet Designer. A worklet is an object that groups a set of tasks. A worklet is similar to a workflow, but without scheduling information. You can nest multiple worklets inside a workflow. PowerCenter Server connection. Register the PowerCenter Server with the repository before you can start it or create a session to run against it. Database connections. Create connections to source and target systems. Other connections. If you want to use external loaders or FTP, you configure these connections in the Workflow Manager.

Before you create a workflow, you must configure the following connection information:

For more information about configuring the Workflow Manager, see Configuring the Workflow Manager in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Workflow Manager Windows

The Workflow Manager displays the following windows to help you create and organize workflows:

Navigator. Allows you to connect to and work in multiple repositories and folders. Workspace. Allows you to create, edit, and view tasks, workflows, and worklets.

16

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Output. Displays messages from the PowerCenter Server and the Repository Server. The Output window also displays messages when you save or validate tasks and workflows. Overview. An optional window that makes it easier to view workbooks containing large workflows. Outlines the visible area in the workspace and highlights selected objects in color. Choose View-Overview Window to display this window.

The Workflow Manager also displays a status bar that shows the status of the operation you perform. Figure 1-9 shows the Workflow Manager windows:
Figure 1-9. Workflow Manager Windows Navigator Workspace

Overview

Status Bar

Output

Workflow Monitor
After you create a workflow, you run the workflow in the Workflow Manager and monitor it in the Workflow Monitor. The Workflow Monitor is a tool that displays details about workflow runs in two views, Gantt Chart view and Task view. You can monitor workflows in online and offline modes. The Workflow Monitor consists of the following windows:

Navigator window. Displays monitored repositories, servers, and repositories objects. Output window. Displays messages from the PowerCenter Server. Time window. Displays progress of workflow runs. Gantt Chart view. Displays details about workflow runs in chronological format. Task view. Displays details about workflow runs in a report format.
Loading Data 17

Figure 1-10 shows the Workflow Monitor:

Figure 1-10. Workflow Monitor

Time Window Navigator Window

Gantt Chart View

Task View

Output Window

18

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Using PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

Use PowerCenter Metadata Reporter to browse and analyze PowerCenter metadata. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter provides the following types of reports to help you administer your PowerCenter environment:

Configuration Management. With Configuration Management reports, you can analyze deployment groups and PowerCenter repository object labels. Operations. With Operations reports, you can analyze operational statistics for workflows, worklets, and sessions. Operational reports provide information such as connection usage, server load by period, and workflow and session load times, completion statuses, and errors. PowerCenter Objects. With PowerCenter Object reports, you can identify PowerCenter objects, their properties, and their interdependencies with other repository objects. Security. With the Security report, you can analyze users, groups, and their association within the repository.

You can access PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports from the following areas in PowerAnalyzer:

Dashboards tab. Provides access to PowerCenter Metadata Reporter dashboards, which contain links to reports. Find tab. Provides access to the primary reports associated with an analytic workflow and to standalone reports. To access workflow reports, run the associated primary report, click the Workflow tab, and then navigate through the analytic workflow until you reach the desired workflow report.

Before you can set up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, you must first install and configure PowerCenter and PowerAnalyzer. PowerCenter provides the source metadata that you analyze. Create reports, analytic workflows, dashboards, schedules, and personalized alerts to analyze PowerCenter metadata in PowerAnalyzer. For more information on PowerAnalyzer, see the PowerAnalyzer documentation. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter uses PowerCenter MX Views to access metadata. For more information on the MX views, see Using MX Views in the Repository Guide.

Dashboards Tab
PowerCenter Metadata Reporter provides dashboards that you import during the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter setup. The dashboards contain indicators and links to reports. Once you set up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, PowerAnalyzer updates the charts and indicators in the dashboards.

Using PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

19

Figure 1-11 shows the Dashboards tab:

Figure 1-11. Metadata Reporter Dashboards Tab

Find Tab
You can use the Find tab to search reports stored in the Public Folders or in the Personal Folder of each user. The Public Folder contains the PowerCenter Metadata Reports folder and subfolders. Select the folders and reports you want to view in the Folders task area.

20

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Figure 1-12 shows the Find tab:

Figure 1-12. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Folder Structure

Folders task area displays the report folder structure.

Details task area displays the properties of the selected object.

Results task area displays the contents of the selected folder or the results of a search.

For more information about the Find or Dashboard tabs in PowerAnalyzer, see the PowerAnalyzer User Guide.

Using PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

21

Getting Started
Before you can begin using PowerCenter, you must create the environment and perform the following administration tasks to allow access to the repository and the PowerCenter Server: 1. Configure the sources. If you extract data from relational sources, ask the database administrator to create user profiles with read access. These user profiles allow you to import source definitions into the repository and access the sources at runtime. If you extract data from file sources, the files must be accessible to the PowerCenter Server and Client machines. 2. Configure the targets. Ask the database administrator to create user profiles with read and write access. These user profiles allow you to import target definitions into the repository and write to the targets at runtime. If the target database does not exist, create it using the database administration tools included with your RDBMS. After you create the target database, you can use the Designer to design and create target tables. For flat file targets, you need a target directory large enough to process the resulting files. 3. Choose globalization settings and data movement modes. The data movement mode you use depends on whether you want the PowerCenter Server to process single-byte data or multibyte character data. You select code pages for the repository, PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server. Create repository database. Create a database for the repository. Users accessing the repository database need full rights in that database. If you upgrade the repository to a new version, you need database rights to drop or modify these tables. Install the PowerCenter Client. Install the client software on a machine that accesses the sources, targets, and repository databases, as well as the PowerCenter Server. Install and configure the Repository Server. Install and configure the Repository Server on a machine that accesses the repository database, the PowerCenter Client, and the PowerCenter Server. Install and configure the PowerCenter Server. Install the PowerCenter Server on a Windows or UNIX system that accesses the sources, targets, and the repository database. Configure connectivity. Configure network, native, and ODBC connectivity. Create ODBC data sources to connect to the PowerCenter Clients to the sources and targets. You must also have network connections between all databases and PowerCenter Servers. Create the repository. After you configure connectivity between source, target, and repository databases, you can create the metadata repository. Connect to the Repository Server from within the Repository Server Administration Console to create the metadata repository. The Repository Server connects to the repository database and runs the SQL to create the repository tables. All the objects you create with PowerCenter are stored as metadata in the repository.

4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9.

22

Chapter 1: Product Overview

10. Create repository users and groups. Create groups and user profiles, then assign privileges and permissions that determine tasks that users can perform. 11. Register the PowerCenter Server. Before you can start the PowerCenter Server, you must register the PowerCenter Server so the Workflow Manager can direct the PowerCenter Server to the repository.

Getting Started

23

24

Chapter 1: Product Overview

Chapter 2

Globalization Overview
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 26 Locales, 28 Data Movement Modes, 29 Code Page Overview, 32 Relaxed Data Code Page Validation, 44 Troubleshooting for Relaxed Code Page Validation, 47 Case Study: Processing 7-bit ASCII Data, 49 Case Study: Processing ISO 8859-1 Data, 53 The ISO 8859-1 Environment, 54

25

Overview
The PowerCenter Server can process single-byte data or multibyte data. PowerCenter supports multibyte character data movement, which means you can write multiple language source data to targets. The PowerCenter Client user interface allows you to enter multibyte character data in mappings. When you install PowerCenter, you must decide if you want the PowerCenter Server to process single-byte data or multibyte data. To help you decide, this chapter describes how the system locale affects data movement and code page settings, summarizes the differences between the PowerCenter Server data movement modes, and describes what happens when you change data movement modes. It also includes background information about code pages and details on code page validation and code page compatibility. You can easily change the PowerCenter Server data movement mode at a later time. When you install PowerCenter, use the operating system locale, which specifies the language, code pages, territory, and collation order. Code pages distinguish between 7-bit ASCII, ISO 8859-1 (8-bit ASCII), and multibyte characters in the PowerCenter Client and Server, repository, source, and target databases. The PowerCenter Server can transform character data in two modes, ASCII and Unicode. The default data movement mode is ASCII, which passes US-ASCII character data. To pass 8bit or multibyte character data from sources to targets, use the Unicode data movement mode. When you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, it uses two bytes for each character to move data and performs additional checks at the session level to ensure data integrity. Code pages contain the encoding to specify characters in a set of one or more languages. You select a code page based on the type of character data in the mappings. Character data can vary from 1 to 8 bytes in size. Compatibility between code pages is essential for accurate data movement. To ensure data passes accurately through your data warehouse environment, the following components must work together:

Operating system locale settings Operating system code page PowerCenter Server data movement mode PowerCenter Server code page PowerCenter Client code page PowerCenter repository code page PowerCenter Repository Server code page Source and target database code pages

PowerCenter also allows you to configure the PowerCenter Server for relaxed data code page validation. Relaxed validation lifts restrictions on source and target data code pages.

26

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

This chapter also provides two case studies to illustrate how you can configure data warehouses to process 7-bit ASCII using the ASCII data movement mode and ISO 8859-1 (8bit ASCII) data using the Unicode data movement mode.

Overview

27

Locales
Every machine has a locale, a set of preferences related to the user environment. PowerCenter uses locale settings on each machine to run in the local environment. You can set three locale settings in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings and System Properties dialog boxes:

System locale. Determines the language, code pages, and associated bitmap font files that are used as defaults for the system. User locale. Determines the default formats to display date, time, currency, and number formats. Input locale. Describes the input method, such as the keyboard, of the system language.

Locales allow you flexibility in setting up the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, and Repository Server on Windows machines.

System Locale
The system locale is also referred to as the system default locale. It determines which ANSI and OEM code pages, as well as bitmap font files, are used as defaults for the system. The system locale is already set on your system and you do not need to change settings to run PowerCenter. The system locale also contains the language setting that displays in the user interface, including in dialog boxes and error messages. A message catalog file defines the language in which messages display.

User Locale
The user locale displays date, time, currency, and number formats for each user. You can specify different user locales on a single machine. Create a user locale if you are working with data on a machine that is in a different language than the operating system. For example, you might be an English user working in Japan on a Japanese operating system. You can set English as the user locale to use English standards in your work in Japan. When you create a new user account, the machine uses a default user locale. You can change this default setting once the account is created.

Input Locale
An input locale specifies the keyboard layout of a particular language. You can set an input locale in the Regional Settings on a Windows machine to type characters of a specific language. For example, if you are working on a Japanese operating system and need to type text in English, you can set an English input locale for the keyboard setting. The keyboard allows you to type English text on the Japanese operating system.

28

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Data Movement Modes

The data movement mode you use depends on whether you want the PowerCenter Server to process single-byte data or multibyte character data. The data movement mode you select can affect the enforcement of appropriate code page relationships and code page validation in the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, and Repository Server.

Character Data Movement Modes

The PowerCenter Server runs in two modes:

Unicode. The universal character-encoding standard that supports all major languages. When the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode data movement mode, it allots two bytes for each character. The PowerCenter Server uses the additional byte for non-ASCII characters, such as Japanese characters. Run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode when source data contains multibyte or ISO 8859-1 (8-bit ASCII) data. ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). 7-bit ASCII contains a set of 128 characters and is the common denominator in all other character sets. When the PowerCenter Server runs in the ASCII data movement mode, it holds all data in a single byte.

When you select a data movement mode, code pages used for sessions must have appropriate relationships. For details on code page compatibility, see Code Page Compatibility on page 34. In ASCII mode, the PowerCenter Server processes single byte characters and does not perform code page conversions. In Unicode mode, the PowerCenter Server recognizes multibyte character data and allocates 2 bytes to every character. The PowerCenter Server performs code page conversions from sources to targets. When you set the PowerCenter Server to Unicode data movement mode, it uses the Unicode character set to process characters in a specified code page, such as ISO 8859-1 (8-bit ASCII) or Shift-JIS. When you run the PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, it does not enforce session code page relationships. When you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, it enforces session code page relationships. For details on how the PowerCenter Server enforces session code page relationships in Unicode data movement mode, see PowerCenter Code Page Validation on page 40. Other character modes are defined as follows:

MBCS (Multibyte Character Set). A mixed-width character set that contains characters of more than one byte. UTF-8. Characters range from one to three bytes in size. If you enable code page validation, you can use UTF-8 for target database code pages only. ISO 8859-1 (8-bit ASCII). Most European languages use this mode for accented Roman characters.

Data Movement Modes

29

Changing Data Movement Modes

You can change the PowerCenter Server data movement mode in the PowerCenter Server configuration parameters. After you change the data movement mode, the PowerCenter Server runs in the new data movement mode the next time you start the PowerCenter Server. When the data movement mode changes, the PowerCenter Server handles character data differently. To avoid creating data inconsistencies in your target tables, the PowerCenter Server performs additional checks for sessions that reuse session caches and files. Table 2-1 describes how the PowerCenter Server handles session files and caches after you change the data movement mode:
Table 2-1. Session and File Cache Handling After Data Movement Mode Change Session File or Cache Session Log File (*.log) Workflow Log Reject File (*.bad) Output File (*.out) Indicator File (*.in) Incremental Aggregation Files (*.idx, *.dat) Time of Creation or Use Each session. Each workflow. Each session. Sessions writing to flat file. Sessions writing to flat file. Sessions with Incremental Aggregation enabled. PowerCenter Server Behavior After Data Movement Mode Change No change in behavior. Creates a new session log for each session using the PowerCenter Server code page. No change in behavior. Creates a new workflow log file for each workflow using the PowerCenter Server code page. No change in behavior. Appends rejected data to the existing reject file using the PowerCenter Server code page. No change in behavior for delimited flat files. Creates a new output file for each session using the target code page. No change in behavior. Creates a new indicator file for each session. When files are removed or deleted, the PowerCenter Server creates new files. When files are not removed or deleted, the PowerCenter Server fails the session with the following error message:
TE_7038 Aggregate Error: ServerMode: [server data movement mode] and CachedMode: [data movement mode that created the files] mismatch.

You should also remove or delete files created using a different code page. Unnamed Persistent Lookup Files (*.idx, *.dat) Sessions with a Lookup transformation configured for a named persistent lookup cache. Sessions with a Lookup transformation configured for a persistent lookup cache. Rebuilds the persistent lookup cache.

Named Persistent Lookup Files (*.idx, *.dat)

Fails the session.

30

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

If you are not sure how you want to run the PowerCenter Server, install and configure PowerCenter for Unicode data movement mode. This allows you the flexibility to change the PowerCenter Server data movement mode from Unicode to ASCII, and from ASCII to Unicode.

Data Movement Modes

31

Code Page Overview

A code page contains the encoding to specify characters in a set of one or more languages. An encoding is the assignment of a number to a character in the character set. You use code pages to identify data that might be in different languages. For example, if you are importing Japanese data into a mapping, you must select a Japanese code page for the source data. When you choose a code page, the program or application for which you set the code page refers to a specific set of data that describes the characters the application recognizes. This influences the way that application stores, receives, and sends character data.

Operating System Code Pages

Most machines use one of the following code pages:

US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS Latin1 (MS 1252) for Windows operating systems Latin1 (ISO 8859-1) for UNIX operating systems IBM EBCDIC US English (IBM037) for mainframe systems

The US-ASCII code page is the most basic of all code pages, with support for United States English. The US-ASCII code page is compatible only with itself. When you install the PowerCenter Client, Server, or repository on an US-ASCII system, you must install each PowerCenter Client, Server, and repository on US-ASCII systems. You must also run the PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode. MS Latin1 and Latin1 both support English and most Western European languages and are compatible with each other. When you install the PowerCenter Client, Server, or repository on a system using one of these code pages, you can install the rest of the components on any machine using the MS Latin1 or Latin1 code pages. You can use the IBM EBCDIC code page for the PowerCenter Server when you install it on a mainframe system. You cannot install the PowerCenter Client or repository on mainframe systems, so you cannot use the IBM EBCDIC code page for PowerCenter Client or repository installations.

UNIX Code Pages

In the United States, most UNIX operating systems have more than one code page installed and use the US-ASCII code page by default. If you want to run PowerCenter in a US-ASCIIonly environment and run the PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, you can use the USASCII code page. UNIX systems allow you to change the code page by changing the LANG_C, LC_CTYPE or LC_ALL environment variable. For example, you want to find the code page an HP-UX machine uses. You use the following command in the C shell to view your environment:
locale

32

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

This results in the following output, in which C implies ASCII:

LANG="C" LC_CTYPE="C" LC_NUMERIC="C" LC_TIME="C" LC_ALL="C"

To change the language to English and require the system to use the Latin1 code page, you can use the following command:
setenv LANG en_US.iso88591

When you check the locale again, it has been changed to use Latin1 (ISO 8859-1):
LANG="en_US.iso88591" LC_CTYPE="en_US.iso88591" LC_NUMERIC="en_US.iso88591" LC_TIME="en_US.iso88591" LC_ALL="en_US.iso88591"

For details on changing the locale or code page of your UNIX system, see your UNIX documentation.

Windows Code Pages

Windows does not display the code page used by the operating system in the environment settings. However, you can make an educated guess based on the country in which you purchased the system and the language the system uses. Windows has two code pages:

ANSI Code Page. Windows uses the ANSI code page for Win32 applications that interact with the operating system through the Windows GUI. Applications, such as Microsoft SQL Server, are considered ANSI servers if they use code pages MS1252-MS1259. The PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server use the ANSI code page of the machine they are installed on. OEM Code Page. Windows uses the OEM code page for Win32 applications that interact with the operating system through the Windows console. Applications such as Microsoft SQL Server are considered OEM servers if they use any code page other than MS1252MS1259.

Windows operating system is based on Unicode, but uses only one local code page at a time as the ANSI code page. If you purchase Windows in the United States and use English as an input and display language, your operating system ANSI and OEM code pages use MS Latin1 (MS1252) by default. However, if you install additional display or input languages from the Windows installation CD and use those languages, the operating system might use a different code page. For details on the default code page for your Windows system, contact Microsoft.

Code Page Overview

33

Choosing a Code Page

Choose code pages based on the character data you use in mappings. Character data can be represented by character modes based on the character size.

Character Sizes
Character size is the amount of storage space a character requires in the database. Different character sizes can be defined as follows:

Single byte. A character represented as a unique number between 0 and 255. 1 byte is 8 bits. ASCII characters are single byte characters. Double byte. A character exactly 2 bytes or 16 bits in size represented as a unique number 256 or greater. Many Asian languages, such as Japanese, have double-byte characters. Multibyte. A character 2 to 8 bytes in size represented as a unique number 256 or greater. Many Asian languages, such as Japanese, have multibyte characters.

Code Page Compatibility

Compatibility between code pages is essential for accurate data movement when the PowerCenter Server runs in the Unicode data movement mode. When two code pages are compatible, the characters encoded in the two code pages are virtually identical. For example, IBM EBCDIC US English and Latin1 code pages contain identical characters and are compatible with each other. The repository and PowerCenter Server can each use one of these code pages and can pass data back and forth without data loss. One code page can be a subset or superset of another:

Superset. A code page is a superset of another code page when it contains characters encoded in the other code page. The superset can also contain additional characters not contained in the other code page. For example, MS Latin1 is a superset of the ASCII code page because it contains all characters in the US-ASCII code page. A code page can also be considered a superset of itself and all other compatible code pages. Subset. A code page is a subset of another code page when all characters in the code page are also encoded in the other code page. For example, the US-ASCII code page is a subset of the MS Latin1 code page because all characters in the US-ASCII code page are also encoded in the MS Latin1 code page.

For accurate data movement, the target code page must be a superset of the source code page. If the source database code page is a superset of the target code page, the PowerCenter Server cannot process the characters because they cannot be encoded in the target code page. The target then results in incorrect or missing data. For example, Latin1 is a superset of USASCII. It contains all US-ASCII character encoding in addition to its own character set encoding. You can select US-ASCII for the source code page and Latin1 for the target code page. However, if you select Latin1 as the source code page and US-ASCII as the target code page, you might lose character data.

34

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Figure 2-1 illustrates the relationship between source and target database code pages when you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode data movement mode:
Figure 2-1. Required Code Page Relationships for Unicode Data Movement Mode Target Code Page

PowerCenter Server Code Page

Source Code Page

When you install or upgrade to run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, you need to ensure code page compatibility between the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, Repository Server, and repository database machines. In Unicode mode, the PowerCenter Server enforces code page compatibility between the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, and repository. In addition, when you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, code pages associated with sessions must have the appropriate relationships:

For each source in the session, the source code page must be a subset of the PowerCenter Server code page. The target code page must be a superset of the PowerCenter Server code page. If the session contains a Lookup transformation, the lookup database must use a code page that is compatible with the PowerCenter Server. If the session contains a Stored Procedure transformation, the stored procedure database must use a code page that is compatible with the PowerCenter Server. If the session contains an External Procedure transformation, the data returned by the procedure must be two-way compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. If the session contains a Custom transformation, the data returned by the procedure must be two-way compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page.

If you have source and target database connections registered in the repository and you want to run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, you might need to reconfigure the PowerCenter Server machine or choose a different machine for the PowerCenter Server to ensure the appropriate session code page relationships. For a list of compatible code pages, see Informatica Code Page Relationships on page 340. Set code pages for the following components:

PowerCenter Client. The code page of the PowerCenter Client operating system. Clients connected to different repositories might have different code pages.

Code Page Overview

35

PowerCenter Server. The code page of the PowerCenter Server operating system. When you register the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager, select the same code page as the operating system code page. PowerCenter Repository Server. The code page of the Repository Server operating system. The Repository Server uses this code page by default when you configure the Windows or UNIX locale. PowerCenter repository. The code page of data in the repository. When you create or upgrade a repository, you select a code page. Source and target files. The code page of the operating system on which source or target files reside. Different operating systems can have different code pages. XML source and target files. XML files contain an encoding declaration that indicates the code page in the file. XML source definitions use the repository code page. XML target definitions use the code page declared in the XML file. Source and target databases. The code page of the database for relational sources or targets. Different databases can have different code pages.

Most database servers use two code pages, a client code page to receive data from client applications, and a server code page to store the data. When the database server is running, it converts data between the two code pages, if they are different. In this type of database configuration, the PowerCenter Server interacts with the database client code page only. Thus, code pages used by the PowerCenter Server, such as the repository, source, or target code pages, must be identical to the database client code page. The database client code page is usually identical to the operating system code page on which the PowerCenter Server is running. For details on specific database client and server code pages, consult your database documentation.

PowerCenter Client Code Page

The PowerCenter Client code page is the code page of the operating system of the PowerCenter Client. To communicate with the PowerCenter Server and repository, the PowerCenter Client code page must be:

Compatible with the repository code page Compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page

PowerCenter Server Code Page

The PowerCenter Server code page is the code page of the operating system of the PowerCenter Server machine. When you register the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager, you enter the identical code page. The Workflow Manager stores this information as metadata in the repository. When the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode mode, it validates code pages when you start a session to ensure accurate data movement. It uses session code pages to convert character data.

36

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

When the PowerCenter Server runs in ASCII mode, it does not validate session code pages. It reads all character data as ASCII characters and does not perform code page conversions. The PowerCenter Server code page must be:

A superset of the source code page A subset of the target code page Compatible with the repository code page

Each code page has associated sort orders. When you configure a session, the Workflow Manager allows you to select one of the sort orders associated with the PowerCenter Server code page. When you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, it uses the selected session sort order to sort character data. When you run the PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, it sorts all character data using a binary sort order. If you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, you must enter the session code page information in the session configuration. If a session contains a Lookup or Stored Procedure transformation, the databases on which the lookup table or stored procedure reside must be compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. If a session contains an External Procedure or Custom transformation, the procedure must pass data in a code page that is twoway compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. If you run the PowerCenter Server in the United States on Windows, Informatica recommends using MS Windows Latin1 (ANSI) as the PowerCenter Server code page. If you run the PowerCenter Server in the United States on UNIX, Informatica recommends using ISO 8859-1 as the PowerCenter Server code page. If you use pmcmd to communicate with the PowerCenter Server, the code page of the operating system hosting pmcmd must be identical to the PowerCenter Server code page. The PowerCenter Server generates session log files, reject files, caches and cache files, and performance detail files based on the PowerCenter Server code page.

Repository Server Code Page

The Repository Server code page is the same as the code page of the Repository Server operating system. The Repository Server code page must be:

Compatible with the PowerCenter Client code page Compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page Compatible with the repository code page

Repository Code Page

The repository code page is the code page of the data in the repository. The Repository Agent process uses the repository code page to insert metadata in and retrieve metadata from the repository database. Choose the repository code page when you create or upgrade a repository. The repository code page must be compatible with the following code pages:

PowerCenter Client code page

Code Page Overview 37

PowerCenter Server code page Repository Server code page

A global repository code page must be a subset of the local repository code page so you can create shortcuts to the local repository. To copy objects from a local repository to a global repository, the code pages of both repositories must be compatible.

Source Code Page

The source code page is the code page associated with the source database, flat file or XML file, or the source operating system. The source code page must be:

A subset of the PowerCenter Server code page A subset of the target code page

Note: Select IBM EBCDIC as your source database connection code page only if you access

EBCDIC data, such as data from a mainframe extract file.

Target Code Page

The target code page is the code page of the target database or flat file or XML file operating system. The target code page must be:

A superset of the source code page A superset of the PowerCenter Server code page

The PowerCenter Server creates session indicator files, session output files, and external loader control and data files using the target flat file code page.
Note: Select IBM EBCDIC as your target database connection code page only if you access

EBCDIC data, such as data from a mainframe extract file.

38

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Code Page Compatibility Summary

Figure 2-2 illustrates code page compatibility between sources, targets, the repository, the Repository Server, the PowerCenter Client, and the PowerCenter Server:
Figure 2-2. Code Page Compatibility

Table 2-2 summarizes code page compatibility between sources, targets, the repository, the Repository Server, the PowerCenter Client, and the PowerCenter Server:
Table 2-2. Code Page Compatibility Component Code Page Source (including relational, flat file, and XML file) Target (including relational, XML files, and flat files) Code Page Compatibility Subset of target. Subset of PowerCenter Server. Superset of source. Superset of PowerCenter Server. PowerCenter Server creates external loader data and control files using the target flat file code page. Compatible with PowerCenter Server and repository. Superset of source. Subset of target. Identical to PowerCenter Server operating system and machine hosting pmcmd. Compatible with repository and PowerCenter Client. Compatible with database connection code page used by Lookup and Stored Procedure transformations.

Lookup and Stored Procedures PowerCenter Server

Code Page Overview

39

Table 2-2. Code Page Compatibility Component Code Page Repository Server Global Repository Local Repository Standalone Repository PowerCenter Client Machine hosting pmcmd Code Page Compatibility Compatible with repository. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server. Compatible with local repository. Can also be a subset of local repository. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and Server. Compatible with global repository. Can also be a superset of global repository. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and Server. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and Server. Compatible with PowerCenter Server and repository. Identical to PowerCenter Server.

PowerCenter Code Page Validation

For PowerCenter, the machines hosting the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, Repository Server, and repository database must use compatible code pages. This eliminates the risk of data or repository inconsistencies. When the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode data movement mode, the PowerCenter Server enforces session code page relationships. When the PowerCenter Server runs in ASCII mode, it does not enforce session code page relationships. To ensure compatibility, the PowerCenter Client and Server perform the following code page validation both during installation, upgrade, and daily use:

Repository Server restricts the use of EBCDIC-based code pages for repositories. Since you cannot install the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, Repository Server, or repository database on mainframe systems, the Repository Server does not allow you to select EBCDIC-based code pages, like IBM EBCDIC, as the repository code page. Repository Server restricts repository code page choices to those compatible with the Repository Server. The Repository Server code page must be compatible with the repository code page to prevent data loss or inconsistencies. After you install the Repository Server, it uses the operating system code page as the Repository Server code page. When you create a new repository or upgrade an existing repository, you select a code page for the repository. The Repository Server restricts code page choices to those compatible with the Repository Server code page. PowerCenter Client connects to the repository only when its code page is compatible with the repository code page. If the PowerCenter Client code page is not compatible with the repository code page, the PowerCenter Client fails to connect to the repository code page with the following error:
REP_12782 The repository <repository name>s code page <code page name> and <PowerCenter Client>s code page <code page name> are incompatible.

Once selected, you cannot change the repository code page. After you create or upgrade a repository, the Repository Manager does not allow you to change the repository code page. This prevents data loss and inconsistencies in the repository. If necessary, you can change

40

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

the repository code page to a compatible code page by copying your existing repository to a new database. However, if the new code page is not compatible with the original repository code page, the Repository Manager does not copy the repository.

The PowerCenter Server starts only when the PowerCenter Server code page is compatible with the repository code page. The PowerCenter Server code page must be compatible with the repository code page to prevent data loss or inconsistencies. Like the PowerCenter Client, the PowerCenter Server uses the operating system code page as the PowerCenter Server code page. If it is not compatible, the PowerCenter Server writes the following message in the Windows Event Viewer or the UNIX server log or server error log:
Error: Server can only obtain a read-only connection with the repository. Please make sure the code page where the server is running is two way compatible with the repository code page.

The PowerCenter Server starts only when the PowerCenter Server code page is registered correctly in the Workflow Manager. To ensure accurate session validation, the PowerCenter Server code page must be registered correctly in the Workflow Manager. After you install or upgrade the PowerCenter Client and repository, the Workflow Manager sets the code page for each registered server to the repository code page. The PowerCenter Server starts only when the code page registered in the Workflow Manager matches the PowerCenter Server code page. If the code page does not match the PowerCenter Server code page, the PowerCenter Server writes the following message in the Windows Event Viewer or UNIX server or server error log:
LM_36011 Error: codepage mismatch. Server is running in codepage <PowerCenter Server code page> whereas the server is configured in the Workflow Manager to run in codepage <user-configured code page>.

PowerCenter Client restricts PowerCenter Server code page choices to those compatible with the PowerCenter Client. The PowerCenter Server code page must be compatible with the PowerCenter Client code page to prevent data loss or inconsistencies. When you register a PowerCenter Server, the Workflow Manager restricts code page choices to those compatible with the PowerCenter Client code page. When in Unicode data movement mode, the PowerCenter Server starts workflows with the appropriate source and target code page relationships for each session. When the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode mode, the code page for every session source must be a subset of the PowerCenter Server code page, and the code page for each target must be a superset of the PowerCenter Server code page. This prevents data loss during a workflow. For details on code page relationships, subsets, and supersets, see Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages on page 346. If the source and target code pages do not have the appropriate relationships to the PowerCenter Server code page, the PowerCenter Server fails the session and writes the following message to the session log:
TM_6227 Error: Code page incompatible in session <session name>. <Additional details>.

Code Page Overview

41

Workflow Manager validates source and target code page relationships for each session. Source and target code page relationships are critical when the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode mode. As a result, the Workflow Manager always checks code page relationships when you save a session, regardless of the PowerCenter Server data movement mode. The Workflow Manager alerts you to inappropriate code page relationships in case you change the PowerCenter Server to Unicode mode or run the workflow containing the session on a different PowerCenter Server. If you configure a session with invalid source or target code page relationships, the Workflow Manager issues a warning similar to the following when you save the session:

If you want to run the workflow containing the session on a PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, you can save the session as configured. If you want to run the workflow on a PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, perform the most appropriate of the following actions:

Change the relational source or target database connections to those with appropriate code pages, or change the file source or target code page and location. You can set the code page for file sources and targets in the file properties dialog boxes in the session properties. The Workflow Manager restricts source file code page choices to subsets of the PowerCenter Server code page. The Workflow Manager also restricts target file code page choices to supersets of the PowerCenter Server code page. Correct the configured code pages in the database connections. Edit the code page for relational sources and targets in the Workflow Manager database connection dialog box. Because you can use the same database connection as a source or target, the Workflow Manager restricts code page choices to either subsets or supersets of the PowerCenter Server code page. Correct the configured code page for the registered server.

Workflow Manager validates code pages for lookup and/or stored procedure databases in a session. When the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode mode, the database hosting a lookup table or stored procedure for a session must use a code page that is compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. As with source and target code pages, the Workflow Manager always checks these code page relationships. When you configure the session with invalid lookup or stored procedure code page relationships, the Workflow Manager issues the following warning:
The database <lookup or stored procedure database name> and server <server name> do not have compatible code pages. Do you want to save the session?

If you want to run the workflow containing this session on a PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, you can save the session as configured. If you want to run the workflow on a

42

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, perform the most appropriate of the following actions:

Change the lookup or stored procedure database connections to those with appropriate code pages. You can configure the database used for the Lookup and Stored Procedure transformation in the transformation property sheet or enter a session override on the Transformations tab of the session properties. Correct the code page for the database connection. You can configure the database code page in the Workflow Manager. Correct the configured code page for the registered server.

Code Page Overview

43

Relaxed Data Code Page Validation

Your environment may require you to process data from different sources using character sets from different languages. For example, you might need to process data from English and Japanese sources using the same repository, or you may wish to extract source data encoded in a Unicode character set such as UTF-8. Configuring the PowerCenter Server for relaxed data code page validation lifts code page restrictions. This allows you to process data using sources and targets with incompatible code pages, or sources and targets with code pages incompatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. Although relaxed data code page validation lifts source and target code page restrictions, it does not safeguard against possible data inconsistencies when you move data between two incompatible code pages. PowerCenter includes the following relaxed data code page validation features when you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode data movement mode:

Lifted restrictions for source and target data code page. You can use any code page supported by PowerCenter for your source and target data. Lifted restrictions for session sort order. You can use any sort order supported by PowerCenter when you configure a session. PowerCenter Server writes multibyte characters to the session log. You can configure the PowerCenter Server to write to the session log using the UTF-8 character set. This ensures that multibyte characters display properly when you view the session log.

Configuring the PowerCenter Server

To configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows for data code page relaxation, you must complete the following tasks:

Disable data code page validation. Configure the PowerCenter Server for Unicode data movement mode. Configure the PowerCenter Server to write to the session log using the UTF-8 character set.

You can configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows for data code page relaxation in the PowerCenter Server setup program. On the Configuration tab of the PowerCenter Server setup program, select UNICODE as the data movement mode, clear the Validate Data Code Pages option, and select the Session Log in UTF-8. To configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX for data code page relaxation, run pmconfig and set DataMovementMode to UNICODE, ValidateDataCodePages to No, and SessionLogInUTF8 to Yes.

44

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Relaxed Code Page Validation

Configuring the PowerCenter Server for relaxed data code page validation lifts restrictions on source and target data code pages. However, the PowerCenter Server and PowerCenter Client continue to prevent data inconsistencies between PowerCenter components by enforcing code page compatibility between the PowerCenter Server, PowerCenter Client, Repository Server, and the repository. When you configure the PowerCenter Server to relax data code page validation, the PowerCenter Server lifts code page compatibility restrictions on sources and targets, allowing you to extract, transform, and load data from source definitions in the Designer. Although the PowerCenter Server lifts source and target code page restrictions, it enforces other code page relationships and checks query conversions at runtime. When you start the PowerCenter Server, it enforces the following code page relationships:

The PowerCenter Server code page must be two-way compatible with the repository and Repository Server code pages. The PowerCenter Server code page must be the same code page as operating system the PowerCenter Server is installed on.

When you run a workflow with relaxed data code page validation, the PowerCenter Server writes the following message to the session log:
TM_6185 WARNING! Data codepage validation is disabled in this session.

When you relax data code page validation, the PowerCenter Server writes descriptions of the code pages selected for source and target files and database connections to the session log. The PowerCenter Server also writes descriptions of code pages for lookup and stored procedure databases to the session log. The following example shows these descriptions as they appear in a session log:
TM_6186 Repository codepage: [MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin 1] TM_6188 Target file [$PMTargetFileDir\passthru.out] codepage: [MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5] TM_6190 Target database connection [Japanese Oracle] codepage: [MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS] TM_6189 Source database connection [Japanese Oracle] code page: [MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS] TM_6191 Lookup [LKP_sjis_lookup] uses database connection [Japanese Oracle] in codepage [MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS] TM_6192 Stored procedure [J_SP_INCREMENT] uses database connection [Japanese Oracle] in codepage [MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS]

The PowerCenter Server operates internally using UCS-2. It converts source data encoded in other code pages to the UCS-2 character set before processing, and converts the processed data from UCS-2 to the target warehouse code page before loading. When you run a workflow that contains a session, PowerCenter Server converts source, target, and lookup queries from the repository code page to the source, target, or lookup database

Relaxed Data Code Page Validation

45

code page. The PowerCenter Server also converts the name and call text of stored procedures from the repository code page to the stored procedure database code page. At runtime, the PowerCenter Server performs checks on the following code page conversions:

The source query must convert from the PowerCenter Server code page to the source database code page without any loss of data in conversion. The name and call text of stored procedures in stored procedure transformations, presource and post-source stored procedures, and pre-target and post-target stored procedures must convert from the PowerCenter Server code page to the stored procedure database code page without loss of data in conversion. Lookup queries must convert from the PowerCenter Server code page to the lookup database code page without loss of data in conversion. Target SQL queries must convert from the PowerCenter Server code page to the target database code page without loss of data in conversion.

If the PowerCenter Server cannot correctly convert data, it writes an error message to the session log.

Selecting Compatible Source and Target Data Code Pages

Although the PowerCenter Server allows you to use any supported code page, you should select compatible code pages for your source and target data. Your target data code page should be a superset of your source data code page. If your target data code page is not a superset of your source data code page, you risk inconsistencies in your target data because your source data may contain characters not encoded in the target warehouse code page. For example, suppose your source data contains Japanese characters encoded using the JapanEUC code page. You cannot load this data to a target warehouse using the Latin1 code page because the Latin1 code page does not contain Japanese characters in its character set. If you are confident that the data will convert safely from one code page to another, you can run workflows with incompatible source and target data code pages. It is your responsibility to ensure the data will convert properly. For example, suppose the source data is encoded in a database with a UTF-8 code page, and you want to load this data to a target database with a MS Latin1 code page. If you are certain that all of the source data is a subset of the MS Latin1 code page, you can load data to the target without inconsistencies. However, if the data contains any character not included in the Latin1 character set, such as Chinese characters or Greek letters, these characters will be loaded to the target as garbage data or may cause transformation errors.

Using 7-bit ASCII Characters for Repository Metadata

Informatica recommends that you use 7-bit ASCII data for all repository metadata. This allows the PowerCenter Server to successfully perform SQL transactions with source, target, lookup, and stored procedure databases. You can store the repository on a database with any code page that is a superset of the ASCII code page. In this case, ensure that the ASCII metadata characters fall between code points 32 and 126 in the repository database code page.

46

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

For example, suppose your PowerCenter Server, Repository Server, repository, and PowerCenter Client use the ISO 8859-1 code Latin1 code page, and your source database contains Japanese data encoded using the Shift-JIS code page. Each code page contains characters not encoded in the other. Using characters other than 7-bit ASCII for your repository and source database metadata could cause the PowerCenter Server to fail sessions or load no rows to the target in situations like the following:

You create a mapping that contains a string literal with characters specific to the German language range of ISO 8859-1 in a query. The source database may reject the query or return inconsistent results. You use the PowerCenter Client to generate SQL queries containing characters specific to the German language range of ISO 8859-1. When you try to run this query in the source database, the source database may not recognize the query because it may not be able to convert the German-specific characters from the ISO 8859-1 code page into the Shift-JIS code page. Your source database has a table name that contains Japanese characters. When you import this table into your repository as a source definition, the Designer cannot convert the Japanese characters from the source database code page to the PowerCenter Client code page. Instead, the Designer imports the Japanese characters as question marks (?), changing the name of the table. When you save the source definition to the repository, the repository saves the source definition with question marks instead of Japanese characters. If the PowerCenter Server sends a query to the source database using the changed table name, the source database cannot find the correct table, and returns no rows or an error to the PowerCenter Server, possibly causing the session to fail.

Because the 7-bit ASCII code page is a subset of both the ISO 8859-1 and Shift-JIS code pages, you can avoid these data inconsistencies if you use 7-bit ASCII characters for all of your metadata.

Troubleshooting for Relaxed Code Page Validation

The PowerCenter Server failed a session and wrote the following message to the session log:
TM_6188 Session sort order [sort order name] is incompatible with the Informatica Server's codepage [code page name].

Cause: Action:

The specified sort order is incompatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. If you want to validate data code pages, select a sort order compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. If you want to relax data code page validation, configure the PowerCenter Server to relax data code page validation in Unicode data movement mode. For details on configuring the PowerCenter Server, see Configuring the PowerCenter Server on page 44.

Relaxed Data Code Page Validation

47

I tried to view the session log, but it contains garbage characters. Cause: Action: The PowerCenter Server is not configured to write to the session log using the UTF-8 character set. Enable the Session Log in UTF-8 option on the Configuration tab of the PowerCenter Server setup program.

48

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Case Study: Processing 7-bit ASCII Data

This case study describes how you can configure your environment to process 7-bit ASCII data using the PowerCenter Client and Server. You might want to configure your data warehouse for 7-bit ASCII data if you only want to process ASCII data and want to benefit from increased performance gained from the PowerCenter Server ASCII data movement mode. For this case study, the environment contains the following machines and data sources:

PowerCenter Clients running on Windows machines The PowerCenter Server running on a Windows machine The Repository Server and Repository Agent process on a Windows machine The repository tables residing on a Microsoft Windows SQL Server database on Windows A source database server A target database server A lookup database

All character data in the data warehouse environment is U.S. English, 7-bit ASCII data. Figure 2-3 illustrates the 7-bit ASCII data environment:
Figure 2-3. 7-bit ASCII Mode Case Study Environment

Lookup Database (7-bit ASCII Data)

External Procedures (7-bit ASCII Data)

Sources (7-bit ASCII Data)

PowerCenter Server (Windows)

Targets (7-bit ASCII Data)

Repository Server PowerCenter Client Tools (Windows) Repository Agent (Windows)

Repository Database (Microsoft SQL Server on Windows)

Case Study: Processing 7-bit ASCII Data

49

Configuring the 7-bit ASCII Environment

When you configure the globalization properties for this environment, you must follow these guidelines: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify PowerCenter Client, Repository Server, and PowerCenter Server code page compatibility. Verify repository database client and database server compatibility. Set the PowerCenter Server data movement mode. Verify session code page relationships. Set the session sort order.

Step 1. Verify PowerCenter Code Page Compatibility

PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, and Repository Server code pages must be compatible. In this case, because the PowerCenter Client, Repository Server, and PowerCenter Server Windows systems were purchased in the United States, and use English as the input and display language, the Windows machines use MS Windows Latin1 as the operating system code page. Since the PowerCenter Client, Repository Server, and PowerCenter Server use the same code page as the operating system each is installed on, the PowerCenter Client, Repository Server, and PowerCenter Server also use MS Windows Latin1 as code pages. To verify a Windows operating system input and display language, open the Regional Settings Properties dialog box from the Windows Control Panel. Regional Settings and Input Locale should both be configured for English (United States).

Step 2. Verify Repository Database Client and Server Compatibility

The repository database client and database server storing the repository tables must be able to communicate without data loss. In this case, the repository resides in a Microsoft SQL Server 7.0 database. When you install Microsoft SQL Server, you select the default code page for the database server. By default, Microsoft SQL Server uses MS Windows Latin1, the same as the PowerCenter Client and Server code pages in this case study. You can use the sp_helpsort stored procedure to determine the code page and sort order the database server uses. To ensure the Microsoft SQL Server client utilities convert data from the client machine to the server properly, make sure the following options are selected. They are selected by default in Microsoft SQL Server 7.0:

Automatic ANSI to OEM Conversion. In the SQL Server Client Network Utility, enable or disable this setting in the DB Library Options tab. Perform Translation for Character Data. In the Enterprise Manager, choose ToolsOptions, then open the Connection tab to enable or disable this setting.

See your Microsoft SQL Server documentation for details or updates.

50 Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Step 3. Set the PowerCenter Server Data Movement Mode to ASCII

In the PowerCenter Server setup program, open the Miscellaneous tab and set the Data Movement Mode to ASCII. When you set the data movement mode to ASCII, the PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server do not enforce code page relationships through validation.

Step 4. Verify Session Code Page Relationships

When you run the PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, the PowerCenter Server assumes all data is 7-bit ASCII. It runs sessions and does not validate session code page relationships. However, because you can change the PowerCenter Server data movement mode to Unicode, or (with PowerCenter) register another server that might run in Unicode mode, the Workflow Manager always validates session code page relationships when you save a session. When the Workflow Manager detects an inappropriate code page relationship, it issues a warning and then saves the session. Because the PowerCenter Server ignores session code page relationships when it runs in ASCII mode, you can ignore the warning.

Step 5. Select Session Sort Order

When you run the PowerCenter Server in ASCII mode, it uses a binary sort order for all sessions. In the session property sheet, the Workflow Manager lists all sort orders associated with the PowerCenter Server code page. You can select a sort order for the session.

Case Study: Processing 7-bit ASCII Data

51

ASCII Case Study: Summary

Figure 2-4 summarizes the required code page settings for processing 7-bit ASCII data in the sample data environment:
Figure 2-4. ASCII Case Study Summary

Lookup Database

External Procedures

Sources (7-bit ASCII Data)

PowerCenter Server -Configure ASCII Data Movement Mode -Set code page in Workflow Manager to MS Windows Latin 1

Targets (7-bit ASCII Data)

Repository Server PowerCenter Clients (Windows: MS Windows Latin 1 default) (Windows: MS Windows Latin 1 default) Repository Agent (Set code page to MS Windows Latin 1 or ISO 8859-1 when you create or upgrade the repository)

Repository Database (Microsoft SQL Server on Windows)

52

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Case Study: Processing ISO 8859-1 Data

This case study describes how you might set up a data warehouse environment that processes ISO 8859-1 multibyte data. You might want to configure your data warehouse this way if you need to process data from different Western European languages with character sets contained in the ISO 8859-1 code page. This example describes a data warehouse that processes English and German language data. For this case study, the ISO 8859-1 data warehouse environment consists of the following elements:

The PowerCenter Server on a UNIX Solaris machine. PowerCenter Clients on Windows systems, purchased in the United States. The Repository Server and Repository Agent process on a UNIX Solaris machine. The repository stored on an Oracle database on UNIX. A source database server contains English language data. A source database server contains German and English language data. A target database server contains German and English language data. A lookup database contains English language data.

Case Study: Processing ISO 8859-1 Data

53

The ISO 8859-1 Environment

The data environment must process English and German character data. Figure 2-5 illustrates the ISO 8859-1 data environment:
Figure 2-5. ISO 8859-1 Case Study Environment Lookup Database (English Data) External Procedures (English Data)

Sources (English Data) PowerCenter Server (UNIX) Sources (German and English Data) Repository Server PowerCenter Client Tools (Windows) Repository Agent (UNIX) Targets (English and German Data)

Repository Database (Oracle on UNIX)

Configuring the ISO 8859-1 Environment

Use the following guidelines when you configure an environment similar to this case study for ISO 8859-1 data processing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Verify PowerCenter Client, Repository Server and PowerCenter Server code page compatibility. Verify repository database client and server code page compatibility. Configure the PowerCenter Server for Unicode data movement mode. Verify code page compatibility for sources and targets. Verify lookup and stored procedure database code page compatibility. Verify External Procedure or Custom transformation procedure code page compatibility. Configure session sort order.

54

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Step 1. Verify PowerCenter Code Page Compatibility

The PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, and Repository Server code pages must be compatible. Because the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, and Repository Server each use the system code pages of the machines they are installed on, you must verify that the system code pages are compatible. In this case, the PowerCenter Client on Windows systems were purchased in the United States. Thus, the system code pages for the PowerCenter Client machines are set to MS Windows Latin1 by default. To verify system input and display languages, open the Regional Settings Properties dialog box from the Windows Control Panel. For systems purchased in the United States, the Regional Settings and Input Locale should be configured for English (United States). The PowerCenter Server is installed on a UNIX Solaris machine. The default code page for UNIX operating systems is ASCII. In this environment, the UNIX system code page must be changed to ISO 8859-1 Western European in order to be compatible with the MS Windows Latin1. To verify code page compatibility, check the code page compatibility tables in Code Page Compatibility on page 342. For details on changing the UNIX system code page, see UNIX Code Pages on page 32. The Repository Server is also installed on a UNIX Solaris machine. The default code page for UNIX operating systems is ASCII. In this environment, the UNIX system code page must be changed to ISO 8859-1 Western European in order to be compatible with MS Windows Latin1. To verify code page compatibility, check the code page compatibility tables in Code Page Compatibility on page 342. For details on changing the UNIX system code page, see UNIX Code Pages on page 32.

Step 2. Verify Repository Database Client and Server Code Page Compatibility
The database client and server hosting the PowerCenter repository must be able to communicate without data loss. The repository resides in an Oracle database. With Oracle, you can use NLS_LANG to set the locale (language, territory, and character set) you want the database client and server to use with your login:
NLS_LANG = LANGUAGE_TERRITORY.CHARACTERSET

By default, Oracle configures NLS_LANG for U.S. English, U.S. date formats, and the U.S. English code page:
NLS_LANG = AMERICAN_AMERICA.US7ASCII

Change the default configuration to write ISO 8859-1 data to the repository using the Oracle WE8ISO8859P1 code page. See your repository database documentation for details on verifying and changing the repository database code page. For details on repository database code pages, see Repository Code Page on page 37.

The ISO 8859-1 Environment

55

Step 3. Configure the PowerCenter Server for Unicode Data Movement Mode
You must configure the PowerCenter Server to process ISO 8859-1 data. On the Miscellaneous tab of the PowerCenter Server setup, select Unicode as the data movement mode. The PowerCenter Server allots an extra byte for non-ASCII characters when processing multibyte data. For details on the Unicode data movement mode, see Character Data Movement Modes on page 29.

Step 4. Verify Session Code Page Compatibility

When you run a workflow in Unicode data movement mode, the PowerCenter Server enforces source and target code page relationships. For details on code page validation when running workflows, see PowerCenter Code Page Validation on page 40. To guarantee accurate data conversion, the source database code page must be a subset of the PowerCenter Server code page. In this case, the data environment contains a source database containing German and English data. When you configure a source database connection in the Workflow Manager, the code page for the connection must be identical to the source database code page and must be a subset of the PowerCenter Server code page. Since both the MS Windows Latin1 and the ISO 8859-1 Western European code pages contain German characters, you would most likely use one of these code pages for source database connections. In a valid session, target code pages must be a superset of the PowerCenter Server ISO 8859-1 Western European code page. In this case, we could use either ISO 8859-1 Western European, MS Windows Latin1, or UTF-8 for target database connection or flat file code pages. To ensure data consistency, the configured target code page must match the target database or flat file system code page. If you configure the PowerCenter Server and PowerCenter Client for relaxed data code page validation, the PowerCenter Server lifts restrictions on source and target code page compatibility. You can select any supported code page for source and target data.
Note: When you configure the PowerCenter Server to validate data code pages, use UTF-8 for

target code pages only.

Step 5. Verify Lookup and Stored Procedure Database Code Page Compatibility
Lookup and stored procedure database code pages must be compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. In this case, all lookup and stored procedure database connections must use a code page compatible with the ISO 8859-1 Western European code page.

Step 6. Verify External Procedure or Custom Transformation Procedure Code Page Data Compatibility
Procedure code pages should be two-way compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. The procedure code page is the code page of the data processed by External Procedure or

56

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Custom transformations. In this case, all data processed by the External Procedure or Custom transformations must be in the ISO 8859-1 Western European code page.

Step 7. Configure Session Sort Order

When you run the PowerCenter Server in Unicode mode, it sorts session data using the sort order configured for the session. By default, sessions are configured for a binary sort order. To sort English and German data when the PowerCenter Server uses the ISO 8859-1 Western European code page, you most likely want to use the default binary sort order. ISO 8859-1 Western European does not contain a sort order for German.

ISO 8859-1 Case Study: Summary

Figure 2-6 summarizes the guidelines in this case study to configure a data warehouse environment to process ISO 8859-1 data:
Figure 2-6. Summary of ISO 8859-1 Case Study Lookup Database (English Data) External Procedures (English Data)

Sources (English Data)

Sources (German and English Data)

PowerCenter Server (UNIX: ASCII default) Set UNIX code page to ISO 8859-1. Change Data Movement Mode to Unicode. Set code page in Workflow Manager to ISO 8859-1.

Targets (English and German Data)

Repository Server (UNIX: ASCII default) Set UNIX code page to ISO 8859-1. Repository Agent (Set code page to ISO 8859-1 when you create or upgrade the repository)

PowerCenter Client Tools (Windows: MS Windows Latin 1 default)

Repository Database (Oracle on UNIX)

The ISO 8859-1 Environment

57

58

Chapter 2: Globalization Overview

Chapter 3

Understanding Connectivity
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 60 PowerCenter Client Connections, 64 Repository Server Connections, 66 PowerCenter Server Connections, 67

59

Overview
PowerCenter uses the following types of connectivity:

Network protocol Native drivers ODBC

PowerCenter platform components use TCP/IP to communicate. When you configure the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server, you specify TCP/IP port numbers that the PowerCenter Client tools use to establish connections. PowerCenter platform components use either ODBC or native connectivity to communicate with databases. This includes repository, source, target, lookup, and stored procedure databases. Figure 3-1 shows an overview of PowerCenter components and connectivity:
Figure 3-1. PowerCenter Connectivity

Native Connectivity
Native drivers are packaged with database server and client software. The Repository Server and PowerCenter Server use the native drivers to communicate with databases. When communicating with a database, the Repository Server or PowerCenter Server pass database calls directly to the native drivers installed with the database client software. The client software passes the calls to the database, and returns information from the database to the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server.

60

Chapter 3: Understanding Connectivity

For example, the PowerCenter Server writes session data to a DB2 target database on a machine separate from the PowerCenter Server machine. When you run the session, the PowerCenter Server reads the target database connectivity information from the target database connection stored in the repository. It uses this information to connect to the target database through the drivers included with the DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) installed on the PowerCenter Server machine. The PowerCenter Server performs all transactions with the target database through this client software.

Establishing Native Connectivity

To establish native connectivity between the Repository Server or PowerCenter Server and a database, you must install the client software packaged with the database platform on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server. Unlike ODBC connectivity, in which you specify database location, connection, and connectivity information in a data source name, you specify native connectivity information in PowerCenter applications. You specify native connectivity information for the PowerCenter Server when you configure a database connection in the Workflow Manager. The PowerCenter Server uses this information to communicate with databases when it runs a session. You specify native connectivity information for the Repository Server when you configure a repository in the Repository Server Administration Console. The Repository Agent process uses this information to connect to and communicate with the repository database. Native connectivity information includes the database user name, password, and other configuration options specific to the database platform. It also includes a native connect string. The native connect string specifies the database name and database server name and allows PowerCenter and the database client to direct calls to the correct database. Table 3-1 lists the native connect string syntax for each supported RDBMS:
Table 3-1. Native Connect String Syntax Database IBM DB2 Informix Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Teradata* Connect String Syntax dbname dbname@servername servername@dbname dbname.world (same as TNSNAMES entry) servername@dbname ODBC_data_source_name or ODBC_data_source_name@db_name or ODBC_data_source_name@db_user_name Example mydatabase mydatabase@informix sqlserver@mydatabase oracle.world sambrown@mydatabase TeradataODBC TeradataODBC@mydatabase TeradataODBC@sambrown

*Use Teradata ODBC drivers to connect to source and target databases.

For specific instructions on establishing native connectivity on Windows, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289.
Overview 61

For specific instructions on establishing native connectivity on UNIX, see Connecting to Databases from UNIX on page 305.

ODBC
Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) provides a common way to communicate with several different database platforms. The PowerCenter Client use ODBC drivers to connect to source target, lookup, and stored procedure databases. The PowerCenter Server and Repository Server may also use ODBC drivers to connect to databases. When communicating with a source or target database, the PowerCenter application first passes all database calls to the ODBC driver. The driver interprets the information and sends it to the native database client connectivity software. From there, the information passes to the database, which processes the command and sends the desired information back to the PowerCenter Client tool. For example, when you import a source definition in the Designer, the Designer issues a call to the ODBC driver. The ODBC driver translates the call and passes it to the native database connectivity software, which in turn passes it to the database. The database processes the request and sends the information back to the Designer (passing through the native software layer and ODBC software), which displays the source definition. Figure 3-2 illustrates the ODBC connectivity between PowerCenter and Sybase and Oracle databases. PowerCenter communicates with other database platforms in a similar fashion.
Figure 3-2. ODBC Connectivity Overview
PowerCenter

ODBC components Driver Manager

ODBC Driver for Sybase

ODBC Driver for Oracle

Sybase Client Library

Oracle Client Library

Sybase Database

Oracle Database

62

Chapter 3: Understanding Connectivity

Establishing ODBC Connectivity

To establish ODBC connectivity between a database and the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, or Repository Server, you must install the following components on the machine hosting the PowerCenter application:

Database client software. Install the client software included with the database platform. This installs the client libraries needed to connect to the database. ODBC drivers. PowerCenter includes DataDirect closed 32-bit ODBC drivers on the installation CD. These drivers are fully backward compatible. Your database platform may also come with an ODBC driver.

After you install the necessary components you must configure an ODBC data source for each database you want to connect to. A data source contains information that you need to locate and access the database, such as database name, user name, and database password. On Windows, you use the ODBC Data Source Administrator to create a data source name. On UNIX, you add data source entries to the odbc.ini file found in the system $ODBCHOME directory. When you create an ODBC data source, you must also specify the driver that the ODBC driver manager sends database calls to. Table 3-2 shows the recommended ODBC drivers to use with each database:
Table 3-2. Recommended Database ODBC Drivers Database IBM DB2 Informix Microsoft Access Microsoft Excel Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Teradata ODBC Driver IBM ODBC driver DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver Microsoft Access driver Microsoft Excel driver Microsoft SQL Server ODBC driver DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver Teradata ODBC driver

For specific instructions on establishing ODBC connectivity on Windows, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289. For specific instructions on establishing ODBC connectivity on UNIX, see Connecting to Databases from UNIX on page 305.

Overview

63

PowerCenter Client Connections

The PowerCenter Client use ODBC drivers and native database client connectivity software to communicate with databases. It uses TCP/IP to communicate with the PowerCenter Server and with the repository. Table 3-3 summarizes the software you need to connect the PowerCenter Client to the repository, source, target databases, and the PowerCenter Server:
Table 3-3. PowerCenter Client Connectivity Requirements To connect the PowerCenter Client to the... PowerCenter Server Repository Server Databases You need... TCP/IP TCP/IP ODBC connection for each database

Connecting to the Repository

All PowerCenter Client tools use TCP/IP to communicate with the repository through the Repository Server each time you perform transactions with the repository, such as creating and saving metadata, upgrading a repository, and configuring repository security. To connect to the repository or the Repository Server, perform the following tasks:

Connect to the repository. Choose Repository-Connect in the Designer, Repository Manager, Workflow Manager, or Workflow Monitor. Enter your repository user name and password, and specify the host name and port number of the Repository Server hosting the repository. Connect to the Repository Server. Select the Repository Server in the Repository Server Administration Console. Choose Action-Connect and specify the Repository Server port number and administration password.

Connecting to Databases
To connect the Designer to databases, use the Windows ODBC Data Source Administrator to create a data source for each database you want to access. Select the data source names in the Designer when you perform the following tasks:

Import a table or a stored procedure definition from a database. Use the Source Analyzer or Warehouse Designer to import the table from the database. Use the Transformation Developer, Mapplet Designer, or Mapping Designer to import a stored procedure or a table for a Lookup transformation. To connect to the database, you must also provide your database user name, password, and table or stored procedure owner name.

64

Chapter 3: Understanding Connectivity

Preview data. You can select the data source name when you preview data in the Source Analyzer or Warehouse Designer. You must also provide your database user name, password, and table owner name.

Connecting to the PowerCenter Server

The Workflow Manager and Workflow Monitor communicate directly with the PowerCenter Server over TCP/IP each time you perform session and workflow-related tasks, such as scheduling or running a workflow, or retrieving session logs. You must use the Workflow Manager to register the host name and port number of the PowerCenter Server with the repository to perform these tasks. Choose Server-Server Configuration to register a server with the repository. When you register a PowerCenter Server with the repository, configure the connectivity information in the Server dialog box. Specify the PowerCenter Server host name or IP address and the port number it accepts connections on. You must also specify the path of the PowerCenter Server root directory.
Note: If the IP address for the PowerCenter Server changes, you must reconfigure the

PowerCenter Server, restart it, and resolve the IP address in the Server dialog box.

PowerCenter Client Connections

65

Repository Server Connections

The Repository Server manages the metadata in the PowerCenter repository database. All applications that connect to the repository must connect to the Repository Server. The Repository Server accepts incoming requests on a specified port number over TCP/IP and uses native drivers to communicate with the repository database. Table 3-4 summarizes the software you need to connect the PowerCenter Server to the repository, source, and target databases:
Table 3-4. Repository Server Connectivity Requirements To connect the Repository Server to the... PowerCenter Client PowerCenter Server Repository database You need... TCP/IP TCP/IP Native database drivers

Connecting to PowerCenter Applications

To connect the Repository Server to other PowerCenter applications, configure the connectivity information in the Repository Server Setup program. Configure the Repository Server port number and an administrative password. Use the administrative password to connect to the Repository Server from the Repository Server Administration Console.

Connecting to Databases
To connect the Repository Server to the repository database, you must configure a Repository Agent process. One Repository Agent manages each repository database. To configure the database connectivity information for the Repository Agent, use the Repository Administration Console to add a repository connection. On the Repository tab in the connection properties, specify the database type, native connect string, and database user name and password.

66

Chapter 3: Understanding Connectivity

PowerCenter Server Connections

The PowerCenter Server needs a connection to the repository to read repository objects and run them. Use the Workflow Manager to register the PowerCenter Server with the repository. You cannot start the PowerCenter Server without first configuring it to connect to the repository. The PowerCenter Server connects to the repository through the Repository Server. Table 3-5 summarizes the software you need to connect the PowerCenter Server to the Repository Server and the source and target databases:
Table 3-5. PowerCenter Server Connectivity Requirements To connect the PowerCenter Server to the... PowerCenter Client Repository Server Databases You need... TCP/IP TCP/IP Native database drivers or ODBC

Note: Both the Windows and UNIX versions of the PowerCenter Server can also use ODBC drivers to connect to databases. However, Informatica recommends using native drivers when possible to improve performance.

For Windows, the PowerCenter Server includes ODBC libraries that you can use to connect to other ODBC source databases. For flat file, XML, or COBOL sources, you can either access data with network connections (such as NFS) or transfer data to the PowerCenter Server machine through FTP software. For information on connectivity software for other ODBC sources, refer to your database documentation.

Connecting to PowerCenter Applications

Use the PowerCenter Server Setup program to connect the PowerCenter Server to other PowerCenter applications. On the Server tab of the setup program, specify the name of the server and the host IP address. Use the server name and IP address information when you register the PowerCenter Server with the repository.
Note: If the IP address of the host machine changes, you must change the IP address on this

tab before you start the PowerCenter Server.

Connecting to Databases
Use the PowerCenter Server Setup program to connect the server to databases. To connect the PowerCenter Server to source, target, lookup, and stored procedure databases, specify connectivity keys on the Licenses tab. Use the Workflow Manager to create native connections to databases. Choose ConnectionsRelational to add and edit database connections. For each connection, you must specify the database user name, password, and native connect string. The PowerCenter Server uses this information to connect to the database when it runs the session.
PowerCenter Server Connections 67

Note: PowerCenter supports ODBC drivers, such as ISG Navigator, that do not need user

names and passwords to connect. To avoid using empty strings or nulls, use the reserved words PmNullUser and PmNullPasswd for the user name and password when you configure a database connection. The PowerCenter Server treats PmNullUser and PmNullPasswd as no user and no password.

Connecting to the Repository

Use the PowerCenter Server Setup program to connect the PowerCenter Server to the repository. On the Repository tab of the setup program, specify the repository name, username, and password. You must also specify the Repository Server host name and port number. This is the same port number you configure in the Repository Server Setup program.

68

Chapter 3: Understanding Connectivity

Chapter 4

Installation and Configuration Overview

This chapter includes the following topics:

Before You Begin, 70 PowerCenter Installation and Configuration Steps, 72

69

Before You Begin

Installing and configuring PowerCenter requires some understanding of the different components of the product. Before you begin installation, read:

Product Overview on page 1. This chapter provides an overview of the product and product tools. This chapter. Before you install the product, review the installation steps and connectivity requirements.

Minimum System Requirements

Before you install PowerCenter, verify system requirements. Table 4-1 shows the minimum system requirements to run PowerCenter:
Table 4-1. Minimum System Requirements PowerCenter Client Operating system Disk space RAM Database connectivity Windows (2000, 2003, XP) 200MB 256 MB ODBC drivers Repository Server Windows (2000, 2003) UNIX (AIX, HP-UX, Linux, Solaris) 80 MB 256 MB Native drivers PowerCenter Repository Database Windows (2000, 2003) UNIX (AIX, HP-UX, Linux, Solaris) 150 MB of database space* 128 MB Native drivers PowerCenter Server Windows (2000, 2003) UNIX (AIX, HP-UX, Linux, Solaris) 70 MB 256 MB Native drivers or ODBC drivers

* Although you can create a repository with a minimum of 100 MB of database space, Informatica recommends allocating up to 150 MB for repositories.

The install program also requires additional disk space of 30 MB for temporary files. You can set the environment variable TMP to specify the location of these files. For example:
TMP=D:\tmp

Note: Informatica recommends a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 or higher for all machines

running the PowerCenter Client.

Working with 32-bit and 64-bit Platforms

PowerCenter supports the following 64-bit platforms:

AIX HP-UX on Itanium

70

Chapter 4: Installation and Configuration Overview

Use the following guidelines when working with 32-bit and 64-bit platforms:

Libraries. Link libraries according to the following guidelines:

Link 32-bit applications with 32-bit libraries. Link 64-bit applications with 64-bit libraries. Link 32-bit PowerCenter Servers with 32-bit database clients. Link 64-bit PowerCenter Servers with 64-bit database clients.

Database clients. Link 32-bit Repository Servers with 32-bit database clients. Link 64-bit Repository Servers with 64-bit database clients. PowerCenter Servers and Repository Servers. 32-bit and 64-bit PowerCenter Servers and Repository Servers are compatible with each other. Caching. If the total configured session cache size is 2 GB or greater (2,147,483,648 bytes), you must run the session on a 64-bit PowerCenter Server. The session fails if you run it on a 32-bit PowerCenter Server. Server grids. A server grid can contain both 32-bit and 64-bit PowerCenter Servers. If the total configured session cache size is 2 GB (2,147,483,648 bytes) or greater, the master server routes the session to a 64-bit PowerCenter Server, if one is available.

Before You Begin

71

PowerCenter Installation and Configuration Steps

This section outlines the steps for installing PowerCenter. These steps differ depending on whether you are:

Installing for the first time Upgrading from a previous version

These steps refer to additional chapters in this guide where you can obtain details for each installation task.
Note: The PowerCenter installation CD also contains XML files for the PowerCenter

Metadata Reporter in the Metadata Reporter directory.

Installing for the First Time

If you are installing PowerCenter for the first time, complete each of the following tasks in the order listed below. 1. Install the PowerCenter Client tools. For more information, see Installing the PowerCenter Client on page 75. 2. Configure the PowerCenter Client tools to connect to each source and target database you need to access. For more information, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289. 3. Create an ODBC connection for each source and target database. The DataDirect 32-bit ODBC closed drivers are designed for use with PowerCenter only. If you use them with other software, these drivers generate warning messages about violating licensing agreements. 4. Install and configure the Repository Server. See the appropriate installation chapter for your platform. The chapters are Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows on page 87 and Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX on page 103. 5. 6. Start the Repository Server. Create a repository. Before you can start the PowerCenter Server, you must create a repository. The PowerCenter Server needs a connection to the repository. For more information, see Creating a Repository on page 113. 7. Configure the machine on which you plan to install the PowerCenter Server to connect to each source and target database, the Repository Server, and the PowerCenter Client tools.

72

Chapter 4: Installation and Configuration Overview

See the appropriate installation chapter for your platform. The chapters are Connecting to Databases from UNIX on page 305 and Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289. 8. Install and configure the PowerCenter Server. See the appropriate installation chapter for your platform. The chapters are Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX on page 157 and Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows on page 127. 9. Use the Workflow Manager to register the PowerCenter Server with the repository. For more information, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177. 10. Start the PowerCenter Server.

Upgrading from a Previous Version

You can upgrade to PowerCenter 7.1.1 from PowerCenter 7.0/6.x/5.x or from PowerMart 6.x/5.x. The PowerCenter 7.1.1 repository upgrade process creates several new metadata object types. The upgrade also changes the functionality of some existing repository objects. For details on upgrading repository objects, see Upgrading Repository Metadata on page 229.
Note: The PowerCenter 7.1.1 installation on Windows uses default directories for the

PowerCenter Client, Repository Server, and PowerCenter Server. If you have files and directories you need to save from your previous installation of PowerCenter, you must move them to where you install PowerCenter 7.1.1. Follow these steps to upgrade to PowerCenter 7.1.1: 1. 2. Use your existing version of PowerCenter to back up each repository you want to upgrade. Create a new database for each repository you want to upgrade to PowerCenter 7.1. See your database documentation for details.
Note: The PowerCenter 7.1 repository is approximately 5 percent larger than a

PowerCenter 7.0 repository, 15 percent larger than a PowerCenter 6.x and PowerMart 6.x repository, and approximately 40 percent larger than a PowerCenter 5.x and PowerMart 5.x repository. Before you upgrade the repository, check the repository database size and available disk space. 3. Use your existing version of PowerCenter to make a copy of each repository.
Important: Informatica recommends that you make a copy of all existing repositories in your existing version of the Repository Manager before upgrading to PowerCenter 7.1.1. Upgrade the copy of your existing repository to PowerCenter 7.1.1 to evaluate it without altering your existing repository. For more information, see Upgrading a Repository on page 185.

4.

Upgrade the PowerCenter Client tools. For more information, see Installing the PowerCenter Client on page 75.
PowerCenter Installation and Configuration Steps 73

5.

Configure the PowerCenter Client tools to connect to each source or target database you need to access. For more information, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289.

6.

Create an ODBC connection for each source and target database. The DataDirect 32-bit ODBC closed drivers are designed for use with PowerCenter only. If you use them with other software, these drivers generate warning messages about violating licensing agreements.

7.

Install and configure the Repository Server. For more information, see Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows on page 87 and Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX on page 103.

8. 9.

Start the Repository Server. Create a repository configuration for each repository managed by the Repository Server. For more information, see Creating a Repository on page 113.

10. Upgrade each repository. If you are upgrading multiple repositories in a domain, upgrade and start the global repository first. For more information, see Upgrading a Repository on page 185. 11. Configure the machine on which you plan to install the PowerCenter Server to connect to each database, the Repository Server, and the PowerCenter Client tools. See the appropriate installation chapter for your platform. The chapters are Connecting to Databases from UNIX on page 305 and Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289. 12. Install and configure the PowerCenter Server. See the appropriate installation chapter for your platform. The chapters are Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX on page 157 and Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows on page 127. 13. Use the Workflow Manager to register the PowerCenter Server with the repository. For details, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177. 14. Start the PowerCenter Server.

74

Chapter 4: Installation and Configuration Overview

Chapter 5

Installing the PowerCenter Client

This chapter includes the following topics:

Before You Begin, 76 Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Client Tools, 77 Step 2. Install ODBC Drivers, 83 Step 3. Connect to Databases, 85

75

Before You Begin

Before you begin, verify you have enough disk space for the PowerCenter Client. You must have 200 MB of disk space to install the PowerCenter Client tools. Also, make sure you have 30 MB of temporary file space available for the Informatica PowerCenter Setup. You can set the environment variable TMP to specify the location of these files. For example:
TMP=D:\tmp

Complete the following steps to install and configure the PowerCenter Client tools and ODBC for the first time: 1. 2. 3. Install the PowerCenter Client tools. Install the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC drivers. Connect to each database.

Important: Read the printed release notes for last minute changes to the PowerCenter Client installation, licensing, and connectivity issues.

76

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Client Tools

You can install the PowerCenter Client tools on a Windows system. The installation program installs the following:

All the program files you need to run the Designer, Repository Manager, Administration Console, Workflow Manager, and Workflow Monitor Informatica product manuals in PDF format SQL scripts for the hands-on tutorials included in Getting Started Release notes Online help files

Informatica recommends that you back up and copy all repositories before upgrading to PowerCenter 7.1.1. You should upgrade the copy of your existing repository so you can evaluate it without altering your existing repository. You can install multiple versions of the PowerCenter Client tools on the same machine. Use one of the following methods to install the PowerCenter Client tools:

Standard installation. When you perform a standard installation, the Informatica PowerCenter Setup program prompts you to specify installation information, such as the installation directory. Silent installation. When you perform a silent installation, the Informatica PowerCenter Setup program uses installation information stored in a response file to install the PowerCenter Client. The setup program does not prompt you to specify installation information during a silent install. You can use this method to install the PowerCenter Client on remote machines on the network. Performing a silent installation is useful if you want to standardize the installation of the PowerCenter Client across several machines.

Performing a Standard Installation

If you are installing for the first time, the installation program allows you to select the PowerCenter 7.1.1 components that you want to install. The program also prompts you for the destination directory for the program files. If you already installed PowerCenter 7.1.1 components, the platform setup detects installed components and prompts you to modify or remove them. If you want to reinstall the PowerCenter Client, you must first uninstall it, and then run the installation program. For more information on uninstalling the PowerCenter Client, see Uninstalling the PowerCenter Client Tools on page 81.
To install the PowerCenter Client tools using the install program: 1.

Insert one of the following CDs into your Windows machine:

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Client Tools

77

Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit Microsoft Windows and Linux. You can also install ODBC drivers, the PowerCenter Server, and the Repository Server onto a Windows machine from this CD. Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit UNIX. You can only install the PowerCenter Client and ODBC drivers onto a Windows machine from this CD. Informatica PowerCenter for 64-bit UNIX. You can only install the PowerCenter Client and ODBC drivers onto a Windows machine from this CD.

2.

From Windows, browse the CD and run launch.exe. or From the command line, switch to the CD and run launch.exe. The Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen appears.

3.

Read the Important Notice before you install PowerCenter. Click Important Notice.
Note: You can use the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen to view other

information, such as the CD contents.

4. 5.

After you read the Important Notice, return to the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen, and click PowerCenter for Windows. A second welcome screen displays. Click Next. or The Add/Remove page displays if you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed. Select Modify, and click Next.

6.

On the Select Components page, select Client from the list of components. If this is the first time you are installing PowerCenter 7.1.1 and you want to install only the PowerCenter Client, clear any other selected components. or If you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed on this machine, clear them if you want to uninstall. The existing installation directory displays as the default installation directory. Go to step 8.
Note: The PowerCenter Client installs into the Client directory in the specified

destination directory.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

If you are installing for the first time, click Browse to specify an installation directory. To determine the amount of available disk space on your machine, click Disk Space. Click Next. If the installation directory you specified does not exist, click Yes to have the installation program create it for you. Specify the Windows program folder, and click Next. Review the settings, such as components to install, components to uninstall, and the destination directory.

78

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client

12. 13. 14.

Click Next. The installation program copies the PowerCenter Client files to the destination directory. When the installation completes, select View Readme if you want to read the PowerCenter release notes, and then click Next. Click Finish to exit the install program and return to Windows.

Performing a Silent Installation

You can perform a silent installation when you install the PowerCenter Client tools or ODBC. When you perform a silent installation, the installation program uses information in a response file to locate the installation directory. You can also perform a silent installation for remote machines on the network. You might want to perform a silent installation if you need to install the PowerCenter Client on several machines on the network, or if you want to standardize the installation across all machines in the environment. Use the following steps as a guideline when you configure and perform a silent installation: 1. 2. 3. Run setup.exe from the command line to create a response file. Edit the response file and specify installation information for the machine you want to install the PowerCenter Client tools on. Run setup.exe from the command line and specify the response file to install the PowerCenter Client.

To perform these tasks, run the installation program from the command line. Setup.exe uses the following syntax:
setup <-r|-s> -f1<response_file_name> [-f2<log_file_name>]

Table 5-1 describes Setup options and arguments:

Table 5-1. Setup Options and Arguments (PowerCenter Client Tools Installation) Option -r -f1 -s -f2 Argument Name n/a response_file_name n/a log_file_name Argument Description To create the response file. This option is required when you create the response file. The name and path of the response file. To install the PowerCenter Client using the response file. This option is required when you install using the response file. The name and path of the installation log file that records the result of the silent installation. This is optional when you install using the response file.

Creating and Editing the Response File

To create the response file, run setup.exe from the command line and specify the name of a response file to record. To record the response file, the standard installation program prompts you to provide the destination directory.

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Client Tools

79

Note: The response file records all responses to all dialog boxes in the standard installation.

Create the response file on a machine that has no other PowerCenter 7.1.1 components installed. This ensures consistent results for silent installation on other machines.
To create the response file: 1.

From the command line, switch to the PowerCenter 7.1.1 installation CD and run the following command:
setup -r -f1<response_file_name>

For example, the following command creates a response file called client_setup.iss in the system \temp directory:
setup -r -f1c:\temp\client_setup.iss 2.

The standard installation program starts and prompts you to specify installation information. When you select components to install, select Client and ODBC only. For details on the procedure for performing a standard installation, see Performing a Standard Installation on page 77.

After the installation finishes, you can edit the response file if you need to specify a different destination directory for the silent installation. Edit the response file for each remote silent installation you want to perform. Table 5-2 describes the parameters that you can edit in the response file:
Table 5-2. Response File Parameters (PowerCenter Client Tools Installation) Parameter Name szDir szResultFolder Description Destination directory for PowerCenter Client files. You can specify a local or remote directory. Program group for PowerCenter Client shortcuts.

Installing the PowerCenter Client Using the Response File

After you create the response file, you can run the installation program to complete the silent installation. When you run the installation program with the response file, the program uses the information in the file to complete the installation. If you specified a destination directory on a remote machine, the installation program installs and registers the PowerCenter Client and creates the program group on that machine. Before you begin, you must verify that you can access and create files on the remote machine. You must also verify that the destination directory already exists on the machine.
Note: To ensure successful installation, run the silent installation only if no other PowerCenter

7.1.1 components are installed on the machine.

To install the PowerCenter Client using the response file: 1.

From the command line, switch to the PowerCenter 7.1.1 installation CD and run the following command:
setup -s -f1<response_file_name> -f2<log_file_name>

80

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client

For example, the following command installs the PowerCenter Client using the client_setup.iss file and records the result in client_setup_result.log:
setup -s -f1c:\temp\client_setup.iss -f2c:\temp\client_setup_result.log 2.

The installation program installs the PowerCenter Client.

After the installation completes, check the installation log file to verify that the installation completed successfully. A result code of zero indicates success. A non-zero code indicates failure. The following installation log describes a successful installation:
[InstallShield Silent] Version=v7.00 File=Log File [ResponseResult] ResultCode=0

Table 5-3 lists the result codes the silent installation records in the log file:
Table 5-3. Silent Installation Result Codes Code 0 1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -11 -51 -52 Description Success. General error. Invalid mode. Required data not found in response file. Not enough memory available to perform installation. Response file does not exist. Cannot write to the response file. Unable to write to the log file. Invalid path to the response file. Unknown error during installation. Cannot create the specified folder. Cannot access the specified file or folder.

Uninstalling the PowerCenter Client Tools

You can use one of the following methods to uninstall the PowerCenter Client tools:

Run launch.exe on the PowerCenter installation CD. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. Use the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. In the Windows Control Panel, choose Add/ Remove Programs, and then choose Informatica PowerCenter 7.1.1. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove
Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Client Tools 81

them. You can access the Add/Remove Programs dialog box only if you have system administrative privileges.

82

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client

Step 2. Install ODBC Drivers

Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) provides a common way to communicate with many different database platforms. Many database applications, such as the PowerCenter Client tools, use ODBC to communicate with databases. The DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC drivers are designed for use with PowerCenter only. If you use them with other software, they generate warning messages about violating licensing agreements. The DataDirect 32-bit ODBC installation is compatible with Informix, Oracle, and Sybase databases.
Note: You can also perform a silent installation of the ODBC drivers. For details on

performing a silent installation, see Performing a Silent Installation on page 79.

To install DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC drivers: 1.

Insert one of the following CDs into your Windows machine:

Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit Microsoft Windows and Linux. You can also install ODBC drivers, the PowerCenter Server, and the Repository Server onto a Windows machine from this CD. Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit UNIX. You can only install the PowerCenter Client and ODBC drivers onto a Windows machine from this CD. Informatica PowerCenter for 64-bit UNIX. You can only install the PowerCenter Client and ODBC drivers onto a Windows machine from this CD.

2.

From Windows, browse the CD and run launch.exe. or From the command line, switch to the CD and run launch.exe. The Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen appears. You can use the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen to view other information, such as the Important Notice or the CD contents.

3. 4.

Click PowerCenter for Windows. A second welcome screen displays. Click Next. or The Add/Remove screen displays if you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed. Select Modify, and click Next.

5.

Select ODBC from the list of components to install. If this is the first time you are installing a component of PowerCenter 7.1.1 and you want to install only ODBC, clear the other components. or

Step 2. Install ODBC Drivers

83

If you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed on this machine, clear them if you want to uninstall. The existing installation directory displays as the default installation directory. Go to step 7.
6. 7. 8. 9.

Click Browse to specify an installation directory. To determine the amount of available disk space on your machine, click Disk Space. Click Next. Review the settings, such as components to install, components to uninstall, and the destination directory. Click Next. The program launches the ODBC installation. When the installation completes, select View Readme if you want to read the PowerCenter release notes.

10.

Click Finish to exit the install program and return to Windows.

After you install the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC drivers, you need to create an ODBC data source name for each database accessed by the client tools. For more information about connecting to a specific database, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289.

Uninstalling the ODBC Drivers

You can use one of the following methods to uninstall the ODBC drivers:

Run launch.exe on the PowerCenter installation CD. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. Use the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. In the Windows Control Panel, choose Add/ Remove Programs, and then choose Informatica PowerCenter 7.1.1. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. You can access the Add/Remove Programs dialog box only if you have system administrative privileges.

84

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client

Step 3. Connect to Databases

To communicate with databases, the PowerCenter Client tools use both native database connectivity software and ODBC. You must install and configure native database client connectivity software and ODBC on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Client. The PowerCenter Client can connect to the following databases:

IBM DB2 Informix Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Teradata Microsoft Access Microsoft Excel

For more information about connecting to a specific database, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289.

Step 3. Connect to Databases

85

86

Chapter 5: Installing the PowerCenter Client

Chapter 6

Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

This chapter includes the following topics:

Before You Begin, 88 Step 1. Install the Repository Server on Windows, 90 Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on Windows, 92 Step 3. Connect to Databases, 94 Step 4. Start the Repository Server on Windows, 95 Stopping the Repository Server, 98 Troubleshooting, 99

87

Before You Begin

Complete the following steps to install and configure the Repository Server on Windows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install the Repository Server. Configure the Repository Server. Configure database client connectivity software to connect to the repository database. Start the Repository Server.

You can install one Repository Server on a Windows machine. Before you begin, locate the PowerCenter product license key. Use the same product license key to install the Repository Server and PowerCenter Server. For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
Important: Read the printed release notes for last minute changes to the Repository Server installation, licensing, and connectivity issues.

Code Pages
For accurate data movement and transformation, make sure the code pages you select for each PowerCenter component are compatible with each other. For more information, see Globalization Overview on page 25.

Installation Guidelines
To improve repository performance, consider installing the Repository Server on a machine with a fast network connection. The Repository Server can manage repositories on different machines on the network. Verify the following requirements for the Repository Server machine:

Windows or UNIX operating system 75 MB disk space 128 MB RAM, plus 16 MB RAM for each repository the Repository Server manages To optimize performance, do not install the Repository Server on a Primary Domain Controller (PDC) or a Backup Domain Controller (BDC). Make sure you have 30 MB of disk space available on the Windows boot drive. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup requires this space for temporary files. Verify you have the appropriate Windows user accounts to install the Repository Server, run the Repository Server service, and access the managed repository databases. Verify that the time zone settings for the Repository Server machine are correctly configured.

Use the following guidelines before you install the Repository Server on a Windows system:

88

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Creating Repository Server Users

When you install the Repository Server on a Windows system, you need the following user accounts:

Windows user with administrator rights. To install the Repository Server, log on to the Windows system as a member of the Administrators group in the local domain. Windows user that runs the Repository Server service. Before you install the Repository Server, create a user account with the right to run services, known as the Service Start Account. Verify this account has the Logon as a service right. Create this account specifically to run the Repository Server. Do not run the Repository Server as the System account. For details on creating a user account to run the Repository Server service, see Troubleshooting on page 99.
Note: You can create either a local or domain account. To manage repositories on a

Microsoft SQL Server database that uses Windows integrated security, you must create a domain account.

Database user for each managed repository. When you configure the repository, you enter a user name and password to access the database containing the repository. This is the owner name defined by the database. The PowerCenter Server uses this name to connect to the repository database. This user is not a Windows or repository account. The password must be in 7-bit ASCII only.

Before You Begin

89

Step 1. Install the Repository Server on Windows

After you install the PowerCenter Client tools, you can install the Repository Server. You can install one Repository Server on a Windows system. If you are upgrading your version of the Repository Server, stop the Repository Server service before running the installation program. To install the Repository Server, run the setup program on the PowerCenter installation CD as described in this section.
To install the Repository Server: 1. 2. 3.

Log on to the Windows machine as a user who is a member of the local Administrators group. Insert the Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit Microsoft Windows and Linux CD into your Windows machine. From Windows, browse the CD and run launch.exe. or From the command line, switch to the CD and run launch.exe. The Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen appears.

4.

Read the Important Notice before you install PowerCenter. Click Important Notice.
Note: You can use the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen to view other

information, such as the CD contents.

5. 6.

After you read the Important Notice, return to the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen, and click PowerCenter for Windows. A second welcome screen displays. Click Next. or The Add/Remove screen displays if you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed, such as the PowerCenter Client. Select Modify.

7.

Select Repository Server. If this is the first time you are installing a component of PowerCenter 7.1.1 and you want to install only the Repository Server, clear the other components. Click Browse to specify the installation directory, and click Next. or If you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed on this machine, clear them if you want to uninstall. The existing installation directory displays as the default installation directory. Click Next.

90

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Note: The Repository Server installs into the RepositoryServer directory in the specified

destination directory.
8.

Enter your name, company name, and PowerCenter product license key. Click Next. The installation process does not prompt you to enter this information if you already installed the version 7.1.1 PowerCenter Server.

9. 10. 11.

Select the program folder, and click Next. Review the settings, such as the components to install or uninstall, and the destination directory. Click Next. The program launches the Repository Server installation. If you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed on this machine, go to step 14.

12. 13. 14.

Select View Readme, if you want to read the PowerCenter release notes. Clear Configure Informatica Repository Server if you want to configure the Repository Server later. Click Next. Click Finish to exit the PowerCenter Repository Server Setup. If you did not clear the option to configure the Repository Server in step 12, the Configure Repository Server dialog box appears. For more information on configuring the Repository Server, see Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on Windows on page 92.
Note: You must restart Windows before you can start the Repository Server service. For

information about starting the Repository Server, see Step 4. Start the Repository Server on Windows on page 95.

Uninstalling the Repository Server

You can use one of the following methods to uninstall the Repository Server:

Run launch.exe on the PowerCenter installation CD. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. Use the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. In the Windows Control Panel, choose Add/ Remove Programs, and then choose Informatica PowerCenter 7.1.1. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. You can access the Add/Remove Programs dialog box only if you have system administrative privileges.

Step 1. Install the Repository Server on Windows

91

Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on Windows

When you install the Repository Server, you must configure it before you can start it. You can edit the Repository Server configuration parameters when the Repository Server is running. However, you need to stop the Repository Server and restart it to apply the configuration changes.
To configure the Repository Server on Windows: 1.

From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs-Informatica PowerCenter 7.1.1RepServer-Informatica Repository Server Setup.
Note: If you entered a different Windows program menu location, open the Repository

Server Setup from that location. The Configure Repository Server dialog box appears.

2.

Enter the Repository Server configuration parameters.

92

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Table 6-1 describes the options available in the Configure Repository Server dialog box:
Table 6-1. Repository Server Configuration Parameters on Windows Option Server Port Number Administrator Password Required/ Optional Required Required Description The port number the Repository Server uses to connect to repository client applications. Default is 5001. The password you use to connect to the Repository Server from the Repository Server Administration Console and pmrep. Must be in 7bit ASCII. Note this password. You need it when you create a repository and when you connect to the Repository Server. The minimum port number the Repository Server can assign to the Repository Agent process. Default is 5002. The maximum port number the Repository Server can assign to the Repository Agent process. Default is 65535. The name of the directory in which the Repository Server stores repository configuration information files. You can specify either a relative path or an absolute path. Default is Config. The name of the directory in which the Repository Server stores repository backup files. You can specify either a relative path or an absolute path. Default is Backup. The name of the directory in which the Repository Server stores repository plugin files. You can specify either a relative path or an absolute path. Default is Plugin. The level of error messages written to the Repository Server log. Specify one of the following: - Error. Writes ERROR code messages to the log. - Warning. Writes WARNING and ERROR code messages to the log. - Information. Writes INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Tracing. Writes TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Debug. Writes DEBUG, TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. Enable this option if you want to write Repository Server messages to the Windows Event Log. This option is enabled by default. Enable this option if you want to write Repository Server log messages to a file. When you enable this option, enter a file name for the Repository Server log. This option is disabled by default. The default Repository Server log file name is pmrepserver.log. The Repository Server stores the Repository Server log file in the Repository Server installation directory.

Minimum Port Number Maximum Port Number Configuration Directory

Required Required Required

Backup Directory

Required

Plugin Directory

Required

Severity Level

Required

Output to Event Log Output to File

Optional Optional

Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on Windows

93

Step 3. Connect to Databases

The Repository Server uses native drivers to communicate with the repository database. You must install and configure native database client connectivity software on the machine hosting the Repository Server. To ensure compatibility between the Repository Server and the repository database, use 32-bit database client libraries only. The Repository Server can connect to the following databases:

IBM DB2 Informix Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Teradata

For more information about connecting to a specific database, see Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289.

94

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Step 4. Start the Repository Server on Windows

You start the Repository Server as a Windows service. You can specify manual or automatic startup type for the Repository Server. When you select the automatic startup type, the Repository Server starts at system boot time. You might want to start the Repository Server automatically if a user without system administrator rights uses the Repository Server machine. When you select the manual startup type, you start the Repository Server from the Services control panel each time you boot the Repository Server machine. You might want to start the Repository Server manually if you also manually start the Repository database when you boot the machine. You might want to prevent repository clients from attempting to connect to the repository until you start the database. After you start the Repository Server, you can start the repository.

Starting the Repository Server

Complete the following steps to start the Repository Server.
To start the Repository Server: 1. 2. 3.

Log on to the Windows machine as a user who can start services. Navigate to the Administrative Tools Services. From the list of services, right-click the Informatica Repository Server service and choose Start. The Repository Server might take a moment to start.

4. 5.

If you want the Repository Server service to run every time the computer starts, choose Automatic as the Startup Type. Close the Services dialog box.

Verifying Repository Server Startup

You can verify the Repository Server started by looking in the Repository Server log file or in the Windows Event Viewer, depending on how you configured the Repository Server to writes messages.
To verify the Repository Server started in the Repository Server log file: 1. 2. 3.

Navigate to the Repository Server bin directory. Open the Repository Server log file. The default file name is pmrepserver.log. Look for the following message:
INFO : SF_34003 [Wed Mar 03 22:12:37 2004] : (1472|3116) Server initialization completed. Step 4. Start the Repository Server on Windows 95

To verify the Repository Server started: 1. 2. 3.

Open the Event Viewer. Select the Application Log. Look for the PmRepServer source:

Event PmRepServer 34003 displays when the Repository Server successfully starts.

You should see several events in the Application log for PmRepServer.
4.

Select the latest event. It should indicate it completed initialization:

96

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Verifying the Repository Server is Running

You can verify that the Repository Server is running and accepting client connections by using the Repository Server ping command from the command line. You can also use the Repository Server ping command to verify if another Repository Server on the network is running and you can connect to it.
To ping a Repository Server from the Windows command prompt: 1. 2. 3.

Log on to a machine with an installed Repository Server. Open the Windows command prompt. Switch to the Repository Server bin directory and enter the following command:
pmrepserver -p -h <host_name>:<port_number>

Specify the host name of the machine running the Repository Server you want to ping, and the port number it uses for connections. The Repository Server returns the following message when it pings a running Repository Server:
Informatica Repository Server running at <host_name>:<port number>

Step 4. Start the Repository Server on Windows

97

Stopping the Repository Server

You can shut down the Repository Server from the Windows Control Panel, the Repository Server Administration Console, or the Windows command prompt. You must have system administrator rights to stop the Repository Server.
To stop the Repository Server from the Windows Control Panel: 1. 2.

Choose Services in the Control Panel. Right-click Informatica Repository Server, and choose Stop.

To stop the Repository Server from the Administration Console: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Launch the Repository Server Administration Console and select the host name of the Repository Server from the Informatica Repository Servers list. Right-click the host name and choose Connect. Enter the Repository Server administrator password. Confirm that all repositories managed by the Repository Server are shut down. For details on shutting down the repository, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide.

5.

Right-click the host name and choose Shutdown. The Repository Server shuts down.

To stop the Repository Server from the Windows command prompt: 1. 2. 3.

Log on to the Windows machine as the user who has rights to start and stop the Repository Server service. Open the Windows command prompt. Switch to the Repository Server bin directory and enter the following command.
pmrepserver -s -x <administrator password> -h <host_name>:<port_number>

Specify the Repository Server administrator password, the host name of the machine running the Repository Server, and the port number it uses for connections. A message indicates the shutdown request was sent.
Note: If you do not use the -x option in the pmrepserver command, a message prompts you

to enter the administrator password. You can use -X to specify the PASSWORD environment variable. For more information about using password environment variables, see Using pmrep and pmrepagent in the Repository Guide. To verify that the Repository Server stopped, check the Repository Server event log. The Repository Server writes the following message to the event log file if it successfully stops:
INFO : SF_34014 Server shut down.

98

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Troubleshooting
This section contains information on troubleshooting the Repository Server on Windows. I installed the Repository Server on a Windows 2000 system, but I cannot start it. If you cannot start the Repository Server, you may receive the following message:
Error 1069 (The service did not start due to a logon failure)

Use the Windows 2000 Event Viewer to check the Application log. If possible, correct any error described in the application log. Also, verify the service start information. The Service Start Account needs the Windows 2000 user right Log on as a service on the Windows 2000 system. Use the following steps to verify that the account has the correct rights to start the PowerCenter Server: 1. 2. 3. In the Windows 2000 Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon. Double-click the Local Security Policy icon. In the Local Security Settings dialog box, expand Local Policies and select User Rights Assignment.

4.

Find the policy Log on as a service. Double-click on the policy to open the Local Security Policy Setting dialog box.

Troubleshooting

99

The dialog box lists the users assigned the right to Log on as a service.

5. 6.

If you need to add a user account, click Add. Click OK when finished and close the Local Security Settings dialog box.

Use the following steps to verify that the account with the right to log on as a service also starts the Informatica Repository Server service: 1. 2. 3. In the Windows 2000 Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon. Double-click the Services icon. In the Services dialog box, double-click Informatica Repository Server. The Informatica Repository Server Properties dialog box appears.

100

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

4.

Open the Log On tab.

5.

Select This account, and enter the account name and password assigned to the Informatica Repository Server service. You can also click Browse to search for an account name. If the correct account user is displayed, reenter the account user to have Windows 2000 verify the rights assigned to this user.

6. 7.

Click OK. Close the Informatica Repository Server Properties dialog box and start the Informatica Repository Server service again.

If the Repository Server does not start, call Informatica Technical Support.

Troubleshooting

101

102

Chapter 6: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows

Chapter 7

Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX

This chapter includes the following topics:

Before You Begin, 104 Step 1. Install the Repository Server, 105 Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on UNIX, 107 Step 3. Connect to Databases, 109 Step 4. Start the Repository Server on UNIX, 110 Stopping the Repository Server, 111

103

Before You Begin

Complete the following steps to install and configure the Repository Server on UNIX: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install the Repository Server. Configure the Repository Server. Configure database client connectivity software to connect to the repository database. Start the Repository Server.

Before you begin, locate the PowerCenter product license key. Use the same product license key to install the Repository Server and PowerCenter Server. For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
Important: Read the printed release notes for last minute changes to the Repository Server installation, licensing, and connectivity issues.

Code Pages
For accurate data movement and transformation, make sure the code pages you select in each component of PowerCenter are compatible with each other. For more information, see Globalization Overview on page 25.

Installation Guidelines
To improve repository performance, consider installing the Repository Server on a machine with a fast network connection. The Repository Server can manage repositories on different machines on the network. Verify the following requirements for the Repository Server machine:

Windows or UNIX operating system 100 MB disk space 128 MB RAM, plus 16 MB RAM for each repository the Repository Server manages Verify that the system time zone settings are correctly configured. Verify you have the appropriate user accounts to install and run the Repository Server and access the managed repository databases.

Use the following guidelines to configure the Repository Server machine:

104

Chapter 7: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX

Step 1. Install the Repository Server

After you install the PowerCenter Client tools, you can install the Repository Server. You can install multiple Repository Servers on the same UNIX system. However, you need to install each Repository Server in a separate directory and use different ports. Before you install the Repository Server, you might want to create a user in the UNIX system to run the Repository Server. You might want to create a new user if you want to restrict the number of users on the UNIX system who can run the Repository Server. You can grant the new user exclusive privileges to run the Repository Server.
To install the Repository Server on UNIX: 1.

Insert one of the following CDs into your UNIX machine:

Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit UNIX Informatica PowerCenter for 64-bit UNIX

2. 3.

Log on to the UNIX machine. Set the library path to the absolute directory path where you want to install the Repository Server for the operating systems listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. Library Path for Repository Server on UNIX Operating System Solaris AIX HP-UX Linux Library Path LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH

4.

On the PowerCenter installation CD, locate the directory specific to the product. For example, if you install the Repository Server on a Solaris system, switch to the unixserv/pc/solaris directory.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Run install by typing ./install. Enter the PowerCenter product license key. Select Repository Server from the list of components available to install. Enter the absolute target directory path where you want to install the Repository Server. The installation program now extracts and installs the files.

9.

Type Y if you want to view the readme file, or N to read it later. The installation program starts the pmrsconfig configuration utility. Configure the Repository Server.

Step 1. Install the Repository Server

105

You must configure the Repository Server before you can start it. For details on configuring the Repository Server on UNIX, see Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on UNIX on page 107.
10.

Exit from the Informatica PowerCenter installation.

106

Chapter 7: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX

Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on UNIX

After you install the Repository Server on UNIX, you need to configure it with the pmrsconfig utility. This utility writes your configuration parameters to the file pmrepserver.cfg. You configure the connectivity, logging, and administration password information in pmrsconfig. By default, this file is stored in the same directory as pmrepserver.exe. If you rename pmrepserver.cfg or move it to another directory, you must include the name and path when you open the configuration file in pmrsconfig. Repository Server configuration parameters are case-sensitive.
To configure the Repository Server on UNIX: 1. 2.

Run pmrsconfig and open pmrepserver.cfg. Enter the settings shown in Table 7-2 to configure the Repository Server:
Table 7-2. Configuration Parameters for Repository Server on UNIX Option ServerPort AdminPasswd Required/ Optional Required Required Description The port number the Repository Server uses for repository client connections. Default is 5001. The administrative password used to access the Repository Server. Must be in 7-bit ASCII only. Note this password. You need it when you create a repository and when you connect to the Repository Server. The minimum port number the Repository Server can assign to the Repository Agent process. Default is 5002. The maximum port number the Repository Server can assign to the Repository Agent process. Default is 65535. The name of the directory in which the Repository Server stores repository configuration information files. You can specify either a relative path or an absolute path. Default is Config. The name of the directory in which the Repository Server stores repository backup files. You can specify either a relative path or an absolute path. Default is Backup. The name of the directory in which the Repository Server stored repository plugin files. You can specify either a relative path or an absolute path. Default is Plugin.

RaMinPort RaMaxPort ConfigDir

Required Required Required

BackupDir

Required

PluginDir

Required

Step 2. Configure the Repository Server on UNIX

107

Table 7-2. Configuration Parameters for Repository Server on UNIX Option ErrorSeverityLevel Required/ Optional Required Description The level of error messages written to the Repository Server log. Specify one of the following message levels: - Error. Writes ERROR code messages to the log. - Warning. Writes WARNING and ERROR code messages to the log. - Information. Writes INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Tracing. Writes TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Debug. Writes DEBUG, TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. Default is Information. The name of the Repository Server log file. Default is pmrepserver.log.

LogFileName

Required

108

Chapter 7: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX

Step 3. Connect to Databases

The Repository Server uses native database drivers to communicate with the repository database. You must install and configure native database client connectivity software on the machine hosting the Repository Server. To ensure compatibility between the Repository Server and the repository database, use the appropriate database client libraries. Use 32-bit database client libraries with 32-bit Repository Servers and 64-bit database client libraries with 64-bit Repository Servers. The Repository Server on UNIX can connect to the following databases:

IBM DB2 Informix Oracle Sybase Teradata

Note: The Repository Server on Linux cannot connect to Informix or Teradata.

For more information about connecting to a specific database, see Connecting to Databases from UNIX on page 305.

Step 3. Connect to Databases

109

Step 4. Start the Repository Server on UNIX

The procedure for starting the Repository Server is the same for all UNIX platforms. You can start the Repository Server from the UNIX command line.

Starting the Repository Server

Use the following steps to start the Repository Server on UNIX.
To start the Repository Server: 1.

Connect to the UNIX machine on which the Repository Server is installed. Log on as a user who has rights to start and stop the Repository Server.

2.

Type the following command:

pmrepserver [configuration_file_name]

By default, the Repository Server uses the pmrepserver.cfg configuration file automatically when it starts. If you want to use a different configuration file, specify the configuration file name. The Repository Server displays a message indicating that is has started. To verify that the Repository Server started, check the Repository Server log file. The Repository Server writes the following message to the log file if it successfully starts:
INFO : SF_34003 Server initialization completed.

Verifying the Repository Server is Running

You can verify that the Repository Server is running and accepting client connections by using the Repository Server ping command from the command line. You can also use the Repository Server ping command to verify if another Repository Server on the network is running and you can connect to it.
To ping a Repository Server from the command prompt: 1. 2.

Log on to a machine with an installed Repository Server. Switch to the Repository Server installation directory and enter the following command:
pmrepserver -p -h <hostname>:<port_number>

Specify the host name of the machine running the Repository Server you want to ping, and the port number it uses for connections. The Repository Server returns the following message when it pings a running Repository Server:
Informatica Repository Server running at <hostname>:<port number>

110

Chapter 7: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX

Stopping the Repository Server

You can stop the Repository Server on UNIX from the UNIX command prompt or from the Repository Server Administration Console. When you stop the Repository Server, it also shuts down all repositories it manages. Before you shut down the Repository Server, verify that no users are connected to managed repositories.
To stop the Repository Server from the Repository Server Administration Console: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Launch the Repository Server Administration Console and select the host name of the Repository Server from the Informatica Repository Servers list. Right-click the host name and click Connect. Enter the Repository Server administrator password. Confirm that all repositories managed by the Repository Server are shut down. For details on shutting down the repository, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide. Right-click the host name and choose Shutdown. The Repository Server shuts down.

To stop the Repository Server from the UNIX command prompt: 1.

Connect to the UNIX machine on which the Repository Server is installed. Log on as the user who has rights to start and stop the Repository Server.

2.

Switch to the Repository Server installation directory and enter one of the following commands:
pmrepserver -s -x <administrator_password> -h <host_name>:<port_number>

or
pmrepserver -s -X <administrator_password_environment_variable> -h <host_name>:<port_number>

Specify the Repository Server administrator password, the host name of the machine running the Repository Server, and the port number it uses for connections. A message indicates the shutdown request was sent.
Note: If you do not use the -x option in the pmrepserver command, a message prompts you

to enter the administrator password. You can use -X to specify the PASSWORD environment variable to encrypt your repository password. For more information about using password environment variables, see Using pmrep and pmrepagent in the Repository Guide. To verify that the Repository Server stopped, check the Repository Server log file. The Repository Server writes the following message to the log file if it successfully stops:
INFO : SF_34014 Server shut down.

Stopping the Repository Server

111

112

Chapter 7: Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX

Chapter 8

Creating a Repository
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 114 Creating a Repository, 115 Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories, 125 Tips, 126

113

Overview
After you install and configure the PowerCenter Client and Repository Server, you can create a repository. A repository contains metadata you create using the PowerCenter Client tools and the PowerCenter Server uses to move and transform data from sources to targets. Use the Repository Server Administration Console to create and administer the repository. The Administration Console connects to the repository database through the Repository Server, so you must install and configure the Repository Server before working with repositories. PowerCenter includes the following types of repositories:

Standalone repository. A repository that functions individually, unrelated and unconnected to other repositories. Global repository. The centralized repository in a domain, a group of connected repositories. Each domain can contain one global repository. The global repository can contain common objects to be shared throughout the domain through global shortcuts. Local repository. A repository within a domain that is not the global repository. Each local repository in the domain can connect to the global repository and use objects in its shared folders. Versioned repository. A global or local repository that allows you to enable version control for the repository. A versioned repository can store multiple copies, or versions, of an object. Each version is a separate object with unique properties. Version control features allow you to efficiently develop, test, and deploy metadata into production.

You cannot change a global repository to a local repository, or a versioned repository to a nonversioned repository. However, you can promote an existing local repository to a global repository, and a non-versioned repository to a versioned repository.
Warning: The Informatica repository tables have an open architecture. Although you can view the repository tables, Informatica strongly advises against altering the tables or data within the tables. Informatica is not responsible for corrupt data that is caused by customer alteration of the repository tables or data within those tables.

114

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

Creating a Repository
Before you can create a repository, you must first create and configure the database to contain the repository and install and configure the Repository Server and PowerCenter Client tools.

Before You Begin

You can locate the repository on the source or target database systems. However, to protect your repository, consider keeping the repository separate from overloaded machines. Verify the following requirements for the repository database:

Windows or UNIX operating system 100 MB disk space (100-150 MB is recommended)

Also, verify that the time zone settings for the repository database and Repository Server machines are correctly configured. When you create a repository, you must have the following information available:

Database user name and password. This login must have the appropriate database permissions to create the repository. In the new repository, this login becomes a default user with full privileges in the repository. The user name may be in other languages, but the password must be in 7-bit ASCII only. Code page. When you create a repository, you must specify a code page from a list of code pages that are compatible with the PowerCenter Client. The code page contains the character set of the data in the repository. Once specified, you cannot change the code page. The PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server code pages must be compatible with the repository code page. For more information on code pages, see Globalization Overview on page 25. License keys. Verify you have the product, option, and connectivity license keys when you edit a repository configuration. First add the product license key, and then add the option and connectivity license keys. For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.

Oracle
If you want to create, restore, or upgrade an Oracle repository, set the environment variable NLS_LANG on the machine on which you have installed the Repository Server. Otherwise, the following error might display when you create, restore, or upgrade a repository on an Oracle 8 or 8i database:
ORA 01026 Multiple Buffers of size > 4 K in the bind list.

For more information about setting the NLS_LANG environment variable, see Connecting to an Oracle Database on page 298 or Connecting to an Oracle Database on page 313.

Creating a Repository

115

Sybase
If you want to create, restore, or upgrade a Sybase repository, set allow nulls by default to TRUE at the database level. Setting this option changes the default null type of the column to null in compliance with the SQL standard.

IBM DB2
You can optimize repository performance on IBM DB2 EEE databases when you store an Informatica repository in a single-node tablespace. When setting up an IBM DB2 EEE database, the database administrator must define the database on a single node. For more information, see Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories on page 125.

Steps to Create a Repository

You create a repository from the Repository Server Administration Console. You must first register or connect to the Repository Server.
To create a repository: 1. 2. 3.

Launch the Repository Server Administration Console and select the Informatica Repository Servers node. Choose Action-New Server Registration. Enter the host name of the machine where you installed the Repository Server and the port number the Repository Server uses, and click OK. The Administration Console adds the Repository Server to the Console Tree.

4. 5.

Expand the Informatica Repository Servers node, right-click the Repository Server, and choose Connect. In the Connecting to Repository Server dialog box, enter the password you use to administer the Repository Server, and the port number used to access the Repository Server. Click OK. The Administration Console connects to the Repository Server and displays any managed repository.

6.

In the Console Tree, select the Repositories node and choose Action-New Repository.

116

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

The New Repository dialog box appears, displaying the General tab.

7.

Enter general information about the repository. Table 8-1 describes the options available on the General tab:
Table 8-1. New Repository - General Tab Option RepositoryName Required/ Optional Required Description The name of the repository. Do not use the following characters when creating a repository name: \ / : * ? < > " | . Creates a global repository. Once created, you cannot change a global repository to a local repository. Do not select this option if you are not sure you want to create a global repository. You can promote an existing local repository to a global repository later.

Global Data Repository

Optional

Creating a Repository

117

Table 8-1. New Repository - General Tab Option Enable Version Control Required/ Optional Optional Description Creates a versioned repository. Do not select this option if you are not sure you want to create a versioned repository. You can promote an existing repository to a versioned repository later. To enable a repository for version control, you must have the Team-based Development option license key in the repository license file. Add the license key on the Licenses tab. To create a new repository, select Create All Repository Content. When you do this, the Repository Server creates a repository configuration and creates all repository tables in the database you specify. Note: When you select Do Not Create Any Content, the Repository Server creates a repository configuration without creating repository tables in the database.

Creation Mode

Required

8.

Click the Database Connection tab.

118

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

Table 8-2 describes the options available on the Database Connection tab:
Table 8-2. New Repository - Database Connection Tab Option Database Type CodePage Required/ Optional Required Required Description The type of database storing the repository. The repository code page. The Repository Server uses the character set encoded in the repository code page when writing data to the repository. The native connect string the Repository Server uses to access the database containing the repository. For most databases, this is not an ODBC data source name, but a native connect string (for example, servername@dbname for Microsoft SQL Server, or dbname.world for Oracle). For Teradata databases, use the ODBC data source name. For a list of connect string syntax, see Table 3-1 on page 61. The account for the database containing the repository. Set up this account using the appropriate database client tools. The repository database password corresponding to the database user. Must be in 7-bit ASCII. If selected, the Repository Server uses Windows authentication to access the Microsoft SQL Server database. The user name that starts the Repository Server must be a valid Windows user with access to the Microsoft SQL Server database. The tablespace name for IBM DB2 repositories. When you specify the tablespace name, the Repository Server creates all repository tables in the same tablespace. You cannot use spaces in the tablespace name. To improve repository performance on IBM DB2 EEE repositories, specify a tablespace name with one node. For more information on using the tablespace names, see Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories on page 125.

ConnectString

Required

DBUser DBPassword Trusted Connection

Required Required Optional

TablespaceName

Optional

Creating a Repository

119

9.

Click the Network tab.

10.

Enter the network information. Table 8-3 describes the options available on the Network tab:
Table 8-3. New Repository - Network Tab Option MessageReceiveTimeout MessageSendTimeout Required/ Optional Required Required Description Number of seconds the Repository Server waits to receive a message from a client application before timing out. Default is 3. Number of seconds the Repository Server waits while sending a message to a client application before timing out. Default is 3.

120

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

11.

Click the Configuration tab.

12.

Enter the repository configuration information. Table 8-4 describes the options available on the Configuration tab:
Table 8-4. New Repository - Configuration Tab Option MaximumConnections ErrorSeverityLevel Required/ Optional Required Required Description The maximum number of connections the repository accepts from repository client applications. Default is 200. The level of error messages written to the Repository Agent log file. Specify one of the following message levels: - Error. Writes ERROR code messages to the log file. - Warning. Writes WARNING and ERROR code messages to the log file. - Information. Writes INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log file. - Trace. Writes TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log file. Informatica recommends using the Trace and Information logging levels for troubleshooting purposes only. The Repository Server validates the date display format and uses it when writing entries to the repository log file. If the date display format is invalid, the Repository Server uses the PowerCenter default date display format. The default date display format is DY MON DD HH 24:MI:SS YYYY.

DateDisplayFormat

Required

Creating a Repository

121

Table 8-4. New Repository - Configuration Tab Option DynamicConfig RefreshInterval ThreadWaitTimeout Required/ Optional Required Required Description The number of seconds the repository waits to poll for updates to its configuration. Default is 10. The number of seconds the master thread running repository processes waits for process threads to stop before stopping. Default is 60. The maximum number of locks the repository places on metadata objects. Default is 50,000. The path and name of the Repository Agent log file. By default, this option specifies pmrepagent.log. If you specify the same log file name for multiple repositories, the Repository Agent writes messages for each repository to the same file. The number of seconds the Repository Agent waits for an automatic response from a repository client application before closing the connection. If the Repository Agent receives no response from the repository client application in three times the number of specified seconds, the Repository Agent closes the connection. Default is 60. Minimum is 30. If you set this option to 0, the Repository Agent does not time out or close connections. The maximum number of connections to the repository database that the Repository Agent can establish. If the Repository Agent tries to establish more connections than specified for DatabasePoolSize, it times out the connection attempt after the number of seconds specified for DatabaseConnectionTimeout. Default is 500. Minimum is 20. The number of seconds the Repository Agent waits to establish a connection to the repository database before timing out. Default is 30 seconds. Requires users to add check in comments. Select to track changes made to users, groups, privileges, and permissions. Logged to pmsecaudit.<repository_name>.log file in the Repository Server installation/bin directory. For more information, see Repository Security in the Repository Guide. The number of rows to fetch each time an array database operation, such as insert or fetch, is issued. Default is 100.

MaximumLocks LogFileName

Required Required

KeepAliveTimeout

Required

DatabasePoolSize

Required

DatabaseConnection Timeout CheckinCommentsRequired SecurityAuditTrail

Required

Optional Optional

DatabaseArrayOperationSize

Optional

13.

Click the Licenses tab. When first click the Licenses tab when you create a repository configuration, the Administration Console displays a messaging informing you that the license file is empty.

122

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

14.

Click OK to close the message dialog box.

Displays the license key repository type, either production or development. Displays the repository license file name. The file is located in the Repository Server installation directory. Add a license key to the repository license file.

Displays the license keys and their properties in the license file.

You can use the Licenses tab to update and view the repository license file. The license file name is repository_name-es.lic and is located in the Repository Server installation directory. However, when you use special characters in the repository name, the Administration Console converts them to an underscore and a letter. For more information about how the Administration Console creates repository file names, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
15. 16.

Add the product license key in the License Key field and click Update. PowerCenter adds the product license key to the license file. If you have any option or connectivity license key, enter the key in the License Key field and click Update. Do this for every option and connectivity license key. Consider the following rules and guidelines when you add license keys:

You must add the product license key to the license file before you enter any option or connectivity license key. PowerCenter only adds option and connectivity license keys to a license file when the license file contains a valid product license key. The option and connectivity license keys you add must match the repository type, either development or production, of the other license keys in the license file. You can also add license keys to the license file at any time.

When you enter a valid license key, the Administration Console informs you it updated the license file successfully. The Administration Console does not add invalid, expired, or duplicate license keys to the license file.

Creating a Repository

123

For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
17.

Click OK to save the configuration options. The Administration Console saves the repository configuration and adds it to the Repository Server configuration directory. When the Repository Server finishes creating the repository tables in the database, the repository appears in the Console Tree under the Repositories node, and the Repository Server starts the Repository Agent.

Tip: To change the repository code page after you create the repository, you can back it up and

restore it. When you restore a repository, you can specify any compatible code page.

124

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories

When setting up an IBM DB2 EEE database, the database administrator can define the database on a single node. You can optimize repository performance on IBM DB2 EEE databases when you store an Informatica repository in a single-node tablespace. When the tablespace contains one node, the PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server access the repository faster than if the repository tables exist on different database nodes. Specify the single-node tablespace name when you create, copy, or restore a repository. The Repository Server creates all repository tables in the same tablespace. The repository stores the tablespace name so that when you upgrade the repository, the Repository Server uses the same tablespace name. If you do not specify the tablespace name when you create, copy, or restore a repository, the DB2 system specifies the default tablespace for each repository table. The DB2 system may or may not specify a single-node tablespace.
Note: If you have an existing IBM DB2 EEE repository, you can back it up and restore it in a

single-node tablespace. For more information on specifying the tablespace name, see Configuring the Repository and Using pmrep and pmrepagent in the Repository Guide.

Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories

125

Tips
The following tips help you create a repository: Set Oracle storage parameters to prevent the repository from using excessive amounts of disk space. When you create a repository in an Oracle database, make sure the storage parameters specified for the tablespace that contains the repository are not set too large. Since many target tablespaces are initially set for very large INITIAL and NEXT values, large storage parameters cause the repository to use excessive amounts of space. Also verify that the default tablespace for the user that owns the repository tables is set correctly. The following example shows how to set the recommended storage parameters, assuming the repository is stored in the REPOSITORY tablespace:
ALTER TABLESPACE REPOSITORY DEFAULT STORAGE ( INITIAL 10K NEXT 10K MAXEXTENTS UNLIMITED PCTINCREASE 50 );

Verify or change these parameters before the repository you create the repository. For details on backing up and restoring the repository, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide.

126

Chapter 8: Creating a Repository

Chapter 9

Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

This chapter includes the following topics:

Before You Begin, 128 Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server on Windows, 131 Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows, 133 Step 3. Connect to Databases, 147 Step 4. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server, 148 Troubleshooting, 152

127

Before You Begin

Complete the following steps to install and configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install the PowerCenter Server. Configure the PowerCenter Server. Configure database connectivity. Register the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager. Start the PowerCenter Server.

Before you begin, locate the PowerCenter product license key. Use the same product license key to install the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server. For more information on licenses, see Maintaining PowerCenter Licenses in the Repository Guide.
Important: Read the printed release notes for any last minute change to the PowerCenter Server

installation, licensing, and connectivity issues.

Code Pages
For accurate data movement and transformation, you must make sure the code pages you select in each component of PowerCenter are compatible with each other. For more information, see Globalization Overview on page 25.

DHCP
When configuring the PowerCenter Server, avoid using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) for the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. DHCP dynamically assigns a new IP address each time you start a machine on the network. If you use DHCP on the PowerCenter Server machine, each time you start the PowerCenter Server, you must re-register the PowerCenter Server with the repository so the PowerCenter Client can communicate with the PowerCenter Server at the new address. If the PowerCenter Server machine has only one network card, after starting the PowerCenter Server, edit the existing PowerCenter Server connection information in the Workflow Manager. You may need to resolve the PowerCenter Server IP address in the Server Editor dialog box in the Workflow Manager. If the PowerCenter Server machine has multiple network cards, configure the PowerCenter Server with the desired IP address in the PowerCenter Server setup program. After you configure the PowerCenter Server with the correct IP address, you can start it. You may also need to resolve the PowerCenter Server IP address in the Server Editor dialog box in the Workflow Manager.

128

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Installation Guidelines
Use the following guidelines before you install the PowerCenter Server on a Windows system: 1. 2. To optimize performance, do not install the PowerCenter Server on a Primary Domain Controller (PDC) or a Backup Domain Controller (BDC). Verify that the date and time are correct on the host computer task bar. Make sure the time zone is correct to ensure that your workflows run when you expect. The Workflow Manager displays the date and time based on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server.
Note: You must set the short date format to MM/DD/YYYY on Windows.

3. 4.

Make sure you have 30 MB of disk space available on the Windows boot drive. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup requires this space for temporary files. If you are upgrading your version of the PowerCenter Server, stop the Informatica service before running the installation program.

Creating PowerCenter Server Users

When you install the PowerCenter Server on a Windows system, you need the following user accounts: 1. 2. Windows user with administrator rights. To install the PowerCenter Server, log on to the Windows system as a member of the Administrators group in the local domain. Windows user that runs the PowerCenter Server service. Before you install the PowerCenter Server, create a user account with the right to run services, known as the Service Start Account. To see if this account has the correct rights, run User Manager for Domains and select the user. Select User Rights from the Policies menu. The user must have the Logon as a service right. Create this account specifically to run the PowerCenter Server. Do not run the PowerCenter Server as the System account.
Note: You can create either a local or domain account. To send email when you run a

workflow or access a repository on a Microsoft SQL Server database that uses Windows integrated security, you must create a domain account. 3. Repository user. When you configure the PowerCenter Server, you enter a repository user name and password specific to the PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server tools. This is created in the Repository Manager. For more information about creating repository users, see Repository Security in the Repository Guide.

PowerCenter Server Variable Directories

The installation program creates the following directories under the installation directory to store session files and caches associated with each PowerCenter Server:

BadFiles Bin

Before You Begin

129

Cache ExtProc LkpFiles Manuals SessLogs SrcFiles Temp TgtFiles WorkflowLogs

All workflows use these directories by default. For details, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177.

130

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server on Windows

After you install the client tools, install the Repository Server, and create a repository, you can install the PowerCenter Server. You can install only one PowerCenter Server on a Windows system. To install the PowerCenter Server, run the setup program on the PowerCenter installation CD as described in this section.
To install the PowerCenter Server: 1. 2. 3.

Log on to the Windows machine as a user who is a member of the local Administrators group. Insert the Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit Microsoft Windows and Linux CD into your Windows machine. From Windows, browse the CD and run launch.exe. or From the command line, switch to the CD and run launch.exe. The Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen appears.

4.

Read the Important Notice before you install PowerCenter. Click Important Notice.
Note: You can use the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen to view other

information, such as the CD contents.

5. 6.

After you read the Important Notice, return to the Informatica PowerCenter Welcome screen, and click PowerCenter for Windows. A second welcome screen displays. Click Next. or The Add/Remove screen displays if you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed. Select Modify, and click Next.

7.

Select Server. If this is the first time you are installing a component of PowerCenter 7.1.1 and you want to install only the PowerCenter Server, clear the other components. Browse to specify the installation directory, and click Next. or If you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed on this machine, clear them if you want to uninstall. The existing installation directory displays as the default installation directory. Click Next.
Note: The PowerCenter Server installs into the Server directory in the specified destination directory.

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server on Windows

131

8.

Enter your name, company name, and PowerCenter product license key. Click Next. The installation process does not prompt you to enter this information if you already installed the version 7.1.1 Repository Server.
Note: The installation process uses the PowerCenter product license key you specify to

create a default license file, pm.lic, and stores it in the PowerCenter Server bin directory.
9. 10. 11.

Select the program folder, and click Next. Review the settings, such as the components to be installed, uninstalled, and the destination directory. Click Next. The program launches the Server installation. If you have other components of PowerCenter 7.1.1 installed on this machine, go to step 13.

12.

Select View Readme if you want to read the PowerCenter release notes. Select Configure PowerCenter Server to configure the PowerCenter Server, or click Next to configure the PowerCenter Server later. For more information on configuring the PowerCenter Server, see Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows on page 133.

13.

Click Finish to exit the PowerCenter Server Setup. You must configure the PowerCenter Server before you can connect to it. For more information on configuring the PowerCenter Server, see Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows on page 133.
Note: You must restart Windows before you can start the PowerCenter Server. For

information about starting the PowerCenter Server, see Step 4. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server on page 148.

Uninstalling the PowerCenter Server

You can use one of the following methods to uninstall the PowerCenter Server:

Run launch.exe on the PowerCenter installation CD. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. Use the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. In the Windows Control Panel, choose Add/ Remove Programs, and then choose Informatica PowerCenter 7.1.1. The Informatica PowerCenter Setup detects existing installed components and prompts you to remove them. You can access the Add/Remove Programs dialog box only if you have system administrative privileges.

132

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

After you complete the installation, you must configure the PowerCenter Server before you can start it. Make note of the settings you enter for the PowerCenter Server. You need to enter the same settings when you register the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager. You must include an entry for all required configuration parameters before you start the PowerCenter Server. You can make changes to the PowerCenter Server configuration parameters. These changes take effect when you stop and restart the PowerCenter Server. Before you can run a workflow, you need to complete the following steps in the Workflow Manager:

Register the PowerCenter Server in the repository. Configure the source and target database connections.

For details, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177.

Note: ODBC databases, such as Microsoft Access and Excel, are compatible with the

PowerCenter Server on a Windows system. However, they are not compatible with the PowerCenter Server installed on a UNIX system.
To configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows: 1.

If the configuration screen is not displayed from the installation, choose ProgramsInformatica PowerCenter 7.1.1 - Server-Informatica Server Setup from the Windows Start menu.
Note: If you entered a different Windows program menu location, open the Informatica

Server Setup from that location.

2. 3.

Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue. Configure the following tabs:

Server. Configure server properties such as the host name and TCP/IP address. For more information, see Configuring the Server Tab on page 134. Repository. Configure connectivity information for the repository and Repository Server. For more information, see Configuring the Repository Tab on page 136. Licenses. Enter the license information needed to run the PowerCenter Server. For more information, see Configuring the Licenses Tab on page 137. Compatibility and Database. Enter the information maintain compatibility with previous versions of the PowerCenter Server and databases. For more information, see Configuring the Compatibility and Database Tab on page 139. Configuration. Configure session and miscellaneous options. For more information, see Configuring the Configuration Tab on page 141. JVM Options. Configure VM options such as the VM location and classpath. For more information, see Configuring the JVM Options Tab on page 144.

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

133

HTTP Proxy. Configure HTTP proxy options such as the server name and server port. For more information, see Configuring the HTTP Proxy Tab on page 145.

Configuring the Server Tab

You can configure server name and Load Manager options on the Server tab.
To configure the Server tab: 1. 2. 3.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue. Click the Server tab.

134

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

4.

Configure the following server options:

Table 9-1. Server Tab Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows TCP/IP Option Server Name Required/ Optional Required Description The name of the PowerCenter Server to register with the repository. This name must be unique to the repository. This name must also match the name you specify when you use the Workflow Manager to register the PowerCenter Server. The TCP/IP host address as an IP number (such as 123.456.789.1), or a local host name (such as RECDB), or a fully qualified name (such as RECDB.INVOICE.COM). If you leave this field blank, the PowerCenter Server uses the default local host address. The maximum number of sessions the PowerCenter Server runs at a time. Increase this value only if you have sufficient shared memory. Default is 10. The amount of shared memory available for use by the PowerCenter Server Load Manager process. For every 10 sessions in Max Sessions, you need at least 2,000,000 bytes reserved in Load Manager Shared Memory. Default is 2,000,000 bytes. The level of error messages written to the PowerCenter Server log. Specify one of the following message levels: - Error. Writes ERROR code messages to the log. - Warning. Writes WARNING and ERROR code messages to the log. - Information. Writes INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Tracing. Writes TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Debug. Writes DEBUG, TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. Enable this option if you want the PowerCenter Server to fail the session if the number of sessions already running is equal to the value configured for Maximum Number of Concurrent Sessions. If you disable this option, the PowerCenter Server places the session in a ready queue until a session slot becomes available. This option is disabled by default. If selected, you can run the Debugger. This option is enabled by default. Enable this option if you want to append a time stamp to messages written to the workflow log. This option is disabled by default.

TCP/IP Host Address

Optional

Max No. of Concurrent Sessions Shared Memory

Required

Required

Error Severity Level for Log Files

Required

Fail Session if Maximum Number of Concurrent Sessions Reached

Optional

Allow mapping/session debugging Time Stamp Workflow Log

Optional Optional

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

135

Table 9-1. Server Tab Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows TCP/IP Option Output to Event Log Required/ Optional Optional Description Enable this option if you want to write PowerCenter Server messages to the Windows Event Log. This option is enabled by default. Enable this option if you want to write PowerCenter Server log messages to a file. When you enable this option, enter a file name for the PowerCenter Server log.

Output to File

Optional

Configuring the Repository Tab

You can configure connectivity information for the repository database and Repository Server on the Repository tab.
To configure the Repository tab: 1. 2. 3.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue. Click the Repository tab.

136

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

4.

Configure the following repository options:

Table 9-2. Repository Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows Option Repository Name Repository User Required/ Optional Required Required Description The name of the repository to connect to. You create a repository in the Repository Server Administration Console. The account used to access the repository. When you first create a repository, the Repository User is the database user name. You create other Repository Users in the Repository Manager. The password for the Repository User. When you first create a repository, the password is the password for the database user. The name of the machine hosting the Repository Server. The port number the Repository Server uses to communicate with repository client applications. The maximum number of seconds that the PowerCenter Server tries to establish a connection to the Repository Server. If the PowerCenter Server is unable to connect to the Repository Server in the time specified, the PowerCenter Server shuts down. Default is 60 seconds.

Repository Password Repository Server Host Name Repository Server Port Number Repository Server Timeout

Required Required Required Required

Configuring the Licenses Tab

The Licenses tab displays license information contained in the license file located in the PowerCenter Server installation directory.
To configure the Licenses tab: 1. 2.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue.

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

137

3.

Click the Licenses tab.

Displays the license keys and their properties in the license file. Enter the PowerCenter Server license file name and path or just the file name. When you omit the path, the PowerCenter Server looks for the file in the PowerCenter Server installation directory. Add a license key to the PowerCenter Server license file.

4.

Enter the license file name. You can use the default license file, pm.lic, that the installation process creates when you install the PowerCenter Server. If you enter a different license file name, you must first add a product license key to the license file. If the license file does not contain a valid product license key, add a valid product license key. Enter the product license key string in the With Key, and click Update If you have any option or connectivity license key, enter it in the With Key, and click Update. Do this for every license key you need to add to the license file. Consider the following rules and guidelines when you add license keys:

5. 6.

You must verify the license file contains a product license key before you enter any option or connectivity license key. PowerCenter only adds option and connectivity license keys to a license file when the license file contains a valid product license key. The option and connectivity license keys you add must match the repository type, either development or production, of the other license keys in the license file. The option and connectivity license keys you add to the PowerCenter Server license file must match the license keys in the repository license file for every repository with which you register the PowerCenter Server. You can add license keys to the license file at any time.

For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
138 Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Configuring the Compatibility and Database Tab

You can configure compatibility settings for some databases and prior versions of PowerCenter and PowerMart.
To configure the Compatibility and Database tab: 1. 2. 3.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue. Click the Compatibility and Database tab.

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

139

4.

Configure the following compatibility options:

Table 9-3. Compatibility and Database Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows Setting PMServer 3.X aggregate compatibility Required/ Optional Optional Description If selected, the PowerCenter Server handles Aggregator transformations as it did in PowerMart 3.x. This overrides both Aggregate treat nulls as zero and Aggregate treat rows as insert. If you select this option, the PowerCenter Server treats nulls as zeros in aggregate calculations and performs aggregate calculations before flagging records for insert, update, delete, or reject in Update Strategy expressions. If you do not select this option, the PowerCenter Server treats nulls as nulls and performs aggregate calculations based on the Update Strategy transformation. If selected, the PowerCenter Server processes master and detail pipelines sequentially as it did in versions prior to 7.0. The PowerCenter Server processes all data from the master pipeline before starting to process the detail pipeline. Also, if you enable this option, you cannot specify the Transaction level transformation scope for Joiner transformations. If you do not select this option, the PowerCenter Server processes the master and detail pipelines concurrently. If selected, the PowerCenter Server treats nulls as zero in Aggregator transformations. If you do not select this option, the PowerCenter Server treats nulls as nulls in aggregate calculations. If selected, the PowerCenter Server performs aggregate calculations before flagging records for insert, update, delete, or reject in Update Strategy expressions. If you do not select this option, the PowerCenter Server performs aggregate calculations based on the Update Strategy transformation. If selected, the PowerCenter Server handles dates as in PowerCenter 1.0/PowerMart 4.0. Date handling significantly improved in PowerCenter 1.5 and PowerMart 4.5. If you need to revert to PowerCenter 1.0 or PowerMart 4.0 behavior, you can configure the PowerCenter Server to handle dates as in PowerCenter 1.0 and PowerMart 4.0. If you have PowerCenter Connect for PeopleSoft, you can use this option for PeopleSoft sources on Oracle. You cannot, however, use it for PeopleSoft lookup tables on Oracle or PeopleSoft sources on Microsoft SQL Server. Allows you to specify a maximum number of connections to a lookup or stored procedure database when you start a workflow. If the number of connections needed exceeds this value, session threads must share connections. This can result in a performance loss. If you do not specify a value, the PowerCenter Server allows an unlimited number of connections to the lookup or stored procedure database. If the PowerCenter Server allows an unlimited number of connections, but the database user does not have permission for the number of connections required by the session, the session fails. A default value is not specified.

PMServer 6.X Joiner source order compatibility

Optional

Aggregate Treat Nulls as Zero Aggregate Treat Rows as Insert

Optional

Optional

PMServer 4.0 date handling compatibility

Optional

Treat CHAR as CHAR on Read

Optional

Max LKP/SP DB Connections

Optional

140

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Table 9-3. Compatibility and Database Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows Setting Max Sybase Connections Required/ Optional Optional Description Allows you to specify a maximum number of connections to a Sybase database when you start a session. If the number of connections required by the session is greater than this value, the session fails. Default is 100. Allows you to specify a maximum number of connections to a Microsoft SQL Server database when you start a workflow. If the number of connections required by the workflow is greater than this value, the workflow fails. Default is 100. Allows you to specify the number of times the PowerCenter Server retries a target write on a database deadlock. Default is 10. Allows you to specify the number of seconds before the PowerCenter Server retries a target write on database deadlock. Default is 0 and the PowerCenter Server retries the target write immediately.

Max MSSQL Connections

Optional

Number of Deadlock Retries Deadlock Sleep Before Retry (seconds)

Optional Optional

Configuring the Configuration Tab

You can configure session and miscellaneous options on the Configuration tab.
To configure the Configuration tab: 1. 2.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue.

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

141

3.

Click the Configuration tab.

4.

Configure the following session and configuration options:

Table 9-4. Configuration Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows Setting Data Movement Mode Validate Data Code Pages Required/ Optional Required Description Choose ASCII or Unicode. The default data movement mode is ASCII, which passes 7-bit ASCII character data. To pass 8-bit ASCII and multibyte character data from sources to targets, use Unicode mode. If you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server enforces data code page compatibility. If you disable this option, the PowerCenter Server lifts restrictions for source and target data code page selection, stored procedure and lookup database code page selection, and session sort order selection. This option is only available when the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode data movement mode. By default, this option is enabled. If you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server writes to the session log using the UTF-8 character set. If you disable this option, the PowerCenter Server writes to the session log using the PowerCenter Server code page. This option is available when the PowerCenter Server runs in Unicode data movement mode. By default, this option is disabled. If you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server writes duplicate row warnings and duplicate rows for XML targets to the session log. By default, this option is enabled.

Optional

Output Session Log In UTF8

Optional

Warn About Duplicate XML Rows

Optional

142

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Table 9-4. Configuration Tab Options for PowerCenter Server on Windows Setting Create Indicator Files for Target Flat File Output Output Metadata for Flat File Target Required/ Optional Optional Description If you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server creates indicator files when you run a session with a flat file target. If you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server writes column headers to flat file targets. It writes the target definition port names to the flat file target in the first line, starting with the # symbol. By default, this option is disabled. If you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server uses pass-through partitioning for non-DB2 targets when the partition type is Database Partitioning. Enable this option if you specify Database Partitioning for a non-DB2 target. Otherwise, the PowerCenter Server fails the session. If you want the PowerCenter Server to write session log messages to an external library, enter the name of the library file. Determines how the PowerCenter Server evaluates null values in comparison operations. Enable one of the following options: - Null. The PowerCenter Server evaluates null values as null in comparison expressions. If either operand is null, the result is null. This is the default behavior. - High. The PowerCenter Server evaluates null values as greater than nonnull values in comparison expressions. If both operands are null, the PowerCenter Server evaluates them as equal. When you choose High, comparison expressions never result in null. - Low. The PowerCenter Server evaluates null values as less than non-null values in comparison expressions. If both operands are null, the PowerCenter Server treats them as equal. When you choose Low, comparison expressions never result in null. In target-based commit mode, the amount of time in seconds the writer remains idle before it issues a commit when the following conditions are true: - The PowerCenter Server has written data to the target. - The PowerCenter Server has not issued a committed. The PowerCenter Server may commit to the target before or after the configured commit interval. Default is 60 seconds. If you configure the timeout to be 0 or a negative number, the PowerCenter Server defaults to 60 seconds. Microsoft Exchange profile used by the Service Start Account to send post-session email. The Service Start Account must be set up as a Domain account to use this feature. If specified, the PowerCenter Server validates the date display format and uses it in session log and server log entries. If the date display format is invalid, the PowerCenter Server uses the default date display format. The default date display format is DY MON DD HH 24:MI:SS YYYY. When you specify a date display format, it displays in the test window. An invalid date display format is marked invalid. Read-only field that displays the current date using the format selected in the Date Display Format field.

Optional

Treat Database Partitioning As Pass Through Export Session Log Lib Name Treat Null In Comparison Operators As

Optional

Optional Required

WriterWaitTimeOut

Optional

Microsoft Exchange Profile Date Display Format

Optional

Required

Test Formatted Date

n/a

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows

143

Configuring the JVM Options Tab

You can configure JVM options if you run Java-based programs with PowerCenter Connect products, such as PowerCenter Connect for JMS or PowerCenter Connect for webMethods.
To configure the JVM Options tab: 1. 2. 3.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue. Click the JVM Options tab.

4.

Configure the following JVM options:

Table 9-5. JVM Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows VM Option VM Location Required/ Optional Required Description The absolute path to the jvm.dll file. Informatica recommends that you set the absolute path to the jvm.dll file in the Java \hotspot directory for best performance. When you change the jvm.dll file location, you must set the absolute path to the new location. You can set the CLASSPATH to any JAR files you need to run a session using a web service source, target, or transformation. The PowerCenter Server appends the values you set to the system CLASSPATH.

Classpath

Optional

144

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Table 9-5. JVM Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows VM Option MinMemory Required/ Optional Optional Description Set this value to increase the minimum amount of memory for JVM to use during a PowerCenter session. The default value is 32 MB. If the session fails due to an out of memory error, you may want to increase this value. Set this value to increase the maximum amount of memory for JVM to use during a PowerCenter session. The default value is 64 MB. If the session fails due to an out of memory error, you may want to increase this value. Select a VM name. You can choose TrustStore, ClientStore, or JCEProvider. You can also click Create to create a custom name. Value for the VM name. If you choose TrustStore or ClientStore, use the following syntax:
<drive>:<path>\<filename>

MaxMemory

Optional

Name Value

Optional Optional

For example:
c:\Certs\client\keystore

If you choose JCEProvider, enter the JCE Provider class name to support NTLM authentication. Use a class name such as com.sun.crypto.provider.SunJCE. If you create a custom VM option, use the following syntax:
-D<VMOption_prefix>=<VMOption_value>

For example: - Djava.protocol.handler.pkgs=com.sun.net.

ssl.internal.www.protocol

5.

Click Create New to add a custom VM option.

6.

Enter a name and value for the new VM option. You can add up to 10 custom VM options.

7. 8.

Click OK to close the VM Option dialog box. Optionally, select a custom VM option and click Delete.

Configuring the HTTP Proxy Tab

You can configure HTTP proxy server name and authentication on the HTTP Proxy tab.
Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on Windows 145

To configure the HTTP Proxy tab: 1. 2. 3.

From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the PowerCenter Server Setup. Select the Configure Informatica Service option, and click Continue. Click the HTTP Proxy tab.

4.

Configure the following options:

Table 9-6. HTTP Proxy Tab Options for the PowerCenter Server on Windows Option Server Name Server Port Username Password Domain Required/ Optional Required Required Optional Optional Optional Description Name of the HTTP proxy server. Port number of the HTTP proxy server. Authenticated user name for the HTTP proxy server. This is required if the proxy server requires authentication. Password for the authenticated user. This is required if the proxy server requires authentication. Domain for authentication.

146

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Step 3. Connect to Databases

To communicate with databases, the PowerCenter Server uses either native database connectivity software or ODBC. Informatica recommends using native database drivers to connect to the source and target databases. To connect through native drivers, you must install and configure native database client connectivity software on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. To ensure compatibility between the PowerCenter Server and your source and target databases, use 32bit database client libraries only. PowerCenter Servers running on a Windows machine can use ODBC to connect to databases. For more information on ODBC connections, see Understanding Connectivity on page 59. The PowerCenter Server on Windows can connect to the following databases:

IBM DB2 Informix Microsoft Access Microsoft Excel Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Teradata

See Connecting to Databases from Windows on page 289 for more information about connecting to a specific database.

Step 3. Connect to Databases

147

Step 4. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server

You start the PowerCenter Server from the Windows Services and stop it from the Windows Services or the Workflow Manager. You can also stop it using pmcmd. Before you can start the PowerCenter Server, you must register it in the Workflow Manager. For more information, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177. You must also install, configure, and start the Repository Server. For more information, see Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows on page 87 and Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX on page 103. When you send a request to stop the PowerCenter Server, the PowerCenter Server first removes all scheduled workflows from the schedule. It then attempts to stop all running workflows. If any workflow fails to respond within a certain period of time, the PowerCenter Server aborts the remaining workflows. Allow one to two minutes for the PowerCenter Server to complete all processes. When you restart the PowerCenter Server, you must reschedule those workflows whose start time has passed, unless you scheduled them to run continuously.
Note: To start the PowerCenter Server, the PowerCenter Server license file must contain a valid

product license key. Also, if you have option and connectivity license keys, verify you add them to the PowerCenter Server license file. For more information about licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.

Windows Services
You can start and stop the PowerCenter Server from the Windows Services. When you stop the PowerCenter Server from the Windows Services, the PowerCenter Server aborts all running workflows before it stops.
To start the PowerCenter Server: 1. 2.

Verify that the repository database and Repository Server managing the repository are running. In the Workflow Manager, verify the PowerCenter Server is registered in the repository. If the PowerCenter Server is not registered in the repository, use the Workflow Manager to register it. For more information, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Log on to the Windows machine as a user who can start services. From the Windows Start menu, navigate to the Windows Services. In the Services dialog box, right-click Informatica and select Start. If you want the Informatica service to run every time the computer starts, choose Automatic as the Startup Type. Be sure that access to all necessary database services and the Repository Server are available at boot time from the host. Close the Services dialog box.

7.

148

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

8. 9. 10.

Wait for one minute, and then open the Windows Event Viewer from the Start menu. Select Application Log. Look for the PmServer source:

Event LM 34003 displays if the PowerCenter Server successfully starts.

You should see several events in the Application log for PmServer.
11.

Select the latest event. It should contain the following message:

If not, see Troubleshooting on page 152 for possible solutions.

To stop the PowerCenter Server: 1.

Navigate to Windows Services from the Start menu.

Step 4. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server 149

2.

Right-click Informatica and select Stop.

Automatically Starting the PowerCenter Server

You can configure the PowerCenter Server service to start at system boot time.
To automatically start the PowerCenter Server: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Navigate to Windows Services from the Start menu. Right-click Informatica and select Properties. On the General tab of the Informatica Properties dialog box, select Automatic as the startup type. Click OK.

Once the PowerCenter Server starts, it connects to the Repository Server. If the Repository Server is installed on the same machine, the PowerCenter Server might start before the Repository Server and consequently fail to connect to the Repository Server. If the repository is stored in a database on a local database server and the database server also runs as a service, the PowerCenter Server might start before the database server and consequently fail to connect to the database server.

Workflow Manager
You can stop the PowerCenter Server from the Workflow Manager in the complete, stop, or abort mode. In the complete mode, the PowerCenter Server allows currently running workflows to complete before shutting down the PowerCenter Server. In the stop mode, the PowerCenter Server stops the running workflows. In the abort mode, the PowerCenter Server aborts the running workflows. You must have one of the following privileges to shutdown the PowerCenter Server:

Administer Server Super User

To shut down the PowerCenter Server from the Workflow Manager: 1. 2.

Launch the Workflow Manager and connect to the repository. In the Navigator window, right-click on the PowerCenter Server and choose Shutdown Server-Complete, Shutdown Server-Stop, or Shutdown Server-Abort from the menu. The Workflow Manager executes the command. In the Output window, you should see the following text:
{server_name} Shutdown Server: Request acknowledged {server_name} Shutdown Server: Completed

150

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

pmcmd Program
The shutdownserver command stops the PowerCenter Server. You must have one of the following privileges to use this command:

Administer Server Super User

You can shut down the PowerCenter Server in the complete, stop, or abort mode. In the complete mode, the PowerCenter Server allows currently running workflows to complete before shutting down the PowerCenter Server. In the stop mode, the PowerCenter Server stops the running workflows. In the abort mode, the PowerCenter Server aborts the running workflows. Use the following syntax to stop the PowerCenter Server:
pmcmd shutdownserver <-serveraddr|-s>[host:]portno <<-user|-u> username|<-uservar|-uv> userEnvVar> <<-password|-p> password|<passwordvar|-pv> passwordEnvVar> <-complete|-stop|-abort>

For more details on using pmcmd, see Using pmcmd in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Step 4. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server

151

Troubleshooting
This section contains information on troubleshooting the PowerCenter Server on Windows. I installed and registered the PowerCenter Server, but I get an internal error when I try to start the service. Verify that the Repository Server is running. You must start the Repository Server before you can start the PowerCenter Server. I started the PowerCenter Server, but it does not connect to the repository. Verify that the PowerCenter Server and the system on which you installed the PowerCenter Server are configured to connect to the Repository Server. Also verify that the Repository Server is running. The PowerCenter Server does not start after rebooting the machine. In the Services configuration, make sure the Startup Type is set to automatic. The Services dialog box shows that the PowerCenter Server started, but it does not seem to be running. After you start the PowerCenter Server, the Services dialog box displays the status as Started. This does not necessarily indicate the PowerCenter Server is running. If the PowerCenter Server stops because of an error, the status does not change automatically in this dialog box. To determine if the PowerCenter Server started, complete one of the following tasks:

Check the event log in the Event Viewer Application Log. Look for the process PmServer in the Task Manager.

I installed the PowerCenter Server on a Windows 2000 system, but I cannot start the PowerCenter Server. If you cannot start the PowerCenter Server, or you receive the message Error 1069 (The service did not start due to a logon failure), use the Windows 2000 Event Viewer to check the Application log. If possible, correct any errors described in the application log. Also, verify the service start information. The Service Start Account needs the Windows 2000 user right Log on as a service on the Windows 2000 system. Follow these steps to verify that the account has the correct rights to start the PowerCenter Server: 1. 2. In the Windows 2000 Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon. Double-click the Local Security Policy icon.

152

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

3.

In the Local Security Settings dialog box, expand Local Policies and select User Rights Assignment.

4.

Find the policy Log on as a service. Double-click the policy to open the Local Security Policy Setting dialog box. The dialog box lists the users assigned the right to Log on as a service.

5.

If you need to add a user account, click Add.

Troubleshooting

153

6.

Click OK when finished and close the Local Security Settings dialog box.

Use the following steps to verify that the account with the right to log on as a service also starts the Informatica service: 1. 2. 3. In the Windows 2000 Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon. Double-click the Services icon. In the Services dialog box, double-click Informatica. The Informatica Properties dialog box appears. 4. Open the Log On tab.

5.

Select This account, and enter the account name and password assigned to the Informatica service. You can also click Browse to search for an account name. If the correct account user is displayed, you can reenter the account user to have Windows 2000 verify the rights assigned to this user.

6. 7.

Click OK. Close the Informatica Properties dialog box and start the Informatica service again.

In addition, verify the connectivity settings you specify in the PowerCenter Server Setup and the Server dialog box in the Workflow Manager are correct: 1. Make sure you entered the correct information on the Repository tab of the PowerCenter Server Setup program. The PowerCenter Server needs the repository name, Repository Server host name and port number, and repository user name and password to start. Make sure you registered the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager.

2.

154

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

3.

Make sure the settings specified in the PowerCenter Server Setup program match those specified for the PowerCenter Server registered in the Workflow Manager.

Try to start the PowerCenter Server again. If the PowerCenter Server does not start, call Informatica Technical Support.

Troubleshooting

155

156

Chapter 9: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on Windows

Chapter 10

Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

This chapter includes the following topics:

Before You Begin, 158 Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server, 160 Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX, 162 Step 3. Update the License File, 169 Step 4. Connect to Databases, 170 Step 5. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server on UNIX, 171 Installing ODBC on UNIX, 173 Using pmlic, 174

157

Before You Begin

Complete the following steps to install and configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Install the PowerCenter Server on UNIX. Configure the PowerCenter Server. Update the PowerCenter Server license file to include all license keys you have. Configure the PowerCenter Server machine to connect to each source and target database. Register the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager. Start the PowerCenter Server.

Before you begin, locate the PowerCenter product license key. Use the same product license key to install the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server. For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
Note: Informatica compiles the PowerCenter Server on HP-UX with the -N flag to allow you

to run sessions with index and data cache sizes larger than 1 GB. Perform the following tasks to configure the HP-UX system:

Verify that the system has enough virtual memory. You can increase the amount of virtual memory on HP-UX by adding swap space. Configure the maxdsize kernel parameter to 2 GB.

Important: Read the printed release notes for any last minute change to the PowerCenter Server

installation, licensing, and connectivity issues.

Code Pages
For accurate data movement and transformation, you must make sure the code pages you select in each component of PowerCenter are compatible with each other. For more information, see Globalization Overview on page 25.

DHCP (TCP/IP Connections Only)

When configuring the PowerCenter Server, avoid using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) for the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. DHCP dynamically assigns a new IP address each time you start a machine on the network. If you use DHCP on the PowerCenter Server, each time you start the PowerCenter Server, you must reregister the PowerCenter Server with the Workflow Manager so the client can communicate with the PowerCenter Server at its new address. After you start the PowerCenter Server, edit the existing PowerCenter Server connection information in the Workflow Manager. You may need to resolve the PowerCenter Server IP address in the Server Editor dialog box in the Workflow Manager.
158 Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

PowerCenter Server Variable Directories

The installation program creates the following directories under the installation directory to store session files and caches associated with each PowerCenter Server:

BadFiles Cache ExtProc LkpFiles SessLogs SrcFiles Temp TgtFiles WorkflowLogs

All workflows configured to run on the registered PowerCenter Server use these directories by default. For details, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177.

Before You Begin

159

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server

Install the PowerCenter Server after you install the client tools and the Repository Server and create a repository. You can install multiple PowerCenter Servers on the same UNIX system. However, you need to install each PowerCenter Server in a separate directory and use different ports. Before you install the PowerCenter Server, you might want to create a user in the UNIX system to run the PowerCenter Server.
To install the PowerCenter Server on UNIX: 1.

Insert one of the following CDs into your UNIX machine:

Informatica PowerCenter for 32-bit UNIX Informatica PowerCenter for 64-bit UNIX

2. 3.

Log on to the UNIX machine. Set the library path to the absolute directory path where you install the PowerCenter Server for the operating systems listed in Table 10-1:
Table 10-1. Library Path for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Operating System AIX HP-UX Solaris Linux Library Path LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH

4.

On the PowerCenter installation CD, locate the directory specific to the product. For example, if you are installing the PowerCenter Server on a Solaris system, switch to the unixserv/pc/solaris directory.

5. 6.

Run install by typing ./install. Enter the PowerCenter product license key.
Note: The installation process uses the PowerCenter product license key you specify to

create a default license file, pm.lic, and stores it in the PowerCenter Server installation directory. You must update this license file after you install the PowerCenter Server to add the option and connectivity licenses you have.
7. 8.

Select PowerCenter Server from the list of components available to install. Enter the absolute target directory path where you want to install the PowerCenter Server. The installation program now extracts and installs the files.

160

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

The upgrade preserves your configuration settings.

9. 10. 11.

Type Y to view the readme file now, or type N to read it later. When the installation completes, type Y to configure the PowerCenter Server, or type N to configure it later. Exit from the Informatica PowerCenter Installation.

You must configure the PowerCenter Server before you can start it. For details, see Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX on page 162. You must also update the PowerCenter Server license file to include all license keys you have. For details, see Step 3. Update the License File on page 169.

Step 1. Install the PowerCenter Server

161

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

After you install the PowerCenter Server on UNIX, you need to configure it with the pmconfig utility. This utility writes your configuration parameters to the file pmserver.cfg. You configure the connectivity information for the repository in pmconfig. By default, this file is stored in the same directory where the PowerCenter Server is installed. If you rename pmserver.cfg or move it to another directory, you must include the name and path when you open the configuration file in pmconfig. You need to include an entry for all required parameters before you can start the PowerCenter Server. PowerCenter Server configuration parameters are case-sensitive. You can make changes to the PowerCenter Server configuration parameters. These changes take effect when you stop and restart the PowerCenter Server. Before you can start the PowerCenter Server, you need to register the PowerCenter Server in the repository. For more information, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177.
Note: ODBC databases, such as Microsoft Access and Excel, are not compatible with the

PowerCenter Server installed on a UNIX system.

To configure the PowerCenter Server on Unix: 1.

Run the pmconfig utility and open pmserver.cfg.

Note: On Solaris, run ./pmconfig to avoid running the Solaris system command by the

same name. The PM_HOME environment variable must point to the PowerCenter Server installation directory. If you specify an incorrect directory path for the PM_HOME environment variable, the PowerCenter Server cannot start.
2.

Enter the settings needed to configure the PowerCenter Server. Table 10-2 describes the settings required to configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX:
Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option ServerName RepositoryName PMUser PMPassword RepServerHostName RepServerPortNumber Required/ Optional Required Required Required Required Required Required Description The name of the PowerCenter Server registered with the repository. The repository name entered when creating or upgrading a repository. The repository user name specific to the PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server tools to connect to the repository. The password corresponding to the repository user (PMUser). Must be in 7-bit ASCII only. The host name of the machine hosting the Repository Server. The port number the Repository Server uses to communicate with repository client applications.

162

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option RepServerTimeout Required/ Optional Required Description The maximum number of seconds that the PowerCenter Server tries to establish a connection to the Repository Server. If the PowerCenter Server is unable to connect to the Repository Server in the time specified, the PowerCenter Server shuts down. Default is 60 seconds. The filename of the PowerCenter Server log file. Default is pmserver.log. Choose between ASCII and Unicode. The default data movement mode is ASCII, which passes 7-bit ASCII character data. To pass 8-bit ASCII and multibyte character data from sources to targets, use Unicode mode. If you configure this option to Yes, the PowerCenter Server enforces data code page compatibility. If you configure this option to No, the PowerCenter Server lifts restrictions for source and target data code page selection, stored procedure and lookup database code page selection, and session sort order selection. The PowerCenter Server performs data code page validation in Unicode data movement mode only. Default is Yes. If you configure this option to Yes, the PowerCenter Server writes to the session log using the UTF-8 character set. If you set this option to No, the PowerCenter Server writes to the session log using the PowerCenter Server code page. The PowerCenter Server writes the session log in UTF-8 when it runs in Unicode data movement mode only. Default is No. The maximum number of sessions stored in shared memory. This sets the maximum number of sessions that the PowerCenter Server can run in parallel. Default is 10. The amount of shared memory available for use by the PowerCenter Server Load Manager process. For every 10 sessions in MaxSessions, you need at least 2,000,000 bytes reserved in LMSharedMem. Default is 2,000,000 bytes. Set this option to Yes if you want to append a time stamp to messages written to the workflow log. Default is No. Set to Yes to have the PowerCenter Server fail the session if the number of sessions already running is equal to the value configured for MaxSessions. If you set this option to No, the PowerCenter Server places the session in a ready queue until a session slot becomes available. Default is No. If you want the PowerCenter Server to write session log messages to an external library, enter the name of the library file.

LogFileName DataMovementMode

Optional Required

ValidateDataCodePages

Required

SessionLogInUTF8

Required

MaxSessions

Required

LMSharedMem

Required

TimeStampWorkflowLog Messages FailSessionIfMaxSessio nsReached

Optional Optional

ExportSessionLogLibNa me

Optional

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

163

Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option ErrorSeverityLevel Required/ Optional Optional Description The level of error messages written to the PowerCenter Server log. Specify one of the following message levels: - Error. Writes ERROR code messages to the log. - Warning. Writes WARNING and ERROR code messages to the log. - Information. Writes INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Tracing. Writes TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. - Debug. Writes DEBUG, TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log. Set to Yes if you want the PowerCenter Server to handle dates as in PowerCenter 1.0/PowerMart 4.0. Set to No if you want the PowerCenter Server to handle dates as defined in the current version of PowerCenter. Date handling significantly improved in PowerCenter 1.5 and PowerMart 4.5. If you need to revert to PowerCenter 1.0 or PowerMart 4.0 behavior, you can configure the PowerCenter Server to handle dates as in PowerCenter 1.0 and PowerMart 4.0. Default is No. Set to 1 to have the PowerCenter Server handle Aggregator transformations as it did in PowerMart 3.5. This overrides both Aggregate treat nulls as zero and Aggregate treat rows as insert. If set to 1, the PowerCenter Server treats nulls as zeros in aggregate calculations and performs aggregate calculations before flagging records for insert, update, delete, or reject in Update Strategy expressions. Set to 0 to have the PowerCenter Server treat nulls as nulls and performs aggregate calculations based on the Update Strategy transformation. Default is 0. Set to 1 to have the PowerCenter Server treat nulls as zero in Aggregator transformations. Set to 0 to have the PowerCenter Server treat nulls as nulls in aggregate calculations. Default is 0. Set to 1 to have the PowerCenter Server perform aggregate calculations before flagging records for insert, update, delete, or reject in Update Strategy expressions. Set to 0 to have the PowerCenter Server perform aggregate calculations based on the Update Strategy transformation. See Update Strategy Transformation in the Transformation Guide. Default is 0. If specified, the PowerCenter Server validates the date display format and uses it in session log and server log entries. If the date display format is invalid, the PowerCenter Server uses the default date display format. Default date display format is DY MON DD HH 24:MI:SS YYYY.

DateHandling40Compati bility

Optional

PMServer3XCompatibili ty

Optional

AggregateTreatNullAsZ ero

Optional

AggregateTreatRowAsI nsert

Optional

DateDisplayFormat

Required

164

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option JoinerSourceOrder6xCo mpatibility Required/ Optional Optional Description If set to Yes, the PowerCenter Server processes master and detail pipelines sequentially as it did in versions prior to 7.0. The PowerCenter Server processes all data from the master pipeline before starting to process the detail pipeline. Also, if you enable this option, you cannot specify the Transaction level transformation scope for Joiner transformations. If set to No, the PowerCenter Server processes the master and detail pipelines concurrently. Determines how the PowerCenter Server evaluates null values in comparison operations. Specify one of the following options: - Null. The PowerCenter Server evaluates null values as null in comparison expressions. If either operand is null, the result is null. This is the default behavior. - High. The PowerCenter Server evaluates null values as greater than non-null values in comparison expressions. If both operands are null, the PowerCenter Server evaluates them as equal. When you choose High, comparison expressions never result in null. - Low. The PowerCenter Server evaluates null values as less than nonnull values in comparison expressions. If both operands are null, the PowerCenter Server treats them as equal. When you choose Low, comparison expressions never result in null. In target-based commit mode, the amount of time in seconds the writer remains idle before it issues a commit when the following conditions are true: - The PowerCenter Server has written data to the target. - The PowerCenter Server has not issued a committed. The PowerCenter Server may commit to the target before or after the configured commit interval. Default is 60 seconds. If you configure the timeout to be 0 or a negative number, the PowerCenter Server defaults to 60 seconds. If set to Yes, you can run the Debugger. Default is Yes. If set to Yes, the PowerCenter Server creates indicator files when you run a workflow with a flat file target. Default is No. If set to Yes, the PowerCenter Server writes duplicate row warnings and duplicate rows for XML targets to the session log. Default is Yes. If you specify this option, the PowerCenter Server writes column headers to flat file targets. It writes the target definition port names to the flat file target in the first line, starting with the # symbol. By default, this option is disabled.

TreatNullInComparison OperatorAs

Required

WriterWaitTimeOut

Optional

LoadManagerAllowDeb ugging CreateIndicatorFiles

Optional Optional

XMLWarnDupRows

Optional

OutputMetaDataForFF

Optional

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

165

Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option MaxLookupSPDBConne ctions Required/ Optional Optional Description Allows you to specify a maximum number of connections to a lookup or stored procedure database when you start a session. If the number of connections needed exceeds this value, session threads must share connections. This can result in a performance loss. If you do not specify a value, the PowerCenter Server allows an unlimited number of connections to the lookup or stored procedure database. If the PowerCenter Server allows an unlimited number of connections, but the database user does not have permission for the number of connections required by the session, the session fails. Default is 0. Allows you to specify a maximum number of connections to a Sybase database when you start a session. If the number of connections required by the session is greater than this value, the session fails. Default is 100. Allows you to specify a maximum number of connections to a Microsoft SQL Server database when you start a session. If the number of connections required by the session is greater than this value, the session fails. Default is 100. Set this option to Yes if your Sybase IQ server is local to the PowerCenter Server. When you enable this option, the PowerCenter Server loads target data to Sybase IQ directly from the named pipe, rather than writing data to a flat file and loading the file contents to the Sybase IQ server. Enabling this option can increase session performance, since no disk activity is required. Default is No. Allows you to specify the number of times the PowerCenter Server retries a target write on a database deadlock. Default is 10. Allows you to specify the number of seconds before the PowerCenter Server retries a target write on database deadlock. If set to 0 seconds, the PowerCenter Server retries the target write immediately. Default is 0 seconds. The name of the file that contains the license keys. The license file contains product, option, and connectivity license keys. You can specify a file name and file path relative to the Repository Server machine. Or, you can specify a file name that exists in the Repository Server installation directory. Note: You must verify the license file you specify here contains the product license key and all option and connectivity license keys you have before you start the PowerCenter Server. For more information about updating the license file, see Step 3. Update the License File on page 169. For more information about licenses and license files, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.

MaxSybaseConnections

Optional

MaxMSSQLConnections

Optional

SybaseIQLocalToPmSer ver

Optional

NumOfDeadlockRetries

Optional

DeadlockSleep

Optional

LicenseFile

Required

166

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option JVMDllPath Required/ Optional Optional Description The absolute path to the JVM library file. Informatica recommends that you enter the absolute path to the JVM library file in the Java /hotspot directory on HP-UX, Solaris, and Linux for best performance. When you change the JVM library file location, you must set the absolute path to the new location. Use a library file name appropriate to the operating system: - AIX. libjvm.a - HP-UX. libjvm.sl - Solaris. libjvm.so - Linux. libjvm.so You can set the CLASSPATH to any JAR files you need to run a session using a web service source, target, or transformation. The PowerCenter Server appends the values you set to the system CLASSPATH. Set this value to increase the minimum amount of memory for JVM to use during a PowerCenter session. The default value is 32 MB. If the session fails due to a lack of memory, you may want to increase this value. Set this value to increase the maximum amount of memory for JVM to use during a PowerCenter session. The default value is 64 MB. If the session fails due to a lack of memory, you may want to increase this value. Enter the value for TrustStore using the following syntax:
<path>/<filename>

JVMClassPath

Optional

JVMMinMemory

Optional

JVMMaxMemory

Optional

TrustStore

Optional

For example:
./Certs/trust.keystore

ClientStore

Optional

Enter the value for ClientStore using the following syntax:

<path>/<filename>

For example:
./Certs/client.keystore

JvmOptionName[n]

Optional

You can enter names and values for up to 10 custom VM options. Use the following syntax:
JvmOption[n]=-D<VMOption_prefix>=<VMOption_value>

n can range from 1 to 10 and must be unique for each option. For example:
JvmOption1=-Djava.protocol.handler.pkgs= com.sun.net.ssl.www.protocol

JCEProvider

Optional

Enter the JCEProvider class name to support NTLM authentication. For example: com.unix.crypto.provider.UnixJCE. Name of the HTTP proxy server. Port number of the HTTP proxy server. This must be a number. Authenticated username for the HTTP proxy server. This is required if the proxy server requires authentication.

HttpProxyServer HttpProxyPort HttpProxyUser

Required Required Optional

Step 2. Configure the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

167

Table 10-2. Configuration Parameters for PowerCenter Server on UNIX Option HttpProxyPassword HttpProxyDomain Required/ Optional Optional Optional Description Password for the authenticated user. This is required if the proxy server requires authentication. Domain for authentication.

168

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Step 3. Update the License File

When you install the PowerCenter Server, you enter a product license key. The installation process includes the product license key in a license file called pm.lic and stores it in the PowerCenter Server installation directory. Before you can start the PowerCenter Server, you must verify the PowerCenter Server license file you specify in the PowerCenter Server configuration contains a valid product license key and all option and connectivity license keys you have. If you specify pm.lic as the license file, you must add all option and connectivity license keys you have. If you specify a different file name as the license file, you must add the product license key to the license file, and then add all option and connectivity license keys you have. You must use the command line program, pmlic, to add license keys to a license file for the PowerCenter Server on UNIX. For details on pmlic, see Using pmlic on page 174.
Note: You can add option and license keys to the PowerCenter Server license file at any time.
To add license keys to a license file using pmlic: 1. 2.

Navigate to the PowerCenter Server installation directory. Update the license file with a license key. Use the following syntax:
pmlic update -key keystring_to_add -licensefile license_file_name

For example, you specified pm.lic as the license file name in the PowerCenter Server configuration, and you have the license key AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA. Enter the following command:
pmlic update -key AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA -licensefile pm.lic

If the file name you specify exists in the PowerCenter Server installation directory, pmlic updates the file. If the file name you specify does not exist, pmlic creates a new file.
Note: If you omit the -licensefile argument, pmlic uses the file name pm.lic.
3.

Repeat step 2 for every license key you need to add.

Step 3. Update the License File

169

Step 4. Connect to Databases

To communicate with databases, the PowerCenter Server uses either native database connectivity software or ODBC. Informatica recommends using native database drivers to connect to the source and target databases. You must install and configure native database client connectivity software on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. To ensure compatibility between the PowerCenter Server and your source and target databases, use the appropriate client libraries. Use 32-bit PowerCenter Servers with 32-bit database client libraries and 64-bit PowerCenter Servers with 64-bit database client libraries. The PowerCenter Server on UNIX can connect to the following databases:

IBM DB2 Informix Oracle Sybase Teradata

For more information about connecting to a specific database, see Connecting to Databases from UNIX on page 305.
Note: The PowerCenter Server on Linux cannot connect to Informix or Teradata.

170

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Step 5. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

The procedure for starting and stopping the PowerCenter Server is the same for all UNIX platforms. You start the PowerCenter Server from the UNIX command line and stop it from the Workflow Manager. You can also use the pmcmd program to stop the PowerCenter Server. To start the PowerCenter Server, you must first register it in the Workflow Manager. For more information, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177. When you send a request to stop the PowerCenter Server, the PowerCenter Server first removes all scheduled workflows from the schedule. It then attempts to stop all running workflows. If any workflow fails to respond, the PowerCenter Server aborts it. Allow one to two minutes for the PowerCenter Server to complete all processes. When you restart the PowerCenter Server, you must reschedule those workflows whose start time has passed, unless you had scheduled them to run continuously. To start the PowerCenter Server, the PowerCenter Server license file must contain a valid product license key. Also, if you have option and connectivity license keys, verify you add them to the PowerCenter Server license file. For more information about updating the license file, see Step 3. Update the License File on page 169.
Note: When the PowerCenter Server on UNIX creates any file other than a recovery file, it sets

the file permissions according to the umask of the shell that starts the PowerCenter Server. For example, when the umask of the shell that starts the PowerCenter Server is 022, the PowerCenter Server creates files with rw-r--r-- permissions. To change the file permissions, you must change the umask of the shell that starts the PowerCenter Server and then restart it. The PowerCenter Server creates recovery files with rw------- permissions.

UNIX Command Line

Use the following steps to start the PowerCenter Server from the UNIX command prompt.
To start the PowerCenter Server: 1. 2.

Verify that the repository database and Repository Server are running. Connect to the UNIX machine on which the PowerCenter Server is running. Log on as a user who has rights to start the PowerCenter Server.

3.

Type the following command:

pmserver [pmserver.cfg]

The PowerCenter Server displays a message indicating that it has started.

4.

To verify that the PowerCenter Server started, check the PowerCenter Server event log file. The following event displays if the PowerCenter Server successfully starts:
SF_34003 Server initialization completed.

Step 5. Start and Stop the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

171

Workflow Manager
You can stop the PowerCenter Server from the Workflow Manager in the complete, stop, or abort mode. In the complete mode, the PowerCenter Server allows currently running workflows to complete before shutting down the PowerCenter Server. In the stop mode, the PowerCenter Server stops the running workflows. In the abort mode, the PowerCenter Server aborts the running workflows. You must have the following privileges to shutdown the PowerCenter Server:

Super User Administer Server

To stop the PowerCenter Server from the Workflow Manager: 1. 2.

Launch the Workflow Manager and connect to the repository. In the Navigator window, right-click the PowerCenter Server and choose Shutdown Server-Complete, Shutdown Server-Stop, or Shutdown Server-Abort. The Workflow Manager executes the command. In the Output window, the following text displays:
{server_name} Shutdown Server: Request acknowledged {server_name} Shutdown Server: Completed

pmcmd Program
The shutdownserver command stops the PowerCenter Server. You must have one of the following privileges to use this command:

Administer Server Super User

You can shut down the PowerCenter Server in the complete, stop, or abort mode. In the complete mode, the PowerCenter Server allows currently running workflows to complete before shutting down the PowerCenter Server. In the stop mode, the PowerCenter Server stops the running workflows. In the abort mode, the PowerCenter Server aborts the running workflows. Use the following syntax to stop the PowerCenter Server:
pmcmd shutdownserver <-serveraddr|-s>[host:]portno <<-user|-u> username|<-uservar|-uv> userEnvVar> <<-password|-p> password|<passwordvar|-pv> passwordEnvVar> <-complete|-stop|-abort>

For more details on using pmcmd, see Using pmcmd in the Workflow Administration Guide.

172

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Installing ODBC on UNIX

PowerCenter ships DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC drivers for IBM DB2, Informix, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and Sybase databases. On AIX, HP-UX, and Solaris use Teradata ODBC drivers to connect to Teradata databases. You cannot connect to Teradata or Informix from Linux.
Note: Informatica recommends using native drivers when possible. See your database vendor

for your native database driver.

To install ODBC drivers for UNIX: 1.

Locate ODBC for UNIX files in the following directories:

/cdrom/odbc/aix /cdrom/odbc/hpux /cdrom/odbc/linux /cdrom/odbc/solaris

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Connect as a user who can start the PowerCenter Server process. Run the installation script to extract the necessary drivers and directories by typing ./install. Choose the language in which you want to run the installation program, and press Enter. Choose UNIX ODBC from the list of products to install, and press Enter. Specify the directory where you want to install the ODBC drivers, and press Enter. This directory is typically /opt/odbc. The installation program installs the drivers.

7.

When the installation completes, exit the installation program.

You are now ready to configure the ODBC drivers. To configure ODBC to connect to a database, see Connecting to an ODBC Data Source on page 321. For specific instructions on connecting to a Teradata database, see Connecting to a Teradata Database on page 318.

Installing ODBC on UNIX

173

Using pmlic
Informatica provides the pmlic command line program to manage all license file types. You can create, update, or view the file contents. You can create or update license files using a license key or another license file. Run pmlic from the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server installation directory. For example, when the PowerCenter Server runs on a Windows machine, run pmlic from the PowerCenter Server installation directory. pmlic uses the following commands:

Update. Updates or creates a license file with the license keys you specify. Display. Displays the license keys in a license file, including their properties, such as type and expiration date.

Updating and Creating License Files (Update)

Use the Update command to update or create a license file. Update uses the following syntax:
update -key keystring_to_add -file existing_file_name -licensefile license_file_name

Table 10-3 lists pmlic update options and arguments:

Table 10-3. Update Options and Arguments (pmlic) Option -key -file Required /Optional Required/ Optional Required/ Optional Argument Name keystring_to_add existing_file_name Description The license key string you want to include in the license file. Specify either the -key or -file option, but not both. The existing license file that contains the license keys you want to include in the license file. Specify either the -key or -file option, but not both. The contents of the existing file name must be in the following format:
@PRODUCTKEY=AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA @OPTIONSKEY=AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA @CONNECTIVITYKEY=AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA

Where AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA is the license key string. -licensefile Optional license_file_name The name of the license file you want to update or create. If the file name you specify does not exist in the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server installation directory, pmlic creates a new file. If the file name you specify exists in the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server installation directory, pmlic updates the file. If you omit this option, pmlic uses the file name pm.lic.

174

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

For example, you have a repository license file called production_repo.lic. You have a license key string of AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA that you want to update in your license file. Open a command line, and navigate to the Repository Server installation directory. Enter the following command:
pmlic update -key AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA-AAAA -licensefile production_repo.lic

Displaying License File Contents (Display)

The display command allows you to display the license keys in a license file. Display uses the following syntax:
display -licensefile license_file_name

Table 10-4 lists the pmlic display option and argument:

Table 10-4. Display Options and Arguments (pmlic) Option -licensefile Required/ Optional Optional Argument Name license_file_name Description The name of the license file that contains the license keys you want to display. If you omit this option, pmlic uses the file name pm.lic. The license file must exist in the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server installation directory.

Using pmlic

175

176

Chapter 10: Installing and Configuring the PowerCenter Server on UNIX

Chapter 11

Registering the PowerCenter Server

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 178 Registering the PowerCenter Server, 179

177

Overview
After you install and configure the PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server, you can register the PowerCenter Server with the repository that you indicated in the PowerCenter Server Configuration. You must register the PowerCenter Server before you can start it. Register PowerCenter Servers in the Workflow Manager. The Workflow Manager is the PowerCenter Client tool that you use to create and run workflows that extract, transform, and load data. You can perform the following registration tasks for a PowerCenter Server:

Register a PowerCenter Server. When you register a PowerCenter Server, you specify information, such as the code page and directories for workflow and session output. This information is stored in the repository. Register multiple PowerCenter Servers. When you register multiple PowerCenter Servers, choose the PowerCenter Server for a workflow in the workflow properties. Edit a PowerCenter Server. When you edit a PowerCenter Server, all workflows using that PowerCenter Server use the updated server connection information, including the updated code page settings. You do not need to restart the Workflow Manager to use the updated information. Delete a PowerCenter Server. When you delete a PowerCenter Server, assign another PowerCenter Server for the workflows using the deleted server. To assign a PowerCenter Server to a workflow, choose Connections-Assign Server in the Workflow Manager. Administer Server Super User

To register a PowerCenter Server, you must have one of the following privileges:

178

Chapter 11: Registering the PowerCenter Server

Registering the PowerCenter Server

Before you use the Workflow Manager to communicate with the PowerCenter Server, you need to register it in the repository. You need the following information to register the PowerCenter Server:

A unique PowerCenter Server name. TCP/IP address used to access the PowerCenter Server. Use the IP address and host name of the machine on which the PowerCenter Server runs, and the port number the PowerCenter Server uses on that machine.

Code page identifying the character set associated with the PowerCenter Server. Directories and parameters you want the PowerCenter Server to use for workflow files and caches.

PowerCenter Server Code Page

When you register a PowerCenter Server, you must select a code page. This code page must be identical to the code page of the operating system on which the PowerCenter Server resides and it must be compatible with the repository code page. When you create or upgrade a repository, you must select a code page for the repository. When you register a PowerCenter Server, the Workflow Manager displays valid code pages based on the repository code page. The Workflow Manager allows you to change the PowerCenter Server code page to a compatible code page. This ensures workflows associated with the PowerCenter Server remain valid. For example, the PowerCenter Server operating system code page is Shift-JIS. The repository code page is JapanEUC. These code pages are compatible. Because the PowerCenter Server code page is Shift-JIS, you enter Shift-JIS when you register the PowerCenter Server in the Workflow Manager. After creating sessions, you change the PowerCenter Server code page to JapanEUC, and then update the PowerCenter Server information in the Workflow Manager. Because these code pages are compatible, all sessions remain valid.

Server Variables
You can define server variables for each PowerCenter Server you register. Server variables define the path and directories for session and workflow output files and caches. You can also use server variables to define workflow properties, such as the number of workflow logs to archive. The installation process creates default directories in the location where you install the PowerCenter Server. By default, the PowerCenter Server writes output files in these directories when you run a workflow. To use these directories as the default location for the session and

Registering the PowerCenter Server

179

workflow output files, you must configure the server variable $PMRootDir to define the path to the directories. Sessions and workflows are configured to use server directories by default. You can override the default by entering different directories session or workflow properties. For example, you might have a PowerCenter Server running all workflows in a repository. If you define the server variable for workflow logs directory as c:\pmserver\workflowlog, the PowerCenter Server saves the workflow log for each workflow in c:\pmserver\workflowlog by default. If you change the default server directories, make sure the designated directories exist before running a workflow. If the PowerCenter Server cannot resolve a directory during the workflow, it cannot run the workflow. By using server variables instead of hard-coding directories and parameters, you simplify the process of changing the PowerCenter Server that runs a workflow. If each workflow in a development folder uses server variables, then when you copy the folder to a production repository, the production server can run the workflow as configured. When the production server runs the workflow, it uses the directories configured for its server variables. If, instead, you changed workflow to use hard-coded directories, workflows fail if those directories do not exist on the production server. Table 11-1 lists the server variables you configure when you register a PowerCenter Server:
Table 11-1. Server Variables Server Variable $PMRootDir Required/ Optional Required Description A root directory to be used by any or all other server variables. Informatica recommends you use the PowerCenter Server installation directory as the root directory. Default directory for session logs. Defaults to $PMRootDir/SessLogs. Default directory for reject files. Defaults to $PMRootDir/BadFiles. Default directory for the lookup cache, index and data caches, and index and data files. To avoid performance problems, always use a drive local to the PowerCenter Server for the cache directory. Do not use a mapped or mounted drive for cache files. Defaults to $PMRootDir/Cache. Default directory for target files. Defaults to $PMRootDir/TgtFiles. Default directory for source files. Defaults to $PMRootDir/SrcFiles. Default directory for external procedures. Defaults to $PMRootDir/ ExtProc. Default directory for temporary files. Defaults to $PMRootDir/Temp. Email address to receive post-session email when the session completes successfully. Use to address post-session email.

$PMSessionLogDir $PMBadFileDir $PMCacheDir

Required Required Required

$PMTargetFileDir $PMSourceFileDir $PMExtProcDir $PMTempDir $PMSuccessEmailUser

Required Required Required Required Optional

180

Chapter 11: Registering the PowerCenter Server

Table 11-1. Server Variables Server Variable $PMFailureEmailUser Required/ Optional Optional Description Email address to receive post-session email when the session fails. Use to address post-session email. Default is an empty string. For details, see Sending Emails in the Workflow Administration Guide. Number of session logs the PowerCenter Server archives for the session. Defaults to 0. Use to archive session logs. For details, see Log Files in the Workflow Administration Guide. Number of non-fatal errors the PowerCenter Server allows before failing the session. Non-fatal errors include reader, writer, and DTM errors. If you want to stop the session on errors, enter the number of non-fatal errors you want to allow before stopping the session. The PowerCenter Server maintains an independent error count for each source, target, and transformation. Use to configure the Stop On option in the session properties. Defaults to 0. If you use the default setting, non-fatal errors do not cause the session to stop. Default directory for workflow logs. Defaults to $PMRootDir/ WorkflowLogs. Number of workflow logs the PowerCenter Server archives for the workflow. Use to archive workflow logs. Defaults to 0. Default directory for lookup files. Defaults to $PMRootDir/LkpFiles.

$PMSessionLogCount

Optional

$PMSessionErrorThreshold

Optional

$PMWorkflowLogDir $PMWorkflowLogCount $PMLookupFileDir

Required Optional Optional

Entering a Root Directory

When you register a PowerCenter Server, you must define the $PMRootDir server variable. This is the root directory for other server directories. The syntax for $PMRootDir is different for Windows and UNIX:

Windows. Enter a path beginning with a drive letter, colon, backslash, as follows:
C:\PowerCenterServer

UNIX. Enter an absolute path beginning with a slash, as follows:

/PowerCenterServer

For example, if you define $PMRootDir on Windows to be c:\PowerCenterServer, the variable $PMSessionLogDir becomes c:\InformaticaServer\SessLogs by default. The PowerCenter Server installation directory is the recommended root directory. If you enter a different root directory, make sure all directories specified for server variables exist before running a workflow.

Entering Other Directories

By default, the Workflow Manager uses $PMRootDir as the basis for other server directories. However, you can enter directories unrelated to the root directory. For example, if you want

Registering the PowerCenter Server

181

to place caches and cache files in a different drive local to the PowerCenter Server, you can change the default directory, $PMRootDir/Cache, to:
D:\Cache

Note: If you enter a delimiter inappropriate for the PowerCenter Server platform (for example,

using a backslash for a UNIX server), the Workflow Manager corrects the delimiter.

Changing Servers
If you change PowerCenter Servers, the new PowerCenter Server can run workflows using its server variables. To ensure a workflow successfully completes, relocate any necessary file sources, targets, or incremental aggregation files to the default directories of the new PowerCenter Server. If you do not use server variables in an individual session or workflow, you may need to manually edit the session or workflow properties when you change the PowerCenter Server. If the new PowerCenter Server cannot locate the override directory, it cannot run the session. For example, you might override the workflow log directory in the workflow properties by entering d:\data\workflowlog. You then copy the folder containing the workflow to a production repository. The workflow log directory of the new PowerCenter Server is c:\pmserver\workflowlog. When the new PowerCenter Server tries to run the copied workflow, it cannot find the directory listed in the workflow properties, so it fails to initialize the workflow. To correct the problem, you must either edit the workflow properties or create the specified directory on the new PowerCenter Server.

Steps for Registering a PowerCenter Server

Use the following procedure to register a PowerCenter Server.
To register the PowerCenter Server: 1.

In the Workflow Manager, connect to the repository.

Note: The first time you connect to the repository, use the database user name and

password used to create the repository.

2.

Choose Server-Server Configuration.

182

Chapter 11: Registering the PowerCenter Server

The Server Object Browser dialog box appears.

3.

Click New to register a new server. The Server Editor dialog box appears.

4. 5. 6.

Enter a new Server Name. Configure the TCP/IP connectivity settings. If you do not know the IP address, enter the host name and use the Resolve Server button to resolve your IP address. You can also enter the IP address in the Host Name/IP Address field and use Resolve Server to resolve the host name. The Workflow Manager also resolves the host name and IP address when you click OK.

Registering the PowerCenter Server

183

Table 11-2 describes the settings required to register a PowerCenter Server using TCP/IP:
Table 11-2. TCP/IP Settings to Register a Server TCP/IP Option Server Name Required/ Optional Required Description The name of PowerCenter Server. Use to select the PowerCenter Server to run a workflow. This name must be unique to the repository. Server host name or IP address of the PowerCenter Server machine. The IP address resolved by the Workflow Manager. This is a readonly field. Port number the PowerCenter Server uses. Must be the same port listed in the PowerCenter Server configuration parameters. Number of seconds the Workflow Manager waits for a response from the PowerCenter Server. Character set associated with the PowerCenter Server. Select the code page identical to the PowerCenter Server operating system code page. Must be identical to or compatible with the repository code page.

Host Name or IP address Resolved IP Address Port Number Timeout Code Page

Required n/a (read-only) Required Required Required

7.

For $PMRootDir, enter a valid root directory for the PowerCenter Server platform. Informatica recommends using the PowerCenter Server installation directory as the root directory because the PowerCenter Server installation creates the default server directories in the Server installation directory. If you enter a different root directory, make sure to create the necessary directories.

8.

Enter the server variables. Do not use trailing delimiters. A trailing delimiter might invalidate the directory used by the PowerCenter Server. For example, enter c:\data\sessionlog, not c:\data\sessionlog\. See Table 11-1 on page 180 for a list of server variables.

9.

Click OK. The new PowerCenter Server appears in the Navigator below the repository.

184

Chapter 11: Registering the PowerCenter Server

Chapter 12

Upgrading a Repository
This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 186 Step 1. Prepare the Repository and Domain, 189 Step 2. Create a Copy of the Repository, 191 Step 3. Install PowerCenter 7.1 Components, 192 Step 4. Upgrade the Repository, 193 Troubleshooting, 202

185

Overview
PowerCenter 7.1 includes a new repository version, 162. Because the repository is versioned, you need to upgrade the existing repository to incorporate the new features included in PowerCenter 7.1. When you upgrade a repository, the upgrade process modifies repository tables to accommodate new types of metadata. PowerCenter 7.1 supports upgrading from PowerCenter 5.0/PowerMart 5.0 and above. The PowerCenter 7.1 repository upgrade process introduces new objects to the repository. It also introduces new functionality by modifying existing repository objects. For details, see Upgrading Repository Metadata on page 229. This chapter instructs you how to prepare the repository for upgrade, how to perform the upgrade, and how to identify and correct errors encountered during the upgrade. For information on changes the upgrade process makes to the functionality of existing metadata, see Upgrading Repository Metadata on page 229.

Upgrading from a Previous Version

If you are using a version of PowerCenter that is not supported by the version 7.1 upgrade, you must upgrade your existing version to a supported version before proceeding with the upgrade. Contact Informatica Technical Support to obtain the version of PowerCenter/ PowerMart you need to complete your upgrade. Table 12-1 describes the compatible upgrades for previous versions of PowerCenter/ PowerMart. Use this table to determine your upgrade path.
Table 12-1. PowerCenter/PowerMart Compatible Upgrades Existing Version PowerMart 3.5 PowerCenter 1.0/PowerMart 4.0 PowerCenter 1.5/PowerMart 4.5 PowerCenter 1.6/PowerMart 4.6 PowerCenter 1.7/PowerMart 4.7* PowerCenter 5.0/PowerMart 5.0 PowerCenter 5.1/PowerMart 5.1 PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0 PowerCenter 6.1/PowerMart 6.1 PowerCenter 6.2/PowerMart 6.2 Compatible Upgrades PowerCenter 1.0 PowerCenter 1.5/1.6 PowerCenter 1.6/1.7 PowerCenter 1.7/5.0/5.1 PowerCenter 5.0/5.1/6.0/6.1 PowerCenter 5.1/6.0/6.1/6.2/7.0/7.1 PowerCenter 6.0/6.1/6.2/7.0/7.1 PowerCenter 6.1/6.2/7.0/7.1 PowerCenter 6.2/7.0/7.1 PowerCenter 7.0/7.1 PowerMart 4.0 PowerMart 4.5/4.6 PowerMart 4.6/4.7 PowerMart 4.7/5.0/5.1 PowerMart 5.0/5.1/6.0/6.1 PowerMart 5.1/6.0/6.1/6.2 PowerMart 6.0/6.1/6.2 PowerMart 6.1/6.2 PowerMart 6.2

186

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Table 12-1. PowerCenter/PowerMart Compatible Upgrades Existing Version PowerCenter 7.0 Compatible Upgrades PowerCenter 7.1

* If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 1.7.x/PowerMart 4.7.x and you want to retain your existing incremental aggregation files, you must upgrade to PowerCenter 5.1.x/PowerMart 5.1.x before you upgrade to version 7.1. Contact Informatica Technical Support to perform this intermediate upgrade.

Before You Begin

Before you begin the upgrade, verify that you have the necessary information and resources. You must enter a new product license key when you install the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server. Locate the product license key before you begin the upgrade process. If you do not know the product license key, contact Informatica Technical Support. You do not need a license key when you install the PowerCenter Client. During the upgrade, existing data is copied from the original tables into temporary tables. Because these temporary tables are created in the same database as the repository, the upgrade process requires additional space. The PowerCenter 7.1 repository is approximately:

5 percent larger than a PowerCenter 7.0 repository. 15 percent larger than a PowerCenter 6.x and PowerMart 6.x repository. 40 percent larger than a PowerCenter 5.x and PowerMart 5.x repository.

You may need to increase the size of the database or add more disk space. Informatica recommends that you allocate up to approximately 50 percent more available disk space and temporary storage space in the database, depending on the version you upgrade from.
Note: If you are using a repository enabled for version control in PowerCenter 7.1, the

repository can quickly grow very large depending on the frequency and number of new versions added to the repository. Each version of an object occupies the same amount of space in the repository database. You may want to monitor the size of the repository database periodically to determine the rate of growth. For information on purging versions from the repository to reduce the size of the repository database, see the Repository Guide. You must also verify that the time zone settings for the Repository Server and repository database machines are correctly configured. The systems on which you want to run PowerCenter 7.1 must meet minimum system requirements. Review the minimum system requirements in Minimum System Requirements on page 70.

Upgrade Process
Complete the following steps to upgrade the repository: 1. Prepare the repository. You must perform some tasks to ensure no other users are working on the repository during the upgrade. PowerCenter users using multiple
Overview 187

repositories in a domain must perform additional tasks to ensure no shared metadata is lost during the upgrade. For more information, see Step 1. Prepare the Repository and Domain on page 189. 2. Create a copy of the repository. Informatica recommends that you upgrade a copy of the repository. For more information, see Step 2. Create a Copy of the Repository on page 191. Install PowerCenter 7.1 components. You must install the PowerCenter 7.1 Client tools and Repository Server. For more information, see Step 3. Install PowerCenter 7.1 Components on page 192. Upgrade the repository. Finally, run the upgrade process. For more information, see Step 4. Upgrade the Repository on page 193.

3.

4.

188

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Step 1. Prepare the Repository and Domain

Use the following procedures as a guideline to prepare your existing repository for upgrade. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to perform these tasks.

Preparing the Repository

Use the following steps as a guideline to prepare the existing repository for upgrade: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Have all users close all PowerCenter Client tools connected to the repository. Stop the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server. Release any residual locks. For more information, refer to your existing PowerCenter/ PowerMart documentation. Make a copy of all log files and incremental aggregation files (PMAGG*.dat and PMAGG*.idx). If the existing repository is registered in a domain, you must prepare the domain for the upgrade. For more information, see Preparing the Domain on page 189.

Preparing the Domain

PowerCenter users must perform additional tasks to prepare repositories registered in a domain. This ensures that no shared metadata is lost during the upgrade.

Preparing a PowerCenter 5.x Domain

If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 5.x, verify that all local repositories are registered to the global repository before you proceed to the next step.

Preparing a PowerCenter 6.x Domain

If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 6.x, verify that all local repositories are registered to the global repository before you proceed to the next step.

Preparing a PowerCenter 7.x Domain

If you want to run the PowerCenter 7.1 Repository Server on the same machine and port number as your existing PowerCenter 6.x/7.0 or PowerMart 6.x Repository Server, verify that all local repositories are registered to the global repository before you proceed to the next step. If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 6.x/7.0 or PowerMart 6.x, and you want to run the PowerCenter 7.1 Repository Server on a different machine and port number, or on the same

Step 1. Prepare the Repository and Domain

189

machine but with a different port number, use the following steps as a guideline to prepare the domain: 1. Install the PowerCenter 7.1 Repository Server on the new machine or port number. For more information, see Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows on page 87 or Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX on page 103. Migrate the global repository to the new Repository Server. For more information, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide. Propagate the domain connection information for the global repository. For more information, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide. Migrate the local repository to the new Repository Server. For more information, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide. Propagate the domain connection information for the local repository. For more information, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each local repository in the domain.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

190

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Step 2. Create a Copy of the Repository

Informatica recommends that you upgrade a copy of the existing PowerCenter 5.x/6.x/7.0 repository or PowerMart 5.x/6.x repository. You can create a copy of the repository by restoring a repository backup file to a new database, or by copying the repository to a new database.
Note: If you want to copy or restore a Sybase repository, set allow nulls by default to TRUE at the database level. Setting this option changes the default null type of the column to null in compliance with the SQL standard.

Copying a Repository
You can create a copy of your existing repository for upgrade by copying the repository to a new database. Use the following steps as a guideline when you copy your existing repository to a new database: 1. Create a new database. Allocate more space for the new database. For more information on PowerCenter 7.1 repository database requirements, see Before You Begin on page 187. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to copy the repository to the new database. For details on copying a repository, refer to your existing PowerCenter/ PowerMart documentation. When you copy multiple repositories in a domain, register the local repositories with the global repository. If you are using PowerCenter 6.x/7.0 or PowerMart 6.x, shut down the repository.

2.

3. 4.

Restoring a Repository Backup File

You can create a copy of your existing repository for upgrade by backing up the repository and then restoring the backup file to a new database. Use the following steps as a guideline when you back up and restore the existing repository to a new database: 1. Create a new database. Allocate more space for the new database. For more information on PowerCenter 7.1 repository database requirements, see Before You Begin on page 187. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to back up your existing repository. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to restore the repository backup file to the new database. If you want to restore multiple repositories in a domain, register the local repositories with the global repository. If you are using PowerCenter 6.x/7.0 or PowerMart 6.x, stop the repository.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Step 2. Create a Copy of the Repository

191

Step 3. Install PowerCenter 7.1 Components

After you prepare the repository and create a copy of your existing repository for upgrade, install and configure the PowerCenter 7.1 Client and Repository Server.

Installing the PowerCenter Client

Use the following steps as a guideline when you install the PowerCenter 7.1 Client tools: 1. 2. Install the PowerCenter Client. Install the DataDirect closed ODBC drivers.

For details on installing the PowerCenter Client, see Installing the PowerCenter Client on page 75.

Installing the Repository Server

Use the following steps as a guideline when you install the PowerCenter 7.1 Repository Server: 1. 2. 3. Install the Repository Server. Configure the Repository Server. Start the Repository Server.

Note: If you want to upgrade a domain from PowerCenter 6.x/7.0, you must install the

PowerCenter 7.1 Repository Server on the same machine and configure it to run on the same port number as the last Repository Server that registered the repository or propagated the repository domain connection information. For details on preparing the domain, see Preparing the Domain on page 189. For details on installing and configuring the Repository Server, see Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on Windows on page 87 or Installing and Configuring the Repository Server on UNIX on page 103.

192

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Step 4. Upgrade the Repository

After you install the PowerCenter 7.1 Client tools and Repository Server, you can upgrade the repository you copied or restored from a backup file. The upgrade process proceeds incrementally, one repository version at a time, incorporating new features with each version. The repository upgrade process stops if it encounters problems during the upgrade such as lack of disk space. Once you identify and fix the problem, you can run the upgrade again. When you upgrade the repository, the upgrade process begins again at the last successful version number. For example, if the upgrade fails between version 145 and 146, the upgrade process starts at version 145 when you run upgrade for the second time. To upgrade the repository, you must have one of the following repository privileges:

Administer Repository Super User

Note: To make existing PowerCenter 5.x/6.0 or PowerMart 5.x/6.0 expressions compatible

with updates to the transformation language, the PowerCenter 7.1 upgrade process must fetch, examine, and modify a large number of objects in the repository. If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 5.x or PowerMart 5.x, the upgrade process must also fetch each session and batch and upgrade them to the workflow model. Depending on the size of your repository, this process can take several hours to several days to complete. Use the PowerCenter 7.1 Repository Server Administration Console to upgrade the repository. For more information on using the Administration Console, see Managing the Repository in the Repository Guide.
To upgrade a repository: 1. 2. 3.

In the Repository Manager, choose Repository-Manage Repository Server to launch the Repository Server Administration Console. In the Console Tree, select the Informatica Repository Servers node, and choose ActionNew Server Registration. Enter the Repository Server host name and port number, and click OK. The Administration Console adds the Repository Server to the Console Tree.

4. 5.

Right-click the Repository Server, and choose Connect. In the Connecting to Repository Server dialog box, enter the password you use to administer the Repository Server and the port number used to access the Repository Server. Click OK. The Administration Console connects to the Repository Server and displays the repositories managed by the Repository Server.

6.

Select the Repositories node, and choose Action-New Repository. The New Repository dialog box appears, displaying the General tab.
Step 4. Upgrade the Repository 193

7.

Enter general information about the repository you copied or restored from a backup file. Table 12-2 describes the options available on the General tab:
Table 12-2. New Repository - General Tab Option Repository Name Required/ Optional Required Description The name of the repository. Do not use the following characters when creating a repository name: \ / : * ? < > " | . Add the repository configuration without creating a repository in the database. Do not create any content because a repository already exists under the specified database connection. If you create repository content, the upgrade process fails. The Global Data Repository and Enable Version Control options are unavailable when you do not create content. After you upgrade a repository, you can promote it to a global data repository or enable version control on the Properties tab of the repository configuration.

Creation Mode

Required

194

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

8.

Click the Database Connection tab.

9.

Enter the database connection information. Table 12-3 describes the options available on the Database Connection tab:
Table 12-3. New Repository - Database Connection Tab Option Database Type CodePage Required/ Optional Required Required Description The type of database storing the repository. The repository code page. The Repository Server uses the character set encoded in the repository code page when writing data to the repository. The native connect string the Repository Server uses to access the database containing the repository. Note that for most databases, this is not an ODBC data source name, but a native connect string (for example, servername@dbname for Microsoft SQL Server, or dbname.world for Oracle). For Teradata databases, use the ODBC data source name. For a list of connect string syntax, see Table 3-1 on page 61. The account for the database containing the repository. Set up this account using the appropriate database client tools. The repository database password corresponding to the database user. Must be in 7-bit ASCII.

ConnectString

Required

DBUser DBPassword

Required Required

Step 4. Upgrade the Repository

195

Table 12-3. New Repository - Database Connection Tab Option Trusted Connection Required/ Optional Optional Description If selected, the Repository Server uses Windows authentication to access the Microsoft SQL Server database. The user name that starts the Repository Server must be a valid Windows user with access to the Microsoft SQL Server database. The tablespace name for IBM DB2 repositories. When you specify the tablespace name, the Repository Server creates all repository tables in the same tablespace. You cannot use spaces in the tablespace name. To improve repository performance on IBM DB2 EEE repositories, specify a tablespace name with one node. For more information on using the tablespace names, see Optimizing IBM DB2 EEE Repositories on page 125.

TablespaceName

Optional

10.

Click the Network tab.

11.

Enter the network information.

196

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Table 12-4 describes the options available on the Network tab:

Table 12-4. New Repository - Network Tab Option MessageReceiveTimeout MessageSendTimeout Required/ Optional Required Required Description Number of seconds the Repository Server waits to receive a message from a client application before timing out. Default is 3. Number of seconds the Repository Server waits while sending a message to a client application before timing out. Default is 3.

12.

Click the Configuration tab.

13.

Enter the repository configuration information.

Step 4. Upgrade the Repository

197

Table 12-5 describes the options available on the Configuration tab:

Table 12-5. New Repository - Configuration Tab Option MaximumConnections ErrorSeverityLevel Required/ Optional Required Required Description The maximum number of connections the repository accepts from repository client applications. Default is 200. The level of error messages written to the Repository Agent log file. Specify one of the following message levels: - Error. Writes ERROR code messages to the log file. - Warning. Writes WARNING and ERROR code messages to the log file. - Information. Writes INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log file. - Trace. Writes TRACE, INFO, WARNING, and ERROR code messages to the log file. Informatica recommends using the Trace and Information logging levels for troubleshooting purposes only. The Repository Server validates the date display format and uses it when writing entries to the repository log file. If the date display format is invalid, the Repository Server uses the PowerCenter default date display format. The default date display format is DY MON DD HH 24:MI:SS YYYY. The number of seconds the repository waits to poll for updates to its configuration. Default is 10. The number of seconds the master thread running repository processes waits for process threads to stop before stopping. Default is 60. The maximum number of locks the repository places on metadata objects. Default is 50,000. The path and name of the Repository Agent log file. By default, this option specifies pmrepagent.log. If you specify the same log file name for multiple repositories, the Repository Agent writes messages for each repository to the same file. The number of seconds the Repository Agent waits for an automatic response from a repository client application before closing the connection. If the Repository Agent receives no response from the repository client application in three times the number of specified seconds, the Repository Agent closes the connection. Default is 60. Minimum is 30. If you set this option to 0, the Repository Agent does not time out or close connections. The maximum number of connections to the repository database that the Repository Agent can establish. If the Repository Agent tries to establish more connections than specified for DatabasePoolSize, it times out the connection attempt after the number of seconds specified for DatabaseConnectionTimeout. Default is 500. Minimum is 20.

DateDisplayFormat

Required

DynamicConfig RefreshInterval ThreadWaitTimeout

Required Required

MaximumLocks LogFileName

Required Required

KeepAliveTimeout

Required

DatabasePoolSize

Required

198

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Table 12-5. New Repository - Configuration Tab Option DatabaseConnection Timeout CheckinCommentsRequired SecurityAuditTrail Required/ Optional Required Description The number of seconds the Repository Agent waits to establish a connection to the repository database before timing out. Default is 30 seconds. Requires users to add check in comments. Select to track changes made to users, groups, privileges, and permissions. Logged to pmsecaudit.<repository_name>.log file in the Repository Server installation/bin directory. For more information, see Repository Security in the Repository Guide. The number of rows to fetch each time an array database operation, such as insert or fetch, is issued. Default is 100.

Optional Optional

DatabaseArrayOperationSize

Optional

14.

Click the Licenses tab. When first click the Licenses tab when you create a repository configuration, the Administration Console displays a message informing you that the license file is empty.

15.

Click OK to close the message dialog box.

Displays the license key repository type, either production or development. Displays the repository license file name. The file is located in the Repository Server installation directory. Add a license key to the repository license file.

Displays the license keys and their properties in the license file.

You can use the Licenses tab to update and view the repository license file. The license file name is repository_name-es.lic and is located in the Repository Server installation directory. However, when you use special characters in the repository name, the Administration Console converts them to an underscore and a letter. For more

Step 4. Upgrade the Repository

199

information about how the Administration Console creates repository file names, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
16. 17.

Add the product license key in the License Key field and click Update. PowerCenter adds the product license key to the license file. If you have any option or connectivity license key, enter the key in the License Key field and click Update. Do this for every option and connectivity license key. Consider the following rules and guidelines when you add license keys:

You must add the product license key to the license file before you enter any option or connectivity license key. PowerCenter only adds option and connectivity license keys to a license file when the license file contains a valid product license key. The option and connectivity license keys you add must match the repository type, either development or production, of the other license keys in the license file. You can also add license keys to the license file at any time.

When you enter a valid license key string, the Administration Console informs you it updated the license file successfully. The Administration Console does not add invalid, expired, or duplicate license keys to the license file. For more information on licenses, see Configuring the Repository in the Repository Guide.
18.

Click OK to save the configuration options. The Administration Console creates the repository configuration and adds it to the Repository Server configuration directory. The repository configuration appears in the Console Tree under the Repositories node.

19.

After you add the repository configuration, select the repository in the Console Tree, and choose Action-All Tasks-Upgrade. If you are upgrading a local repository, verify that the global repository is upgraded and running before you upgrade the local repository. If the global repository shuts down unexpectedly during the upgrade of the local repository, the upgrade process fails. You must restart the global repository before you restart the upgrade process for the local repository. The Administration Console warns you that the changes are not reversible. Click OK to continue or Cancel to stop the upgrade.

20.

In the Repository dialog box, enter the repository user name and password. Passwords must be in 7-bit ASCII.

200

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

You must be a Super User or a Repository Administrator with the Administer Repository privilege to perform the upgrade. Make sure you enter a repository user name and password, not a database user name and password.
21.

Click OK. The upgrade process begins. This can take a long time for very large repositories. You can monitor the progression of incremental changes to the repository in the Activity Log. The Activity Log window refreshes periodically during the upgrade process.

22. 23.

When the Administration Console notifies you that the upgrade is finished, click OK. To save the upgrade process messages to a file, click Yes.
Note: You can view and save the upgrade process messages any time before you close the

Administration Console. To save the upgrade messages to a file, select the Activity Log node and choose Action-Save As.
24.

Enter the file name in the Save Activity Log dialog box and click Save. The Administration Console saves the upgrade messages as a text file. Informatica recommends saving upgrade messages in case you need to contact Informatica Technical Support.

25.

If you upgraded a global repository in a domain, select the repository in the Console Tree and choose Action-Start. The global repository must be running while you upgrade the local repository.

26.

If you upgrade a local repository from PowerCenter 5.0/5.1 or PowerMart 5.0/5.1, select the repository in the Console Tree and choose Action-All Tasks-Propagate. The Repository Server updates the global repository with new local repository connectivity information.

27.

In the Repository dialog box, enter your repository user name and password, and click OK. The Repository Server connects to the global repository and updates the connectivity information for the local repository.

28. 29.

If you need to upgrade other repositories, return to step 6 and add a repository configuration for the next repository. After you upgrade all repositories, close the Administration Console.

To see if the upgrade completes without errors, review the text in the Activity Log after you run the upgrade. If you save the upgrade messages to a file, you can also open the file and review them. After you upgrade the repository, install and configure the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server code page must be compatible with the repository code page. For more information, see Registering the PowerCenter Server on page 177.

Step 4. Upgrade the Repository

201

Troubleshooting
This section provides information to help solve problems you might encounter during an upgrade. If you need further assistance, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Upgrade Fails
The repository upgrade process stops if it encounters problems during the upgrade, such as lack of disk space. The most common reasons an upgrade might fail are:

The upgrade process has trouble reading or writing to the repository database. The repository database has insufficient disk space or temporary storage space. The client system has insufficient memory. The repository has inconsistent data.

Once you identify and fix the problem, you can restart the upgrade. When you upgrade the repository the second time, the upgrade process starts at the last successful version number. For example, if the upgrade fails between version 145 and 146, the upgrade process starts at version 145 when you run upgrade the second time. However, you should always maintain a copy of the original repository in case you need to start the upgrade from the beginning.

Error Messages
The repository upgrade process generates messages when it performs the upgrade. Many of these messages are informational, but some are error messages. Use this section to help determine what causes the error message to appear and what measures you can take to correct the problem. The following error messages might appear when you upgrade the repository. The messages appear in the Activity Log in the Administration Console. To save the messages to a text file, select the Activity Log node in the Console Tree and choose Action-Save As.
An error was encountered during the XML upgrade.

Cause: Action:

An error was found while upgrading an XML source or target to version 7.0 or later. Run the upgrade again. If the upgrade still fails, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Database error while connecting to the GDR.

Cause: Action:

A database error occurred when the upgrade process connected to the global repository. Verify that the global repository database is running.

202

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Failed clearing new session tables.

Cause: Action:

A database error occurred. The repository upgrade failed to clear tables in the repository database. Verify the repository database error. Fix the database error and restart the upgrade.

Failed creating temporary tables.

Cause: Action:

A database error occurred. The upgrade process failed to generate temporary tables used during the upgrade. Verify the repository database error. Fix the database error and restart the upgrade.

Failed initializing temporary tables.

Cause: Action:

A database error occurred. The upgrade process failed to initialize the temporary tables used during the upgrade. Verify the repository database error. Fix the database error and restart the upgrade.

Failed to update GDR connectivity information.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process could not update the connectivity information for the global repository. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to register the local repository to the global repository before you perform the upgrade. Upgrade and start the global repository before you upgrade the local repository.

Failed to upgrade <object_name>: name = <object_name>, old ID = <ID_number>.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade an object. Contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed to upgrade batch to workflow: name = <batch_name>, old ID = <ID_number>, folder ID = <folder_ID_number>.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a batch to a workflow. Check for repository database errors. Fix errors and restart the upgrade. If the error persists, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed to upgrade file: name = <name>, old ID = <ID_number>, file type = <file_type>.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a file. Check for repository database errors. Fix errors and restart the upgrade. If the error persists, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed to upgrade session: name = <session_name>, old ID = <ID_number>, folder ID = <folder_ID_number>.

Cause:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a session.

Troubleshooting 203

Action:

Check for repository database errors. Fix errors and restart the upgrade. If the error persists, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed to upgrade session persistence values.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process could not upgrade persisted values for the session. After the upgrade completes, edit the persisted values as necessary.

Failed to upgrade stand-alone session to workflow: name = <session_name>, old ID = <ID_number>, folder ID = <folder_ID_number>.

Cause: Action:

The repository upgrade process failed to upgrade a session to a workflow. Check for repository database errors. Fix errors and restart the upgrade. If the error persists, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed to upgrade <XML definition> because removal of prefixes generated an invalid XPATH.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process removed a prefix from an element or an attribute. The resulting XML map is not unique and could not be upgraded to a valid XPath. Reimport the XML definition.

WARNING: Failed to upgrade XML source <source_name>, version <version_number> , folder <folder_name>.

Cause: Action:

The XML source definition contains inconsistencies. Delete the definition and import it again.

WARNING: Failed to upgrade XML target <target_name>, version <version_ number>, folder <folder_name>.

Cause: Action:

The XML target definition contains inconsistencies. Delete the definition and import it again.

Failed upgrading batch objects.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a batch object. Contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed upgrading database connection objects.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a database connection object. Contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed upgrading file objects.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a file object. Contact Informatica Technical Support.

Failed upgrading session objects.

Cause:

The upgrade process failed to upgrade a session object.

204

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Action:

Contact Informatica Technical Support.

GDR connectivity failed.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to connect to a global repository when upgrading a local repository. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to register the local repository to the global repository before you perform the upgrade. Upgrade and start the global repository before you upgrade the local repository. If the error persists, contact Informatica Technical Support.

GDR connectivity is lost. Please restore the GDR connection before restarting the upgrade.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process lost the connection to the global repository. Verify that the global repository is running. Restart the upgrade.

Repository connectivity information is incorrect.

Cause: Action:

The connectivity information required to connect to and log in to the repository is incorrect. Verify that the repository configuration information and login information is correct. Correct errors and restart the upgrade.

Repository login failed while connecting to the GDR.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process could not access the global repository. The user name and password you use to access the local repository when you start the upgrade must match the user name and password you use to access the global repository. Restart the upgrade process using the correct user name and password.

Session <session_name> with ID = <ID_number> cannot be upgraded. The mapping may have been deleted or is invalid. Mapping ID = <ID_number>.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to fetch a mapping from the repository because the mapping was deleted or is invalid. Verify that the mapping exists in the repository and that it is valid. If the mapping is invalid, validate the mapping in your existing repository, export it, and then import it into the upgraded repository after the upgrade completes.

Unable to connect to the GDR.

Cause:

The upgrade process could not connect to the global repository because the connectivity information for the global repository may be incorrect, or the global repository database may not be available. Use your existing version of PowerCenter/PowerMart to register the local repository to the global repository before you perform the upgrade. Upgrade and start the global repository before you upgrade the local repository. or
Troubleshooting 205

Action:

Action:

Verify that the global repository database is running.

Unable to set the state during the session upgrade.

Cause: Action:

A database error occurred. Verify the repository database error. Fix the database error, and restart the upgrade.

Unknown upgrade state. Fatal error occurred.

Cause: Action:

A fatal error occurred during the upgrade. Contact Informatica Technical Support.

Upgrade failed due to a fatal error in fetching mapping; MappingID = <mapping_ID_number>.

Cause: Action:

The upgrade process failed to fetch a mapping from the repository. Check for repository database errors. Fix errors and restart the upgrade. If the error persists, contact Informatica Technical Support.

WARNING: <XML definition> contained elements or attributes whose prefixes were removed.

Cause:

You are upgrading an XML definition that contains prefixed attributes or elements. The upgrade process removes prefixes from attributes and elements and completes your repository upgrade. Complete the repository upgrade and import the XML definition again.

Action:

The XML metadata is incompatible with the current version of the product.

Cause: Action:

The XML definition has inconsistencies. Delete the definition and import it again.

The XML metadata is invalid.

Cause: Action:

The XML definition has inconsistencies. Delete the definition and import it again.

206

Chapter 12: Upgrading a Repository

Chapter 13

Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 208 Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects, 210 Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository, 218 Step 3. Create a Data Connector, 220 Step 4. Set Up Schedules for Cached Reports, 222 Switching PowerCenter Repositories, 227

207

Overview
PowerCenter Metadata Reporter requires PowerCenter and PowerAnalyzer. You must install and configure PowerCenter and PowerAnalyzer before you can set up the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter. Complete the following steps to set up the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter: 1. Import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects. Log in to PowerAnalyzer and import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter setup uses the following objects:

MX views. Informatica ships the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter with PowerCenter. When you install PowerCenter, the installation program creates the MX views in the PowerCenter repository. XML files. The installation CD includes an XML file for each type of PowerCenter Metadata Reporter object. You import the XML files into PowerAnalyzer to create the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter schema objects and reports.

For instructions on importing the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter XML files, see Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects on page 210. 2. Create a data source for the PowerCenter repository. The metadata contained in PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports comes from a PowerCenter repository. You need to create a data source to connect to the PowerCenter repository. For instructions on setting up the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter data source, see Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository on page 218. Create a data connector for the PowerCenter repository data source. To run the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports, you need a data connector that contains the data source connected to the PowerCenter repository. For instructions on creating a data connector, see Step 3. Create a Data Connector on page 220. Set up schedules for cached reports. To regularly update the reports and indicators, run the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports on specific time-based schedules. For more information on adding a report to a schedule, see Step 4. Set Up Schedules for Cached Reports on page 222.

3.

4.

Informatica recommends that a PowerAnalyzer user with the System Administrator role set up the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter schema and reports.

Product Licenses
To use PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, you may need the following product licenses:

Application server license. The JBoss Application Server and WebSphere Application Server do not require a license. However, if you are using another application server, you may need a license. You should have received the license when you purchased the application server product.

208

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

PowerAnalyzer license. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter uses PowerAnalyzer and requires a PowerAnalyzer license. Informatica does not ship the PowerAnalyzer license key with the PowerCenter CD. Informatica provides the license key in an email with instructions on how to apply the license to the product. To obtain a PowerAnalyzer license, send a request to: productrequest@informatica.com. You do not need the license key to install PowerAnalyzer. If you have the PowerAnalyzer license key at the time of installation, you can apply the license key during the installation. Otherwise, you can complete the installation and apply the license key afterward. The PowerAnalyzer license is a restricted license. This license can only be used to run PowerCenter Metadata Reporter and Data Profiling. For more information on the license, contact Informatica Technical Support. For more information on activating the PowerAnalyzer license, or installing and configuring PowerAnalyzer, see the PowerAnalyzer Installation Guide.

Overview

209

Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects

Before you import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects, ensure that PowerAnalyzer is installed properly. To import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects, log in to PowerAnalyzer with system administrator privileges. The installation CD stores the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter XML files in the Metadata Reporter folder. Import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects in the following order: 1. 2. 3. Schemas. Import the definitions of the schema tables, attributes, and metrics from Schemas.xml. For more information, see Importing the Schema on page 210. Schedules. Import the schedules from Schedule.xml. For more information, see Importing the Schedules on page 212. Global variables. Import the appropriate global variable XML file. Informatica packages a separate global variable XML file for each type of supported PowerCenter repository database. For more information, see Importing the Global Variables on page 213. Reports. Import the definitions of the reports from Reports.xml. For more information, see Importing the Reports on page 214. Dashboards. Import the dashboards from Dashboard.xml. For more information, see Importing the Dashboards on page 216.

4. 5.

Importing the Schema

The Schemas.xml file contains the schema, attribute, and metric definitions required by PowerCenter Metadata Reporter. Schema definitions may include the following types of objects:

Tables Metrics Attributes Table joins Time keys Drill paths

To import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter schemas: 1.

Click Administration > XML Export / Import > Import Schemas.

210

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

The Import Schemas page displays.

2. 3. 4.

On the Import Schemas page, select Validate XML against DTD. Click Browse to locate the Schemas.xml file in the Metadata Reporter folder on the PowerCenter CD. Click Import XML.

Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects

211

The Import Schemas page displays the schema objects to be imported.

5.

Click Continue. The Import Schemas page displays the following message:
The objects have been successfully imported to the target repository.

Importing the Schedules

The Schedule.xml file contains the schedules to run the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter cached reports.
To import the schedules for the reports: 1.

Click Administration > XML Export / Import > Import Schedules.

212

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

The Import Schedules page displays.

2. 3. 4.

On the Import Schedules page, select Validate XML against DTD. Click Browse to locate the Schedule.xml file in the Metadata Reporter folder on the PowerCenter CD. Click Import XML. The Import Schedules page displays the schedules to be imported.

5.

Click Continue. The Import Schemas page displays the following message:
The objects have been successfully imported to the target repository.

Importing the Global Variables

The global variable definitions are database-dependent. Import the XML file appropriate for your PowerCenter repository database. The naming convention for the global variables XML file is GlobalVariables<database>.xml, where <database> can be DB2, Oracle, SQL Server, Sybase, or Teradata.
To import the global variables: 1.

Click Administration > XML Export / Import > Import Global Variables.

Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects

213

The Import Global Variables page displays.

2. 3. 4. 5.

On the Import Global Variables page, select Validate XML against DTD. Click Browse to locate the global variables XML file in the Metadata Reporter folder on the PowerCenter CD. Select the file appropriate for your PowerCenter repository database from the list of global variables export files. Click Import XML. The Import Global Variables page displays the global variables to be imported.

6.

Click Continue. The Import Global Variables page displays the following message:
The objects have been successfully imported to the target repository.

Importing the Reports

The Reports.xml file contains the definitions of the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports.
To import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports: 1.

Click Administration > XML Export / Import > Import Reports.

214

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

The Import Reports page displays.

2. 3. 4.

On the Import Reports page, select Validate XML against DTD. Click Browse to locate the Reports.xml file in the Metadata Reporter folder on the PowerCenter CD. Click Import XML. The Import Reports page displays the reports to be imported.

By default, the Publish to Everyone and Run Scheduled Reports After Import options are enabled.
5.

If you do not want to give all PowerAnalyzer users access to the reports, disable Publish to Everyone. You can give specific individuals access to the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports. For more information on providing access to a PowerAnalyzer report, see Setting Permissions and Restrictions in the PowerAnalyzer Administrator Guide.

6.

Click Continue. The Import Reports page displays the following message:
The objects have been successfully imported to the target repository.

Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects

215

It also displays a list of global variables used in the imported reports. These global variables were installed when you imported the global variables XML file. For more information on global variables, see Importing the Global Variables on page 213.

After you import the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports, PowerAnalyzer categorizes the reports into separate folders.

Importing the Dashboards

The Dashboards.xml file contains the dashboard and dashboard objects for the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports.
To import the dashboards: 1.

Click Administration > XML Export / Import > Import Dashboards. The Import Dashboards page displays.

2. 3. 4.

On the Import Dashboards page, select Validate XML Against DTD. Click Browse to locate the Dashboards.xml file in the Metadata Reporter folder on the PowerCenter CD. Click Import XML.

216

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

The Import Dashboards page displays the dashboard to be imported.

5.

Click Continue. The Import Dashboards page displays the following message:
The objects have been successfully imported to the target repository.

After you import all the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects, you need to attach the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter cached reports to the imported schedules.

Step 1. Import PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Objects

217

Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository

The PowerCenter Metadata Reporter analyzes metadata from a PowerCenter repository. You must create a data source that points to the PowerCenter repository database to enable PowerCenter Metadata Reporter to access the source metadata.
Note: If you already have a data source that points to the PowerCenter repository, you can skip

this step and use the existing data source.

To create the PowerCenter repository data source: 1. 2. 3.

Click Administration > Schema Design > Data Sources. On the Data Source page, click Add. Enter a name and description for the data source.

Use the following table to enter configuration information for the PowerCenter repository:
Property System Name Required/ Optional Required Description Name of the data source must be unique. The system name can include any character except a space, tab, newline character, and the following special characters: \ / : * ? < > | & Maximum length for the description of the data source is 255 characters. PowerCenter repository database server type.

Description Server Type

Optional Required

218

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

Property Driver Name

Required/ Optional Required

Description JDBC driver name. When you select the server type, PowerAnalyzer supplies the driver name and connection string format for the JDBC drivers provided by PowerAnalyzer. For a list of supported database drivers, see Managing Data Sources in the PowerAnalyzer Administrator Guide. JDBC driver connection string. Requires the JDBC driver URL and repository database server information. For JDBC driver connection string syntax, see Managing Data Sources in the PowerAnalyzer Administrator Guide. User name to connect to the repository database. Password to connect to the repository database. Table used to test the connection between PowerAnalyzer and the PowerCenter repository. When you select the server type, PowerAnalyzer supplies the table name. You can enter a different table name to test the connection.

JDBC Connection String

Required

User Name Password Test Table

Required Required Required

4.

Click Test Connection. If the connection fails, verify that the repository database information is correct. Consult your database administrator if necessary.

5. 6.

Select PowerCenter Repository. Click OK to save the data source.

For more information on creating data sources, see Managing Data Sources in the PowerAnalyzer Administrator Guide.

Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository

219

Step 3. Create a Data Connector

This section provides instructions on how to create a data connector for the PowerCenter repository data source that you created in Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository on page 218. For more information on data connectors, see Working with Data Connectors in the PowerAnalyzer Administrator Guide. PowerAnalyzer uses a data connector to access the data source to read the data for a report. Typically, PowerAnalyzer uses the system data connector to connect to all the data sources required for PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports. To run PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports on PowerAnalyzer, add the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter data source to the data connector. If you want to use an existing data connector for the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports, add the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter data source to the data connector.
To create a data connector: 1.

Click Administration > Schema Design > Data Connectors. The list of data connectors defined in the repository displays in the task area.

2.

Click Add. The Data Connector page displays.

220

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

3.

Enter the data connector properties listed in Table 13-1:

Table 13-1. Data Connector Properties Property System Name Required/ Optional Required Description Enter the name of the data connector. The data connector name must be unique. The system name can include any character except a space, tab, newline character, and the following special characters:
\ / : * ? < > | &

Description Primary Data Source

Optional Required

Enter a description for the data connector. Maximum length for the data connector description is 255 characters. Select the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter data source you created in Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository on page 218. This option does not apply to PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports. Add the schemas provided by PowerCenter Metadata Reporter that you imported in Importing the Schema on page 210.

Primary Time Dimension Additional Schema Mappings 4.

N/A Optional

If you do not want to set up additional data sources, click OK. If this is the first data connector in PowerAnalyzer, PowerAnalyzer saves the data connector to the repository as the system data connector, making it available to all users. You cannot edit the list of users who can use this data connector. If this is not the system data connector, you can edit the list of users who can use this data connector. You can activate this data connector in addition to the system data connector.

Step 3. Create a Data Connector

221

Step 4. Set Up Schedules for Cached Reports

To set up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter cached reports, you must add the reports to the schedules. You must also start the schedules to populate the cached reports for the first time.

Adding Reports to Schedules

PowerCenter Metadata Reporter provides a set of schedules that you can use to run specific reports on a regular basis. You must assign all cached reports to the provided schedules.
To add the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter reports to schedules: 1. 2.

Click the Find tab. Select one of the cached reports to which you want to add to a schedule. Table 13-2 provides the name of the schedule for each PowerCenter Metadata Reporter cached report:
Table 13-2. PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Cached Report Schedules Cached Report Average Load Times (Last Month) Connection Usage Currently Active Sessions by Server Failed Session Statistics (Started Today) Invalid Mapping Statistics by Folder Mapping Statistics by Folder Server Load (Yesterday) Sessions with Rejected Rows (Yesterday) Source Statistics by Folder Target Statistics by Folder Top 10 Sessions with Rejected Rows (Yesterday) Report Folder Path Operations > Session Execution Operations > Session Execution Operations > Session Execution Operations > Session Execution PowerCenter Objects > Mappings PowerCenter Objects > Mappings Operations > Session Execution Operations > Session Execution PowerCenter Objects > Sources PowerCenter Objects > Targets Operations > Session Execution Schedule Monthly Midnight Daily 5 Minute Refresh Hourly Midnight Daily Midnight Daily Midnight Daily Midnight Daily Midnight Daily Midnight Daily Midnight Daily

222

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

For example, run the Invalid Mapping Statistics by Folder report.

Select Edit Report to attach a schedule to the report.

3.

Click Edit Report. The report displays in the Create Report tab.

4. 5.

Click Publish. On the Define Report Properties tab, click the Cached option, and then select the name of the schedule from the list of schedules.

Step 4. Set Up Schedules for Cached Reports

223

For a list of schedules that you must assign to each cached report, see Table 13-2 on page 222.

Select a schedule.

6. 7.

Save the report. Click Close after PowerAnalyzer displays the following message:
The report has been saved successfully.

8.

Repeat steps 1 to 7 to add all other PowerCenter Metadata Reporter cached reports to schedules. You might want to review the properties of the cached reports listed in Table 13-2 on page 222 to verify that the correct schedule has been added to each report.

224

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

9.

To verify the schedule for a report, select a report and look at the Report Properties section to identify the attached schedule.

Schedule for the report

Starting Schedules
PowerCenter Metadata Reporter provides several schedules to run reports. These schedules run cached reports at regular intervals. Before you begin working with PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, start the schedules to run the cached reports. Once the schedules run, PowerAnalyzer caches the results for these reports. You can open the report to view the cached data. If you want to update report results before the next scheduled run, you can manually start the schedule again.
To manually start PowerCenter Metadata Reporter schedules: 1.

Click Administration > Scheduling > Time-Based Schedules.

Step 4. Set Up Schedules for Cached Reports

225

A list of PowerCenter Metadata Reporter schedules displays.

Click Run Now to run the Midnight Daily schedule. 2.

Select Run Now next to each schedule that you want to start. For example, to start the Midnight Daily schedule, click Run Now. PowerAnalyzer adds the schedule to the queue and runs the attached reports. Click OK to clear the acknowledgement message. After the schedules complete, click Dashboards to view indicators and access reports contained in the dashboards.

226

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

Switching PowerCenter Repositories

You can switch the PowerCenter repository that you use as a data source for PowerCenter Metadata Reporter. For example, if you first tested PowerCenter Metadata Reporter on a development repository and now want to use it on a production repository, you must switch the data sources. To change the PowerCenter repository, complete the following steps: 1. Create a new data source for the new PowerCenter repository. Set up a new data source for the new PowerCenter repository database. For information, see Step 2. Create a Data Source for the PowerCenter Repository on page 218. Edit the PowerCenter Metadata Reporter data connector. Select a new data source from the Primary Data Source list on the Data Connectors page. For information, see Step 3. Create a Data Connector on page 220. Configure the global variables. When you first set up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter, you imported a global variable XML file that was specific to the database type of your PowerCenter repository. If the new repository is of a different database type, you must delete the existing global variables and re-import the global variable XML file that is applicable to the new database type. For more information on deleting global variables, see Removing Global Variables in the PowerAnalyzer Administrator Guide. For more information about importing global variables, see Importing the Global Variables on page 213. 4. Log out and log back into PowerAnalyzer.

2.

3.

Switching PowerCenter Repositories

227

228

Chapter 13: Setting Up PowerCenter Metadata Reporter

Chapter 14

Upgrading Repository Metadata

This chapter includes information describing the impact on repository objects when you upgrade a repository.

229

Overview
The PowerCenter 7.1 repository upgrade process introduces new metadata objects to the repository. It also introduces new functionality by modifying existing repository objects. The change in functionality for existing objects depends on the version of the existing objects. Consult the upgrade information in this chapter for each upgraded object to determine whether the upgrade applies to your current version of PowerCenter or PowerMart. Table 14-1 shows the existing repository objects modified by the PowerCenter 7.1 upgrade:
Table 14-1. Repository Metadata Affected by Upgrade Repository Metadata Object queries Description The Latest Status query parameter replaces the Visible Status query parameter. For more information, see Upgrading Object Queries on page 233. Existing expressions upgrade to conform to the new transformation language rules in PowerCenter 6.1 and PowerMart 6.1. For more information, see Upgrading Transformation Expressions on page 234. Existing sessions and batches upgrade to workflows. For more information, see Upgrading Sessions and Batches on page 241. Effective in version 7.0, PowerCenter no longer uses folder versions. Folder versions upgrade to separate folders. For more information on upgrading folder versions, see Upgrading Folder Versions on page 255. Effective in version 7.0, PowerCenter has a new privilege called Use Repository Manager. For more information on upgrading repository privileges see Upgrading Repository Privileges on page 257. You may have to update scripts using pmcmd or pmrep to use the new command syntax, new object names, or folder names generated by the upgrade process. For more information, see Upgrading pmcmd and pmrep Scripts on page 258. X X X 5.0 5.1 6.0 6.1 6.2 7.0 X

Transformation expressions

Sessions and batches

Folder versions

Repository privileges

pmcmd and pmrep scripts

230

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Table 14-1. Repository Metadata Affected by Upgrade Repository Metadata Pipeline partitioning Description Existing sessions upgrade to include partition points and types. For more information, see Upgrading Sessions for Partitioning on page 260. You can recompile existing external procedures to take advantage of new functionality. Also, you must recompile some existing Solaris and AIX external procedures. For more information, see Upgrading External Procedure Transformations on page 263. Existing Advanced External Procedure transformations upgrade to Custom transformations. For more information, see Upgrading Advanced External Procedure Transformations on page 268. You must compile existing Custom transformation procedures. You may need to modify the code before recompiling. For more information, see Upgrading Custom Transformations on page 270. The upgrade process associates $Source and $Target variables with database connections. For more information, see Upgrading $Source and $Target Variables on page 272. Sessions using a TPump external loader write dates to flat files in a different format. For more information, see Upgrading TPump Date Format on page 273. The upgrade creates Teradata TPump external loader connection objects for existing Teradata external loader connections. For more information, see Creating Teradata TPump External Loader Connections on page 274. Existing Informix, DB2, ODBC, and Oracle sessions upgrade to normal load. For more information, see Upgrading Bulk Loading on page 275. X X X 5.0 X 5.1 X 6.0 6.1 6.2 7.0

External procedures

Advanced External Procedure transformations

Custom transformations

$Source and $Target variables

Teradata TPump update overrides

5.1.1 5.1.2

Teradata TPump external loader

5.1.1 5.1.2

Bulk loading

Overview

231

Table 14-1. Repository Metadata Affected by Upgrade Repository Metadata Incremental aggregation files Description When you run upgraded sessions for the first time, the PowerCenter Server automatically upgrades the index and data cache files. For more information, see Upgrading Incremental Aggregation Files on page 276. Aggregator, Rank, Joiner, and Lookup transformations upgrade to new default index and data cache sizes. Transformations associated with an existing session retain existing index and data caches sizes at the session level. Also, these transformations upgrade to contain the previously configured cache directory for every partition. For more information, see Upgrading Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank Cache Properties on page 277. Effective in version 6.0, the PowerCenter Server reads trailing spaces in all string lookup columns and does not delete them. For more information, see Upgrading Lookup Transformations on page 281. Effective with version 7.0, PowerCenter provides support for XML schemas. For more information, see Upgrading XML Definitions on page 282. In version 7.0, the mapping validation rules change for mappings that contain Transaction Control transformations. For more information, see Upgrading Transaction Control Mappings on page 286. Effective in version 7.0, PowerCenter replaces the REP_SCHEMA view with a REP_SUBJECT view. If you have reports that use the REP_SCHEMA view, you can update them to access the REP_SUBJECT view. For more information about the MX views, see Using Metadata Exchange (MX) Views in the Repository Guide. X X X 5.0 X 5.1 X 6.0 X 6.1 X 6.2 X 7.0 X

Aggregator, Rank, Joiner, and Lookup transformation cache sizes and directories

Lookup transformations

XML definitions

Transaction Control mappings

MX views

232

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Object Queries

Applicable Versions: 7.0

Effective in version 7.1, PowerCenter replaces the Visible Status parameter with the Latest Status parameter in object queries. This enhancement adds flexibility to queries. All queries that used the Visible Status parameter upgrade to use the Latest Status parameter. The upgrade process converts some Visible Status query parameter values to different Latest Status query parameter values. Upgraded queries that use the Latest Status parameter may produce different results than queries that use the Visible Status parameter. Table 14-2 shows the converted Latest Status parameter values, and compares the query behavior between the 7.0 parameter values and the 7.1 parameter values:
Table 14-2. Upgraded Values Available in the Latest Status Query Parameter 7.0 Parameter Value Checked-out Invisible Visible Status Query Behavior Returns local checked out objects. Returns a collection of older versions of objects and the latest deleted version of objects. Returns the latest non-deleted version of an object. The query searches by version number and deleted or non-deleted status. 7.1 Parameter Value Checked-out Older Latest Status Query Behavior Same Returns a collection of older versions of objects. Returns the latest checked-in version of an object. The query searches by version number only.

Visible

Latest checked-in

Upgrading Object Queries

233

Upgrading Transformation Expressions

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0

To increase the precision of calculations and improve session performance, Informatica updated the transformation language in PowerCenter 6.1 and PowerMart 6.1. The transformation language enhancements affect functions in transformations, workflow expressions, and nested aggregation. The changes do not affect source qualifier SQL overrides, lookup overrides, or target update overrides. Similarly, they do not change the output of numeric functions. For example, SQRT(4) always returns 2. When you upgrade, the upgrade process updates certain transformation expressions so that they conform to the new rules. If it cannot do this, the upgrade process invalidates mappings and workflows containing expressions that violate the new rules. You need to manually correct and revalidate these mappings and workflows in order to run them.
Note: When you import a mapping or workflow exported from a previous version of

PowerCenter/PowerMart, the PowerCenter Client marks the mapping or workflow invalid if it contains an expression that does not conform to the new transformation language rules. You need to manually edit transformation and workflow expressions that do not conform to the new rules and revalidate the mapping or workflow. The upgrade process applies the new rules to the following features:

Function syntax Nested aggregation Datatype conversion String to number conversion

For more information about the new rules, see the Transformation Language Reference.

Upgrading Function Syntax to Conform to New Rules

The upgrade process modifies the syntax of the following functions:
234

IS_DATE IS_NUMBER IS_SPACES TO_DATE TO_DECIMAL TO_FLOAT TO_INTEGER IIF DECODE

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

For more information on the new rules for functions, see Functions in the Transformation Language Reference.

IS_DATE, IS_NUMBER, and IS_SPACES

The IS_DATE, IS_NUMBER, and IS_SPACES functions accept only string values as input. They no longer accept non-string values. When the upgrade process encounters one of these functions that evaluates numeric data instead of string data, it adds TO_CHAR to the value. For example, you have the following expression, where ORDER_NUM is a numeric port:
IS_NUMBER(ORDER_NUM)

The upgrade process produces the following expression:

IS_NUMBER( (TO_CHAR(ORDER_NUM) )

TO_DATE
The TO_DATE function accepts only string values as input. It no longer accepts datetime values. When the upgrade process encounters a TO_DATE expression that evaluates datetime data instead of string data, it adds TO_CHAR to the value. For example, you have the following expression, where ORDER_DATE is a datetime port:
TO_DATE(ORDER_DATE)

The upgrade process produces the following expression:

TO_DATE( TO_CHAR(ORDER_DATE) )

TO_DECIMAL and TO_FLOAT

The TO_DECIMAL and TO_FLOAT functions accept only string or numeric values as input. In previous versions of PowerCenter/PowerMart, they accepted any datatype except binary. When the upgrade process encounters a TO_DECIMAL or TO_FLOAT expression that evaluates datetime data instead of numeric or string data, it adds TO_CHAR to the value. For example, you have the following expression, where ORDER_DATE is a datetime port:
TO_DECIMAL(ORDER_DATE)

The upgrade process produces the following expression:

TO_DECIMAL( TO_CHAR(ORDER_DATE) )

TO_INTEGER
The TO_INTEGER function converts a string or numeric value to an integer. Effective in version 6.1, TO_INTEGER syntax contains an optional argument that allows you to choose to round the number to the nearest integer or truncate the decimal portion. Also effective in version 6.1, TO_INTEGER accepts only string or numeric values as input. In previous versions of PowerCenter/PowerMart, TO_INTEGER accepted any datatype except binary.

Upgrading Transformation Expressions

235

TO_INTEGER uses the following syntax:

TO_INTEGER( value [, flag] )

For example, you have the following expression, where ORDER_DATE is a datetime port:
TO_INTEGER(ORDER_DATE)

The upgrade process produces the following expression:

TO_INTEGER( TO_CHAR(ORDER_DATE) )

IIF
The IIF function returns values based on the results of a condition. Effective in version 6.1, when you use IIF, the datatype of the return value is the same as the datatype of the result with the greatest precision. However, in high precision mode, if at least one result is Double, the datatype of the return value is Double. The IIF function no longer writes the FALSE result with the same datatype of the TRUE result. For example, you have the following expression:
IIF( SALES < 100, 1, .3333 )

The TRUE result (1) is an integer and the FALSE result (.3333) is a decimal. In previous versions of PowerCenter/PowerMart, this expression wrote the FALSE result as an integer, rounding the result to the nearest integer, 0. The upgrade process adds the necessary conversion function, such as TO_INTEGER, to the IIF expression to match the datatype of the TRUE result. The upgrade process produces the following expression:
IIF( SALES < 100, 1, TO_INTEGER(.3333) )

Also effective in version 6.1, the datatypes of the return values must be similar, such as Integer and Decimal. You cannot create an IIF function with both string and numeric results. For example, you have the following expression:
IIF( SALES < 100, 1, .3333 )

The upgrade process produces the following expression:

IIF( SALES < 100, 1, TO_INTEGER(.3333) )

DECODE
The DECODE function returns a value based on the results of a search. Effective in version 6.1, when you use DECODE, the datatype of the return value is always the same as the datatype of the result with the greatest precision. However, in high precision mode, if at least one result is Double, the datatype of the return value is Double. The DECODE function no longer writes all results with the same datatype of the first result argument. For example, you have the following expression:
DECODE ( CONST_NAME Five, 5,

236

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Pythagoras, 1.414213562, Archimedes, 3.141592654, Pi, 3.141592654 )

The first result in this expression is 5, an integer. In previous versions, this expression wrote all results with the same datatype as the first result, an integer, rounding the result to the nearest integer. To keep the same results as in previous versions, the upgrade process produces the following expression:
DECODE ( CONST_NAME Five, 5, Pythagoras, TO_INTEGER(1.414213562), Archimedes, TO_INTEGER(3.141592654), Pi, TO_INTEGER(3.141592654) )

Also effective in version 6.1, the datatypes of the return values must be compatible, such as integer and decimal. You cannot create a DECODE function with both string and numeric return values. For example, you have the following expression:
DECODE ( CONST_NAME Five, 5.0, Six, 6.0, Seven, 7.0, Eight, 8.0)

The upgrade process produces the following expression:

DECODE ( CONST_NAME Five, 5.0, Six, TO_FLOAT(6.0), Seven, TO_FLOAT(7.0), Eight, 8.0)

Upgrading Expressions that Use RTRIM

If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 5.0.5/1 and PowerMart 5.0.5/1 and you have expressions that use the RTRIM function to remove trailing spaces in source data before passing it to a Lookup transformation, remove the RTRIM functions after you upgrade your repository. In repository versions prior to PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, the PowerCenter Server deleted trailing spaces in all string lookup columns unless you set the Treat CHAR as CHAR on Read option in the PowerCenter Server setup program to instruct the PowerCenter Server to retain trailing spaces when reading Char columns on a Microsoft SQL Server database. Effective with PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, the PowerCenter Server reads trailing spaces in all string lookup columns and does not delete them. Also, the PowerCenter Server ignores the Treat CHAR as CHAR on Read option when it reads from a Microsoft SQL Server database.

Upgrading Transformation Expressions

237

Upgrading Expressions that Use Nested Aggregation

In previous versions of PowerCenter/PowerMart, you could create a single Aggregator transformation that contained both single-level and nested aggregate functions. For example, you could create an Aggregator transformation with the following output ports:
Output Port OUT_AVG_PRECIP OUT_MAX_AVG_TEMP Expression AVG( PRECIP ) AVG( MAX( TEMP ))

Output port OUT_AVG_PRECIP contains a single-level aggregate function, while output port OUT_MAX_AVG_TEMP contains a nested aggregate function. In version 6.1, you cannot combine nested and single-level aggregate functions in a single Aggregator transformation. When the upgrade process encounters a mapping that contains an Aggregator transformation with both single-level and nested aggregate functions, it marks the mapping invalid. When you upgrade an Aggregator transformation with both single-level and nested aggregate functions, the upgrade activity log displays messages similar to the following text:
INFO: Processing mapping [m_MappingName] ... . . . INFO: Processing transformation [Agg_nested_single] ... ERROR: Cannot upgrade [stddev_out]'s expression. mixing nested aggregate expression(s) with non-nested aggregate expression(s) in the same transformation is not allowed.

To make the mapping valid, create two Aggregator transformations: one that contains the single-level function, and another that contains the nested function. For more information rules that affect nested aggregation, see Aggregator Transformation in the Transformation Guide.

Converting Datatypes
To increase the accuracy and clarity of expressions, PowerCenter 6.1/PowerMart 6.1 contains new datatype conversion rules that do not allow you to mix datatypes in expressions. Therefore, PowerCenter enforces the following rules in transformation language expressions:

You cannot use strings in numeric expressions. For example, the expression 1 + 1 is not valid because you can only perform addition on numeric datatypes. You cannot add an integer and a string.

You cannot use strings as numeric parameters. For example, the expression SUBSTR( TEXT_VAL, 1, 10 ) is not valid because the SUBSTR function requires an integer value, not a string, as the start position.

238

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

You cannot mix datatypes when using comparison operators. For example, the expression 123.4 = 123.4 is not valid because it compares a decimal value with a string.

When the upgrade process encounters an expression that mixes datatypes, it corrects the expression, according to the previous behavior. The following table shows how the upgrade process updates some expressions to conform to the new rules:
Original Expression 1 + 1 SUBSTR( TEXT_VAL, 1, 10 ) 123.4 = 123.4 Upgraded Expression 1 + TO_INTEGER( 1 ) SUBSTR( TEXT_VAL, TO_INTEGER( 1 ), 10 ) 123.4 = TO_DECIMAL( 123.4 )

Converting Strings to Floating Point Numbers

PowerCenter 6.1 and PowerMart 6.1 provide the TO_FLOAT function for converting strings to floating point numbers. Previous versions of PowerCenter/PowerMart provided both the TO_FLOAT and TO_NUMBER functions to do this. If you have an expression that calls the TO_NUMBER function, the upgrade process replaces the call to TO_NUMBER with TO_FLOAT.

Returning the Last Row in a Port

PowerCenter 6.1 and PowerMart 6.1 provide the LAST function to return the last row in a selected port. PowerMart 3.5 provided the PIVOT function to do this. If you have an expression that calls the PIVOT function, the upgrade process replaces the call to PIVOT with LAST.

Upgrading Transformation Expressions

239

Upgrading Mappings
Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2 / 7.0

Effective in PowerCenter 7.1, the PowerCenter Server performs more mapping validation when you run a session than in previous releases. If you are upgrading a session with a mapping that connects an active transformation and a passive transformation to the same downstream transformation or transformation input group, the PowerCenter Server now fails the session with the following error:
MAPPING> TT_11152 <transformation_name>: Concatenation error: Please check the Normalizer concatenation rule

The PowerCenter Server performs mapping validation, finds the mapping invalid, and fails the session. In a previous release, when you ran a session with a Normalizer transformation that violated the N-or-1 rule, the PowerCenter Server failed the session at runtime. Effective version 7.1, the PowerCenter Server fails the session at initialization.

240

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1

Effective in PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, the Workflow Manager and Workflow Monitor replace the Server Manager. Instead of running a session, you now run a process called the workflow. A workflow is a set of instructions to execute tasks such as sessions, emails, and shell commands. A session is now one of the many tasks you can create and add to a workflow. The Workflow Manager provides other tasks such as Assignment, Decision, and Event-Wait. You can also create branches with conditional links. Figure 14-1 shows a sample workflow with two branches:
Figure 14-1. Sample Workflow

Instead of creating batches, you can add many Session tasks in a workflow and link them sequentially or concurrently. You can create worklets in the Workflow Manager to reuse a set of tasks. Instead of creating a nested batch, you can create worklets and use them in a workflow. PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0 and later versions use link conditions, workflow and worklet variables, and task attributes to upgrade existing sessions and batches. The upgrade process creates non-reusable Session tasks and other tasks for existing sessions and batches. The repository upgrade process also creates default variables and configuration objects.
Note: To promote a non-reusable Session task or worklet to reusable, double-click the Session

task or worklet in the Workflow Designer workspace and choose Make Reusable. You can view a comparison of session properties from PowerCenter 5.x/PowerMart 5.x to PowerCenter 7.1 in Session Properties Comparison Reference in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

241

Special Characters
In previous versions of PowerCenter and PowerMart, you could use the following special characters in session, batch, connection, and server names:
! @ # $ % ^ & ( ) { } [ ] < > . , ? | \ " ; : ~ ' * / - <space>

Effective with PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, you cannot use these special characters for session, connection, or server names. For sessions and connections, the upgrade process replaces these special characters with an underscore (_). You may need to update pmrep and pmcmd scripts to reflect the upgraded names. If you have server names that use these characters, you can continue to use them. However, if you edit a server, the Workflow Manager validates the server name and requires you to remove the special characters. You can use a dash (-) in a server name, but you cannot use it as the first character in the name.

Upgrading a Session
When you upgrade a standalone session, the upgrade process creates a workflow with a Start task and a non-reusable Session task. The upgrade process uses the session name for the Session task name and the workflow name. Some characters in session names are no longer valid effective in PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0. If the session name contains a space, an equal sign, or other invalid characters, the upgrade process replaces it with an underscore (_). If the session name starts with a number, the upgrade adds s_ to the beginning of the session name. If another session with the same name already exists in the repository, the upgrade process generates a unique session name by appending a number after the session name. Check the upgrade output messages to view new names. Similarly, the upgrade process replaces connection names (including lookup and stored procedure connections) if the connection name is no longer valid. The upgrade replaces each invalid character with an underscore (_). If the connection name starts with a number, the upgrade adds c_ to the beginning of the connection name. Connection names are not casesensitive in PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0 and later. The upgrade process leaves the workflow log file name empty. When you run the workflow, the PowerCenter Server writes messages to the workflow log and session log. You can edit the workflow properties to enter a workflow log name. Figure 14-2 shows the workflow upgraded from a session:
Figure 14-2. Upgrade Workflow - Single Session

The upgrade process converts the session parameter file from the previous version to the parameter file.

242

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

When you upgrade a session, the upgraded workflow contains additional tasks in the workflow or additional attributes in the workflow or session properties if you have the following parameters in the session:

Disabled sessions. If you upgrade a standalone disabled session, the upgrade process selects the Disabled option in the workflow properties. Event-based scheduling. If you used event-based scheduling, the upgraded workflow contains a non-reusable Event-Wait task before the Session task. Pre-session and post-session shell commands. The upgraded workflow contains nonreusable shell commands for the pre-session and post-session shell commands. Post-session email. The upgraded workflow contains a non-reusable Email task in the session properties for the post-session email.

Upgrading File Properties

You can enter both the path and file name in some file name session properties, such as the Source Filename field. However, when you enter the path and file name in the reject, source, or target file name fields, the upgrade process parses the name field and moves the path to the corresponding directory field.

Upgrading a Standalone Disabled Session

In previous versions, you could clear the Session Enabled option in the session properties so that the PowerCenter Server could not run the session. When you upgrade a standalone disabled session, the upgrade process selects the Disabled option in the workflow properties. If the disabled session is in a batch, the upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the session properties. For details, see Upgrading Disabled Session and Batches on page 250.

Upgrading a Session with Event-Based Scheduling

In previous versions, PowerCenter/PowerMart provided event-based scheduling so the PowerCenter Server started a session when it located the specified indicator file. When you upgrade a session with event-based scheduling, the upgraded workflow contains a nonreusable Event-Wait task before the Session task. Figure 14-3 shows the workflow upgraded from a session that used event-based scheduling:
Figure 14-3. Upgrade Workflow - Session with Event-Based Scheduling

The Event-Wait task waits for an event to occur. Once the event triggers, the PowerCenter Server continues executing the rest of the workflow. The Event-Wait task can wait for a pre-

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

243

defined event or a user-defined event. A pre-defined event is a file-watch event where the PowerCenter Server waits for a specified indicator file to appear. The Event-Wait task in the workflow contains the following properties:

Pre-defined event. The upgrade process selects the Event-Wait task to wait for a predefined event on the Events tab of the Event-Wait task. The upgrade process specifies the filewatch file name for the pre-defined event. Delete filewatch file. The upgrade process enables the Delete Filewatch File option on the Properties tab of the Event-Wait task.

For details on using the Event-Wait task, see Working with Tasks in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading a Session with Pre- or Post-Session Commands

In previous versions, PowerCenter/PowerMart provided pre-session and post-session shell commands. The upgrade process creates non-reusable commands for the pre-session or postsession shell commands. The non-reusable commands appear in the Components tab of the session properties. If you specified the Stop Session On Pre-Session Shell Command Error option in the session, the upgrade process enables the Run If Previous Completed option in the Properties tab of the pre-session commands. For details on pre- or post-session commands, see Working with Sessions in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading a Session with Post-Session Email

In previous versions, PowerCenter/PowerMart provided post-session email so you can send information about a session run. The upgrade process creates non-reusable Email tasks for the post-session email. The non-reusable Email tasks appear in the Components tab of the session properties. For details on Email tasks, see Sending Email in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Batches
In version 5.x, you created batches to group session execution. There were two types of batches:

Sequential. Runs sessions one after another. Concurrent. Runs sessions at the same time.

When you upgrade sequential or concurrent batches, the upgrade process creates workflows with sequential Session tasks or concurrent Session tasks. Each batch could contain any number of sessions or other batches. When you upgrade a nested batch, the upgrade process creates a parent workflow for the top-level batch, and worklets for the batches inside the top-level batch.
244 Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Some characters in batch names are no longer valid effective in PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0. If the batch name contains a space, an equal sign, or other invalid characters, the upgrade process replaces it with an underscore. If the batch name starts with a number, the upgrade adds w_ to the beginning of the batch name. Check the upgrade output messages to view new names. In version 5.x, PowerCenter/PowerMart allowed you to use duplicate names for a batch and a session within that batch. When you upgrade a batch, the upgraded workflow has the same name as the batch. If the batch has the same name as a session within the batch, the upgrade process adds s_ to the beginning of the session name. You may need to update pmcmd scripts if the names change during the upgrade process. For information about renamed objects, review the Activity Log or the upgrade file you specified in the upgrade steps. The upgrade process uses the name of the top-level batch for the workflow name and workflow log file name. The upgrade process uses the top-level batch parameter file for the parameter file. Table 14-3 lists the rules that the upgrade process uses when you upgrade batches:
Table 14-3. Upgrade Rules for Batches Repository Object Sequential batches Concurrent batches Nested batches Upgrade Rule Upgrade process creates a workflow with sequentially linked Session tasks. For details, see Upgrading Sequential Batches on page 246. Upgrade process creates a workflow with concurrently linked Session tasks. For details, see Upgrading Concurrent Batches on page 246. Upgrade process creates a workflow from the top-level batch. The upgrade process creates worklets for batches inside the top-level batch. For details, see Upgrading Concurrent Batches in a Sequential Batch on page 247 and Upgrading Sequential Batches in a Concurrent Batch on page 248. Worklets created from the upgrade follow these rules: - Outgoing links from enabled worklets have the following outgoing link condition:
$Status = SUCCEEDED

- The upgrade process enables the Fail Parent If This Task Fails option for all worklets created by the upgrade. Sessions scheduled with the Run Once option and uses Absolute Time batch setting Disabled session The upgrade process creates a Timer task before the session.

The upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the Session task properties if the session is in a batch. For standalone disabled sessions, the upgrade process selects the Disabled option in the workflow properties. For details, see Upgrading Disabled Session and Batches on page 250. The upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the Session task properties. A session is a leaf node if it is in the lowest level in the batch. The upgrade process also adds a Control task after the disabled Session task. The Control task is set to Fail Me. For details, see Upgrading Disabled Sessions in a Batch on page 251.

Disabled session leaf node in the batch

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

245

Table 14-3. Upgrade Rules for Batches Repository Object Disabled session - not a leaf node in the batch Disabled batch Upgrade Rule The upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the Session task properties. For details, see Upgrading Disabled Sessions in a Batch on page 251. The upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the properties of the workflow or worklet created from the batch. For details, see Upgrading a Disabled Batch on page 251. The upgrade process selects the Fail Parent If This Task Did Not Run option for the Session task. The input link of the Session task has the following link condition:
$PrevTaskStatus = SUCCEEDED

Run If Previous Completed

The upgrade process creates a variable called $$passInStatus for workflows and worklets created by the upgrade. It uses $$passInStatus for nested batches with the Run If Previous Completed option. For details, see Run If Previous Completed on page 251.

Upgrading Sequential Batches

When you upgrade a sequential batch, the upgrade process creates a workflow with several Session tasks linked sequentially. Suppose you had a sequential batch with three sessions. Figure 14-4 shows a sequential batch with three sessions:
Figure 14-4. Sequential Batch Sess1 Sess2 BS Sess3

Figure 14-5 shows the workflow upgraded from the sequential batch:
Figure 14-5. Workflow Upgraded from Sequential Batch

Upgrading Concurrent Batches

When you upgrade a concurrent batch, the upgrade process creates a workflow with several Session tasks linked concurrently. Suppose you had a concurrent batch with three sessions.

246

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Figure 14-6 shows an example of a concurrent batch with three sessions:

Figure 14-6. Concurrent Batch BC Sess1 Sess2 Sess3

Figure 14-7 shows the workflow upgraded from the concurrent batch:
Figure 14-7. Workflow Upgraded from Concurrent Batch

Upgrading Concurrent Batches in a Sequential Batch

In version 5.x, you could place several concurrent batches in a sequential batch. Figure 14-8 shows concurrent batches in a sequential batch:
Figure 14-8. Concurrent Batches in a Sequential Batch BS BC1 Sess1 Sess2 Sess3 BC2 Sess4 Sess5 Sess6

When the sequential batch in Figure 14-8 runs, the PowerCenter Server starts all sessions within the first concurrent batch (BC1) at the same time. Once all three sessions in BC1 complete, the PowerCenter Server begins all the sessions in concurrent batch BC2. The upgrade process creates worklets from the concurrent batches and places them in a workflow, which is created from the top-level sequential batch.

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

247

Figure 14-9 shows the workflow upgraded from the batch shown in Figure 14-8:
Figure 14-9. Workflow Upgraded from Concurrent Batches in a Sequential Batch $Status = SUCCEEDED

In version 5.x, the PowerCenter Server ran the subsequent batch only if the previous batch completed successfully. Therefore, enabled worklets created by the upgrade have the following output link condition:
$Status = SUCCEEDED

Disabled worklets do not have the outgoing link condition because the PowerCenter Server does not run disabled batches in previous versions. The upgrade process creates a worklet from the concurrent batch BC1, which contains three Session tasks linked concurrently. This worklet is called BC1. Figure 14-10 shows the worklet BC1:
Figure 14-10. Worklet Created from Concurrent Batch

The upgrade process creates another worklet called BC2, also containing three concurrent Session tasks. The upgrade process then creates a workflow called BS and links the worklets sequentially.

Upgrading Sequential Batches in a Concurrent Batch

In version 5.x, you could place sequential batches in a concurrent batch.

248

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Figure 14-11 shows sequential batches in a concurrent batch:

Figure 14-11. Sequential Batches in a Concurrent Batch BC Sess3 Sess2 Sess1 BS1

BS2

Sess4

Sess5

Sess6

The upgrade process creates worklets from the sequential batches and places them in a workflow, which is created from the top-level concurrent batch. Figure 14-12 shows the workflow upgraded from the batch shown in Figure 14-11:
Figure 14-12. Workflow Upgraded from Sequential Batches in a Concurrent Batch

The upgrade process creates a worklet from the sequential batch BS1, which contains three Session tasks linked sequentially. This worklet is called BS1. Figure 14-13 shows the worklet BS1:
Figure 14-13. Worklet Created from Sequential Batch

The upgrade process creates another worklet called BS2, also containing three Session tasks linked sequentially. The upgrade process then creates a workflow called BC and links the worklets concurrently.

Upgrading Sessions with Use Absolute Time Setting

In version 5.x, you could schedule sessions to run once, as configured in the Start Date and Time settings. If the session was in a batch, you could select the Use Absolute Time setting to run the batched session on the session schedule.

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

249

Figure 14-14 shows a batch with two sessions, Sess1 and Sess2. Sess1 has the Run Once schedule option and uses the Use Absolute Time setting:
Figure 14-14. Batched Session Using Absolute Time Setting Sess1: Run Once and Use Absolute Time. BS Sess1 Sess2

When you upgrade the repository, the upgrade process creates a Timer task before the session. Figure 14-15 shows the workflow created from the batch shown in Figure 14-14:
Figure 14-15. Workflow Upgraded from a Batch with Absolute Time Timer task: set to Absolute Time.

The Timer task allows you to specify the period of time to wait before the PowerCenter Server executes the next task in the workflow. You can specify the start date and time that the PowerCenter Server starts executing the next task in the workflow in the Absolute Time setting in the Timer task. The upgrade process selects Absolute Time in the Timer task and uses the time specified in the session schedule in the previous version. For details about the Timer task, see Working with Tasks in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Disabled Session and Batches

In version 5.x, you could disable a session or a batch. When you upgrade a disabled session or batch, the upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the session properties or the Disabled option in the workflow properties. For details about the Disabled option for workflows, see Working with Workflows in the Workflow Administration Guide. For details about the Disable This Task option for the Session task, see Working with Tasks in the Workflow Administration Guide.

250

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Disabled Sessions in a Batch

In version 5.x, you could have a disabled session within a batch. The disabled session may be a leaf node of a batch. A session is a leaf node when it is in the lowest level in the batch. If the disabled session is in a batch, the upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the session task properties. The upgrade process also adds a Control task in the workflow after the disabled Session task if the session is the leaf node of a batch. For example, you have a sequential batch with three sessions: Sess1, Sess2, and Sess3, where Sess3 is a disabled session. Sess3 is a leaf node. Figure 14-16 shows the sequential batch with a disabled session:
Figure 14-16. Sequential Batch with a Disabled Session Disabled Sess1 Sess2 Sess3 BS

Figure 14-17 shows the upgraded workflow when Sess3 is disabled:

Figure 14-17. Workflow with Control Task Disabled option selected. Control Task set to Fail Me.

The Control task is set to Fail Me to set the status of the Control task to FAILED. The upgrade process adds a Control task for disabled leaf node sessions so that $PrevTaskStatus for subsequent session or batch is set to FAILED. In Figure 14-16, Sess1 and Sess2 are not leaf nodes. If Sess1 or Sess2 were disabled, the upgrade process does not add a Control task in the workflow. The upgrade process selects the Disable This Task option in the disabled session.

Upgrading a Disabled Batch

If a batch was disabled, the upgraded workflow is disabled. If a nested batch was disabled, the upgraded worklet in the workflow is disabled. The upgrade process does not create a Control task for disabled batches.

Run If Previous Completed

Sessions in a batch may have the Run If Previous Completed option enabled in previous versions. If you selected Run If Previous Completed, the session ran only if the previous session in the batch completed.

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

251

The upgrade process uses the variable $PrevTaskStatus in the link condition to replace the Run If Previous Completed option. Depending on the batch, the upgrade process may also use the Fail Parent If This Task Did Not Run option and the $$passInStatus variable to upgrade a session that used Run If Previous Completed.

Single-Level Batches
In the simplest case, you may have a single-level sequential batch with three sessions, Sess1, Sess2, and Sess3. You enabled the Run If Previous Completed option in Sess2. The PowerCenter Server executes Sess2 only if Sess1 completes. Figure 14-18 shows a batch where Sess2 has the Run If Previous Completed option enabled:
Figure 14-18. Single-Level Batch with Run If Previous Completed Sess2: Run If Previous Completed. BS Sess1 Sess2 Sess3

In previous versions, if a session had the Run If Previous Completed option enabled but the session did not run, the PowerCenter Server did not run any subsequent session or batch. When you upgrade the batch shown in Figure 14-18, the upgrade process selects the Fail Parent Workflow If This Task Did Not Run option in the Sess2 session properties. The input link to Sess2 has the following link condition:
$PrevTaskStatus = SUCCEEDED

Figure 14-19 shows the workflow upgraded from the batch shown in Figure 14-18:
Figure 14-19. Workflow Upgraded from Figure 14-18 Q2_session: Fail Parent Workflow If This Task Did Not Run.

$PrevTaskStatus = SUCCEEDED

Nested Batches
If you enabled the Run If Previous Completed option in a nested batch, the upgrade process may use the variable $$passInStatus in the input link condition. The upgrade process may set the $$passInStatus worklet variable to the status of the previous session or batch.

252

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Example 1
Suppose you have a concurrent batch in a sequential batch. You enabled the Run If Previous Completed option in a session in the concurrent batch. Figure 14-20 shows the example batch:
Figure 14-20. Nested Batch with Run If Previous Completed BS BC1 Sess1 Sess2 Sess3 BC2 Sess4 Sess5 Sess6 Sess4: Run If Previous Completed.

The upgrade process selects the Fail Parent If This Task Does Not Run option for Sess4. The input link to Sess4 has the following link condition:
$PrevTaskStatus = SUCCEEDED AND $$passInStatus != DISABLED

Figure 14-21 shows the worklet upgraded from the batch BC2:
Figure 14-21. Worklet Upgraded from the Batch BC2 Link condition: $PrevTaskStatus = SUCCEEDED AND $$passInStatus != DISABLED Sess4: Fail Parent Workflow If This Task Did Not Run.

Upgrading Sessions and Batches

253

Example 2
Suppose you have a concurrent batch in a sequential batch. The sequential batch also contains two other sessions. Figure 14-22 shows the example batch:
Figure 14-22. Concurrent Batch with Run If Previous Completed BS Sess1 Sess2 BC Sess3 Sess4 Sess5 Sess3: Run If Previous Completed.

In version 5.x, the PowerCenter Server ran Sess3 if Sess2 was enabled and completed successfully. In the worklet properties for BC, the upgrade process sets the variable $$passInStatus to $Sess2.status. The input link to Sess3 has the following link condition:
$PrevTaskStatus = SUCCEEDED AND $$passInStatus != DISABLED

The upgrade process selects the Fail Parent If This Task Does Not Run option for Sess3. Figure 14-23 shows the workflow created from the batch shown in Figure 14-22:
Figure 14-23. Workflow Upgraded from Concurrent Batch with Run If Previous Completed In BC: $$passInStatus = $Sess2.status

254

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Folder Versions

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2

Effective with version 7.0, PowerCenter no longer uses folder versions. The upgrade process converts existing folder versions to individual folders. The repository upgrade process performs the following tasks when it upgrades folder versions:

Upgrades folder versions to individual folders. The highest-numbered folder version upgrades to a folder with the same name as the existing folder. Lower-numbered folder versions upgrade to folders with the name of the existing folder appended with the version number. The new folder names for lower numbered versions use the following format:
<folder name>_<version number>

Creates shortcuts for sessions that use mappings in lower-numbered folder versions. If a session in the existing folder uses a mapping from a lower-numbered version, the upgrade process creates a shortcut pointing to the mapping in the new folder. The mapping shortcuts use the following naming format:
Shortcut_to_<mapping name>

In case of duplicate mapping names, the upgrade process appends a number to the name of the shortcut. This may happen if multiple folder versions contain mappings with the same name. Duplicate shortcuts use the following naming format:
Shortcut_to_<mapping name><number>

Creates new shortcuts for sessions that use shortcuts to mappings in shared folders. The repository creates the new shortcut if the original shortcut is in a lower-numbered folder version. If the new shortcut name is the same as the original shortcut, the upgrade process appends a number to the name of the new shortcut.

The upgrade process adds the following comment to new folders:

Created by Informatica repository upgrade from version (<folder version number> of folder: <folder name>

The upgrade process adds the following comment when it creates shortcuts:
Created by Informatica repository upgrade from mapping: <mapping name> in Version (<version number>) of folder: <folder name>

Sample Upgrade Scenarios

The following scenarios illustrate the processes the repository uses to upgrade folder versions.

Scenario One
Suppose you have the folder Customers. Customers contains folder versions 3.0.0, 2.5.0, and 1.0.0. Folder version 2.5.0 contains mapping Mapping_1. Folder version 1.0.0 also contains a mapping named Mapping_1.
Upgrading Folder Versions 255

Customers also contains two sessions, Session_1 and Session_2. Session_1 uses Mapping_1 from folder version 2.5.0. Session_2 uses Mapping_1 from folder version 1.0.0. The upgrade process upgrades the contents of Customers to three separate folders: Customers, Customers_020500, and Customers_010000. Customers contains all objects from folder version 3.0.0 in existing folder. The upgrade process creates the shortcut Shortcut_to_Mapping_1. This shortcut points to Mapping_1 in Customers_020500. Session_1 in Customers uses this shortcut. The upgrade process also creates the shortcut Shortcut_to_Mapping_11. This shortcut points to Mapping_1 in Customers_010000. Session_2 in Customers uses this shortcut.

Scenario Two
Suppose you have two folders: Orders and Global_Orders. Global_Orders is a shared folder that has no folder versions. Orders contains folder versions 1.0.0 and 2.0.0. Global_Orders contains mapping Mapping_1. Folder version 1.0.0 in Orders contains shortcut Shortcut_to_Mapping_1, that points to Mapping_1 in Global Orders. Session_1 in Orders uses Shortcut_to_Mapping_1. The upgrade process converts Orders to Orders and Orders_010000. The upgrade process also creates a new shortcut, Shortcut_to_Mapping_11. This new shortcut points to Mapping_1 in Global_Orders. Orders_010000 keeps the original shortcut, Shortcut_to_Mapping1.

256

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Repository Privileges

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2

Effective with version 7.0, PowerCenter has a new repository privilege called Use Repository Manager. This privilege enables users to use many of the new features in introduced in version 7.0. It applies to Repository Manager tasks such as copying objects, creating labels, maintaining object versions, and creating deployment groups. Users that have both the Use Designer and Use Workflow Manager privileges receive the Use Repository Manager privilege during upgrade. Users with the Use Designer privilege or Use Workflow Manager privilege can do most of the same tasks in the respective tools as in the Repository Manager.
Note: The Designer and Workflow Manager tools do not provide the capability to create

Deployment Groups or Labels. Users require the Use Repository Manager privilege for these tasks. For more information on the Use Repository Manager privilege and the tasks that require it, see Repository Security in the Repository Guide.

Upgrading Repository Privileges

257

Upgrading pmcmd and pmrep Scripts

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2

Effective with versions 6.0, 6.1, and 7.0, PowerCenter/PowerMart contains new syntax and commands for pmcmd and pmrep. If you use a pmcmd or pmrep script, you may need to manually update the script to update syntax or to reflect upgraded object names. PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0 also contains new pmcmd return codes. If your pmcmd script depends on return codes, you may need to manually update the script. For details on pmcmd syntax, commands, and return codes, see Using pmcmd in the Workflow Administration Guide. For details on pmrep syntax and commands, see Using pmrep and pmrepagent in the Repository Guide.

Upgrading Session, Batch, and Connection Names

The upgrade process replaces session, batch, or connection names if the name contains invalid characters or if another session or batch with the same name exists. If you used a pmcmd or pmrep script, the script may contain old session, batch, or connection names. When the upgrade process completes, verify that your pmcmd or pmrep script contains the updated names. Check the upgrade output messages to view new names. For details on how the upgrade process replaces session and connection names, see Upgrading a Session on page 242. For details on how the upgrade process replaces batch names, see Upgrading Batches on page 244.

Upgrading Updatedbconfig Commands

Effective with PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0, the pmrep commands Createconnection and Switchconnection replace the Updatedbconfig command. Updatedbconfig updated the configuration information for an existing database connection. To achieve the same functionality in PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0 and later, use the Createconnection command to create a new database connection. You can then use the Switchconnection command to replace the existing database connection with the new database connection in all sessions that use the existing database connection.

Upgrading Delete and Restore Commands

Effective with PowerCenter 6.1 and PowerMart 6.1, the pmrep Restore and Delete commands moved to pmrepagent. The command syntax and functionality are the same as in previous versions. If you use the Restore and Delete commands in a pmrep script, edit the script to replace pmrep with pmrepagent. For command details, see Using pmrep and pmrepagent in the Repository Guide.
258 Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Folder Versions

Effective with version 7.0, PowerCenter no longer uses folder versions. The upgrade process converts the folder versions to individual folders. If you specify folder names or folder versions in your pmrep or pmrepagent scripts, you might have to modify them. For more details about upgrading with folder versions, see Upgrading Folder Versions on page 255.

Upgrading pmcmd and pmrep Scripts

259

Upgrading Sessions for Partitioning

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1

In PowerCenter 5.0/5.1, you could configure sessions with one or more partitions. The number of partitions determined the number of source connections. For relational sources, you could specify multiple connections to a single relational source. If a mapping contained multiple file sources, you could specify one connection for each source file or file list. You always specified partitioning information at the source. Effective in PowerCenter 6.0, you can specify the number of partitions and the partition type at various points in a source pipeline. By default, PowerCenter 6.1 creates partition points at the source and target instances, as well as at each Rank and unsorted Aggregator transformation. When you upgrade, the upgrade process sets the partition types according to the following table:
Transformation Type Relational source with one partition Relational source with multiple partitions and key ranges Relational source with multiple partitions and no key ranges Flat file source Rank or unsorted Aggregator transformation All targets Default Partition Type Pass-through Key range Pass-through Pass-through Hash auto-keys Pass-through

The upgrade process retains the following partitioning information:

Number of partitions. The upgrade process retains the number of partitions for each session. Keys and key ranges. The upgrade process retains keys and key ranges. Partition descriptions. The upgrade process retains partition descriptions. Source attributes. This includes source names and locations, FTP properties, SQL overrides, and filter conditions. Target attributes. This includes reject filename and location, merge file information, FTP information, and external loader information.

Effective in version 6.0, PowerCenter contains a change in the behavior of source and target connection attributes. In PowerCenter 5.0/5.1, if you configured multiple partitions in a session that read data from file sources or loaded data to file targets, you could specify a different type of connection for each partition. For example, you could have the PowerCenter Server read from a file source using an FTP connection in one partition, but read directly from a local or remote file

260

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

in another partition. Similarly, the PowerCenter Server could write to one file target using FTP, and write directly to another file target using a local connection. Effective in PowerCenter 6.0, you must specify the same connection type for all file sources or targets. Therefore, if you have a session with multiple partitions that reads from or writes to files using different connection types, the upgrade process marks the session invalid. To make the session valid, you must specify the same connection type for all file sources or targets. For more information about partitioning, see Pipeline Partitioning in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Sessions for Partitioning

261

Upgrading Stored Procedure Transformations

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2 / 7.0

Effective in version 7.1, the PowerCenter Server processes a block of rows at a time. If a stored procedure or external procedure depends on the PowerCenter Server processing one row at a time, the session output may differ from previous versions. If an upgraded mapping contains multiple Stored Procedure transformations that call the same stored procedure, the PowerCenter Server now calls the stored procedure in a different order. The order of rows that enter a specific transformation remains the same, but the order of rows passed to the stored procedure from the different transformation instances differs from previous releases. If the stored procedure maintains an internal state, such as a sequence, then the session output may change.

262

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading External Procedure Transformations

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2 / 7.0

Effective in version 7.1, the PowerCenter Server processes a block of rows at a time. If an external procedure depends on the PowerCenter Server processing one row at a time, the session output may differ from previous versions. If an upgraded mapping contains multiple External Procedure transformations that call the same external procedure, the PowerCenter Server now calls the external procedures in a different order. The order of rows that enter a specific transformation remains the same, but the order of rows passed to the external procedure from the transformation instances differs from previous releases. If the external procedure maintains an internal state, such as a sequence, then the session output may change. When you upgrade, you can use any DLL or shared library created with previous versions of PowerCenter and PowerMart if you do not need to recompile it. You can recompile external procedures using the existing procedure code, or you can update the procedure code to make it compatible with version 6.0 of PowerCenter/PowerMart and then compile it. You must recompile the following external procedures:

Solaris. You must recompile Solaris procedures created with PowerCenter/PowerMart version 6.0 and earlier. To recompile Solaris external procedures, edit the makefile.sol file, and use the following Solaris compiler:
Forte 6 Update 2, C++ 5.3 patch 111685-07

For details on editing the makefile, see Editing the Solaris Makefile on page 264.

AIX. You must recompile AIX procedures created with PowerCenter/PowerMart version 7.0 and earlier. To recompile AIX external procedures, use the following compiler:
Visual Age C++, version 6.0 patch vacpp.60.oct2003.ptf.tar

Note: If you want to create 64-bit external procedures to run on 64-bit AIX, you may need

to update your procedure code to ensure that it runs successfully on 64-bit AIX. For information on modifying procedure code, see Upgrading the Procedure Code on page 265.

Recompiling Existing Procedures

When you compile the external procedure using the existing procedure code, you cannot use External Procedure transformation features introduced with PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0. To take advantage of the new features introduced in PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, you must upgrade the procedure code and use the new functions provided in version 6.0 before compiling. For more information on upgrading the procedure code, see Upgrading the Procedure Code on page 265.

Upgrading External Procedure Transformations

263

If you need to recompile the DLL or shared library using the existing procedure code, you must compile it using the following files:

Generated files. Use the files the Designer created when you generated the stub files in the previous version of PowerCenter/PowerMart:

tx<module_name>.h tx<module_name>.cpp <procedure_name>.cpp version.cpp stdafx.h readme.txt makefile.sol makefile.hp makefile.aix

Header files. Use the header files shipped with the previous version of PowerCenter/ PowerMart:

infconfg.h infem.h infemdef.h infemmsg.h infparam.h infsigtr.h

Note: If you do not have the header files shipped with the previous version of PowerCenter/

PowerMart, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Library file(s). Use the library file(s) shipped with PowerCenter 7.1.1. Use the following files found in the PowerCenter Server bin directory:

libpmtx.so (Solaris, Linux) libpmtx.a (AIX) libpmtx.sl (HP) pmtx.dll and pmtx.lib (Windows)

Editing the Solaris Makefile

To recompile Solaris external procedures, edit the makefile.sol file, and use the following Solaris compiler:
Forte 6 Update 2, C++ 5.3 patch 111685-07

264

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Use the following procedure to edit makefile.sol.

To edit makefile.sol: 1. 2.

Open makefile.sol in a text editor. Delete -lC from the following entry:
SYSLIBS=-lC -lc -lm -ldl

The entry now looks like:

SYSLIBS=-lc -lm -ldl 3.

Replace -z defs with -mt in the following entry:

CC -o $(TARGET) -G -z defs $(OBJS) $(SYSLIBS) $(INFLIBS)

The entry now looks like:

CC -o $(TARGET) -G -mt $(OBJS) $(SYSLIBS) $(INFLIBS) 4.

Save and close the file. Use the modified makefile.sol file when you recompile the external procedure.

Upgrading the Procedure Code

You can take advantage of the new features introduced in PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0 by recompiling Informatica-style external procedures. Before you recompile an Informatica-style external procedure, you need to modify the code. You do not need to modify the code of COM-style external procedures. For details on the functions included with PowerCenter, see External Procedure Transformation in the Transformation Guide and the files in the $PMExtProcDir/include directory.
To upgrade your external procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Open the External Procedure transformation in the Transformation Developer of PowerCenter. Choose Transformation-Generate Code to generate the C++ files for the external procedure. Open the <procedure_name>.cpp file in Visual Studio or another editor to modify the code for the external procedure. Apply the same changes to the generated C++ file that you made to the file you generated in the previous version of PowerCenter or PowerMart. Make the following changes to your C++ code as necessary:

Change all SetServerCodePageID() function calls to SetDataCodePageID(). PowerCenter no longer supports SetServerCodePageID(). Use SetDataCodePageID() instead.

Upgrading External Procedure Transformations

265

Change the Init() function to InitDerived(). The PowerCenter Server first calls the Init() function in the base class, TINFExternalModule60. When the Init() function successfully completes, the base class calls the InitDerived() function in the derived class. Do not call the Init() function in the base class from the InitDerived() function. Update the signature of the Dispatch() function. The Dispatch() function in the base class only includes one parameter, the procedure index. For details on the signature of the Dispatch() function and the return values for the Dispatch() function, see External Procedure Transformation in the Transformation Guide. Use the accessConfigEntriesList() function to get the configuration entries list. After you get the configuration entries list, you can access the initialization properties. You cannot use the direct member variable m_pINFConfigEntriesList.

6.

Recompile the DLL or shared library.

Changes to Version 6.0

The following list describes changes that apply to creating both external procedures and advanced external procedures effective in version 6.0:

infem60.h. PowerCenter and PowerMart include infem60.h instead of infem.h. Base class names. The base class names include a version suffix. They are called TINFExternalModule60 and TINFAdvancedExternalModule60. Code page functions. Infem60.h does not include the SetServerCodePageID() function. Use the SetDataCodePageID() function instead. Also, the GetServerCodePageID() and GetServerCodePageName() functions return the server code page. Initialization function. The PowerCenter Server calls the Init() function differently. The PowerCenter Server first calls the Init() function in the base class, TINFExternalModule60 or TINFAdvancedExternalModule60. When the Init() function successfully completes, the base class calls the InitDerived() function in the derived class. Do not call the Init() function in the base class from the InitDerived() function. Configuration list access. Use the accessConfigEntriesList() function to get the configuration entries list. You cannot use the direct member variable m_pINFConfigEntriesList.

The following list describes changes that only apply to creating external procedures in versions 6.0 and later:

Dispatch function. The Dispatch() method uses only one parameter, the procedure index. For details on the signature of the Dispatch() function and the return values for the Dispatch() function, see External Procedure Transformation in the Transformation Guide. INF_NO_OUTPUT_ROW return status. The Dispatch() method in external procedures interprets the INF_NO_OUTPUT_ROW return status differently. When the external procedure returns INF_NO_OUTPUT_ROW, the PowerCenter Server does not write the current row. This is not an error. When you use INF_NO_OUTPUT_ROW to filter rows, the External Procedure transformation behaves similarly to the Filter transformation.

266

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Changes to Later Versions

Informatica will remove some functions in a later version of PowerCenter. Table 14-4 lists the functions that Informatica will remove in a later version and the functions you should substitute:
Table 14-4. External Procedure Functions that Will Be Removed Existing Function long* TINFParam::GetpLong() double* TINFParam::GetpDouble() TINFTime* TINFParam::GetpTime() const char* TINFConfigEntriesList::GetConfigEntry(const char* LHS) const char* TINFConfigEntriesList::GetConfigEntry(int i) Substitute Functions GetLong() SetLong() GetDouble() SetDouble() GetTime() SetTime() GetConfigEntryValue() GetConfigEntryValue()

Upgrading External Procedure Transformations

267

Upgrading Advanced External Procedure Transformations

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2

Effective in PowerCenter 7.0, the Custom transformation replaces the Advanced External Procedure transformation. When you upgrade the repository, the upgrade process converts all Advanced External Procedure transformations to Custom transformations. When the upgrade process converts an Advanced External Procedure transformations to a Custom transformation, the Custom transformation is a non-blocking transformation. When you upgrade, you can use any DLL or shared library created with previous versions of PowerCenter and PowerMart if you do not need to recompile it. However, you cannot use Custom transformation features introduced with PowerCenter 7.0. To take advantage of the new features introduced in PowerCenter 7.0, you must recreate the procedure using the functions provided with the Custom transformation. You must recompile the following advanced external procedures:

Solaris. You must recompile Solaris procedures created with PowerCenter/PowerMart version 6.0 and earlier. To recompile Solaris advanced external procedures, edit the makefile.sol file, and use the following Solaris compiler:
Forte 6 Update 2, C++ 5.3 patch 111685-07

For details on editing the makefile, see Editing the Solaris Makefile on page 264.

AIX. You must recompile AIX procedures created with PowerCenter/PowerMart before version 7.0. To recompile AIX advanced external procedures, use the following compiler:
Visual Age C++, version 6.0 patch vacpp.60.oct2003.ptf.tar

Note: You can run upgraded advanced external procedures only on 32-bit PowerCenter

Servers. If you need to recompile the DLL or shared library, you must compile it using the following files:

Generated files. Use the files the Designer created when you generated the stub files in the previous version of PowerCenter/PowerMart:

atx<module_name>.h atx<module_name>.cpp <procedure_name>.cpp version.cpp stdafx.h readme.txt makefile.sol

268

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

makefile.hp makefile.aix

Header files. Use the header files shipped with the previous version of PowerCenter/ PowerMart:

infconfg.h infem.h infemdef.h infemmsg.h infparam.h infsigtr.h

Note: If you do not have the header files shipped with the previous version of PowerCenter/

PowerMart, contact Informatica Technical Support.

Library file(s). Use the library file(s) shipped with PowerCenter 7.1.1. Use the following files found in the PowerCenter Server bin directory:

libpmtx.so (Solaris, Linux) libpmtx.a (AIX) libpmtx.sl (HP) pmtx.dll and pmtx.lib (Windows)

For information on creating a procedure you can use with the Custom transformation, see Custom Transformation and Custom Transformation Functions in the Transformation Guide.

Upgrading Advanced External Procedure Transformations

269

Upgrading Custom Transformations

Applicable Versions: 7.0

When you upgrade, you must recompile any DLL or shared library for a Custom transformation created with previous versions of PowerCenter. To do this, you must verify the code conforms to the changes effective in PowerCenter 7.1, and then recompile the procedure using the header files included with this version.
To upgrade your Custom transformation procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Open the Custom transformation in the Transformation Developer of PowerCenter. Choose Transformation-Generate Code to generate the C files for the procedure. Open the p_<procedure_name>.c file in Visual Studio or another editor to modify the code for the procedure. Apply the same changes to the generated C file that you made to the file you generated in the previous version of PowerCenter. Modify the code as necessary to verify it conforms to the changes in version 7.1. Recompile the DLL or shared library.

Changes to Version 7.1

Effective in version 7.1, the PowerCenter Server processes a block of rows at a time. If a Custom transformation procedure depends on the PowerCenter Server processing one row at a time, the session output may differ from previous versions. If an upgraded mapping contains multiple Custom transformations that call the same procedure, the PowerCenter Server now calls the procedure in a different order. The order of rows that enter a specific transformation remains the same, but the order of rows passed to the procedure from the different transformation instances differs from previous releases. If the procedure maintains an internal state, such as a sequence, then the session output may change. The following list describes changes that apply to creating Custom transformation procedure effective in version 7.1:

You can only use the INFA_CTSetPassThruPort() function when the transformation scope is Row. You can no longer use it for any other transformation scope when the data access mode is row-based. The PowerCenter Server no longer calls the INFA_CTSetPassThruPort() function for input/output ports by default. You must add the INFA_CTSetPassThruPort() function for the ports that previously relied on the default pass through behavior.

270

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Using one of the data handling functions no longer cancels the INFA_CTSetPassThruPort() function. For a list of the data handling functions, see API Functions in the Transformation Guide. When you use the INFA_CTSetPassThruPort() function, do not use a data handling function for that port. When you use the INFA_CTRebindOutputDataType() function on an output or input/ output port, you must use the data handling functions to set the data and the indicator for that port. Also, when you use the INFA_CTRebindOutputDataType() function, do not call the INFA_CTSetPassThruPort() function for that port. By default, the row strategy for a Custom transformation is pass through when the transformation scope is Row. When the transformation scope is Transaction or All Input, the row strategy is the same value as the Treat Source Rows As session property by default. The default row strategy is no longer pass through for all Custom transformations. You no longer need to call the INFA_CTOutputNotification() function to output a row to the PowerCenter Server for passive Custom transformations. Effective in PowerCenter 7.1, the procedure outputs a row to the PowerCenter Server when the input row notification function gives a return value for passive Custom transformations. Verify the procedure code does not change the data pointers or deallocate the pointers between the output notification function call and the end of the input row notification function call. When the transformation scope is Row, you can only include the output notification function in the input row notification function. If you include it somewhere else, it returns a failure. Verify you specify the correct length for string and binary ports. When you specify an incorrect length, you get unexpected results. For example, the session may fail. Verify you the length you set for string and binary ports is not greater than the precision for that port. If you set the length greater than the port precision, you get unexpected results. For example, the session may fail. Do not use INFA_DATA_TOOLARGE in the set indicator function to indicate an overflow error for a column when you output a row. Instead, mark the row as an error. Do not use the eINFA_CTYPE_LONG datatype. Instead, use eINFA_CTYPE_INT32. Do not use the INFA_CT_SESSION_HAS_FATAL_ERROR handle property ID. The Custom transformation API no longer supports this property ID. If you need to determine if the session encountered a fatal error, use the INFA_CTIsTerminated() function or the deinitialization functions and check the session status.

Upgrading Custom Transformations

271

Upgrading $Source and $Target Variables

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1

In repository versions prior to PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, you could enter either $Source or $Target for the Location Information property in a Lookup transformation, or the Connection Information property in a Stored Procedure transformation. When you ran a session that used either variable, the PowerCenter Server determined at run time the connection information for $Source or $Target from the source or target connection specified in the session properties. Effective in PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0, you can define the database connection values the PowerCenter Server uses for the $Source and $Target properties. Configure the $Source Connection Value and $Target Connection Value properties on the General Options settings of the Properties tab in the session properties. When you upgrade a repository, the upgrade process enters database connection values for the $Source Connection Value and $Target Connection Value properties. The upgrade process uses a source or target database connection for the Lookup or Stored Procedure transformation using the variable. The following list describes how the upgrade process determines which database connection name to use for $Source Connection Value and $Target Connection Value:

When you use $Source and the mapping contains one relational source connection, the upgrade process enters the database connection name specified in the session as the value for the $Source Connection Value property. When you use $Source and the mapping contains multiple relational source connections, the upgrade process marks the session invalid and does not enter a database connection. When you use $Target, the upgrade process enters the database connection name specified in the session as the value for the $Target Connection Value property.

Note: If you specified a database connection variable ($DBConnectionName) for either the

source or target connection in the session properties, the upgrade process enters the database connection variable for either the $Source Connection Value or $Target Connection Value property.

272

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading TPump Date Format

Applicable Versions: 5.1.1 / 5.1.2 / 6.0

In previous versions of PowerCenter/PowerMart, sessions using the TPump external loader wrote data to the flat file target in the format MM/DD/YYYY. Effective in PowerCenter 6.1/ PowerMart 6.1, sessions that use TPump to load data to a target write data to the target flat file in the format YYYYMMDD. If you use a target update override that specifies the date format, you must change the date format from MM/DD/YYYY to YYYYMMDD in the target instance of the mapping.

Upgrading TPump Date Format

273

Creating Teradata TPump External Loader Connections

Applicable Versions: 5.1.1 / 5.1.2

In PowerCenter 5.1.1/PowerMart 5.1.1 and PowerCenter 5.1.2/PowerMart 5.1.2, you can use the Teradata TPump external loader to load data to Teradata databases. When you upgrade, the upgrade process can create a TPump external loader connection object for you. The upgrade process creates a TPump external loader connection object for each Teradata external loader connection where you set the external loader executable name to tpump, tpumpexe, or tpump.exe. If you set the Teradata external loader executable name to any other value, the upgrade process assumes the external loader type is Teradata MultiLoad, and it creates a MultiLoad connection object. When the upgrade process creates a TPump external loader connection object, it sets the attributes to the values you defined in the External Loader Definition in the Server Manager. TPump external loaders contain additional attributes that you specify in the control file in PowerCenter 5.1.1/PowerMart 5.1.1 and PowerCenter 5.1.2/PowerMart 5.1.2. The upgrade process sets these attributes to the following values by default:

Packing Factor: 20 Statement Rate: 0 Serialize: disabled Robust: disabled No monitor: enabled

For more information about the Teradata TPump external loader, see External Loading in the Workflow Administration Guide.

274

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Bulk Loading

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1

All Informix, DB2, ODBC, and Oracle sessions configured for bulk loading upgrade as normal load. Only Microsoft SQL Server and Sybase sessions configured for bulk loading will upgrade to bulk loading. For more information on bulk loading, see Working with Targets in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Bulk Loading

275

Upgrading Incremental Aggregation Files

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2 / 7.0

When you run an upgraded session using incremental aggregation for the first time, the PowerCenter Server upgrades the index and data cache files. If you want to partition a session using a mapping with incremental aggregation, the PowerCenter Server realigns the index and data cache files. For more information, see Upgrading Sessions for Partitioning on page 260.

276

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank Cache Properties

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0

This section includes information on upgrading Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank cache properties from PowerCenter 5.0/5.1/6.0 and PowerMart 5.0/5.1/6.0. The upgrade can impact the following cache properties:

Cache directory. Effective in PowerCenter 6.1/PowerMart 6.1, you can configure separate Rank and Aggregator transformation cache directories for sessions with multiple partitions. Cache size. Effective in PowerCenter 6.1/PowerMart 6.1, you configure the cache size for each cached transformation. For sessions with multiple partitions, you can configure the cache size per partition. Persistent cache. When you first run an upgraded session with a persistent lookup cache, the PowerCenter Server rebuilds the cache files.

For additional information on caching, see Session Caches in the Workflow Administration Guide. For additional information on upgrading Aggregator and Rank transformations, see Upgrading Sessions for Partitioning on page 260. For additional information on upgrading Lookup transformations, see Upgrading Lookup Transformations on page 281.

Upgrading from Versions 5.0 and 5.1

The upgrade process from PowerCenter 5.x/PowerMart 5.x changes properties for cache directories and cache sizes.

Upgrading Cache Directories

In PowerCenter/PowerMart versions 5.0/5.1, you specified a cache directory for each Aggregator and Rank transformation on the Transformations tab of the session properties. When you upgrade a session with multiple partitions, the session properties for Aggregator and Rank transformations upgrade to use the previously configured cache directory for every partition.

Upgrading Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank Cache Properties

277

Figure 14-24 shows the upgraded cache directory properties for a session with two partitions:
Figure 14-24. Upgraded Cache Directory Properties

Upgrade process creates cache directory property for each partition.

To improve session performance, you can specify a different directory for each partition. If you use incremental aggregation, and you change the directory for the first partition of an Aggregator transformation, you must also move the cache files to the new directory location. If you do not move the files, the PowerCenter Server rebuilds the cache files the next time you run a session. The PowerCenter Server realigns the files for the partition directories added by the upgrade process. For more information about cache partitioning with incremental aggregation, see Session Caches in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Cache Sizes

In PowerCenter 5.x/PowerMart 5.x, you configured index and data cache sizes for all Aggregator, Joiner, and Rank transformations in a session. When you upgrade, the session properties for each Aggregator, Joiner, and Rank transformation upgrade to use the previously configured cache size. To improve performance for sessions with one partition, calculate the required cache size for each transformation, and configure it separately for each Aggregator, Joiner, and Rank transformation on the Transformation tab of the session properties. To improve performance for PowerCenter sessions with multiple partitions, you can configure the Aggregator and Rank transformation cache sizes for each partition. Calculate the total requirements for each transformation and divide by the number of partitions.
278 Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

For information about calculating cache sizes, see Session Caches in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Persistent Lookup Caches

When you first run an upgraded session with a persistent lookup cache, the PowerCenter Server rebuilds the lookup cache files. The PowerCenter Server writes the following messages in the session log:
CMN_1720 The persistent lookup cache was created in a format that is incompatible with this release. CMN_1692 The lookup cache files will be refreshed from the database table.

Upgrading from Version 6.0

The upgrade process from PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0 changes properties for cache directories. The upgrade process does not change the cache size properties, but effective with PowerCenter 6.1 the caching behavior changes. The PowerCenter Server can partition caches so that each partition works with only the rows needed by that partition. As a result, the PowerCenter Server requires only a portion of total cache memory for each partition.

Upgrading Cache Directories

In PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0, you specified the cache directory for each Aggregator and Rank transformation in a session. When you upgrade a session with multiple partitions, the session properties for Aggregator and Rank transformations upgrade to contain the previously configured cache directory for every partition. Figure 14-24 on page 278 shows the upgraded cache directory properties for a session with two partitions. To improve session performance, you can specify a different directory for each partition. If you use incremental aggregation, and you change the directory for the first partition of an Aggregator transformation, you must also move the cache files to the new directory location. If you do not move the files, the PowerCenter Server rebuilds the cache files the next time you run the session. The PowerCenter Server realigns the files for the partition directories added by the upgrade process. For more information about cache partitioning with incremental aggregation, see Session Caches in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Cache Sizes

In PowerCenter 6.0/PowerMart 6.0, you configured index and data cache sizes for each cached transformation in the Designer and on the Transformations tab in the session properties. You can improve session performance by configuring the Aggregator and Rank transformation cache sizes for each partition. Calculate the total requirements for each transformation and divide by the number of partitions.

Upgrading Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank Cache Properties

279

For information about calculating cache sizes, see Session Caches in the Workflow Administration Guide.

Upgrading Persistent Lookup Caches

When you first run an upgraded session with a persistent lookup cache, the PowerCenter Server rebuilds the lookup cache files. The PowerCenter Server writes the following messages in the session log:
CMN_1720 The persistent lookup cache was created in a format that is incompatible with this release. CMN_1692 The lookup cache files will be refreshed from the database table.

280

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Upgrading Lookup Transformations

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1

If you are upgrading from PowerCenter 5.0.5/1 and PowerMart 5.0.5/1 and you have expressions that use the RTRIM function to remove trailing spaces in source data before passing it to a Lookup transformation, remove the RTRIM functions after you upgrade your repository. In repository versions prior to PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, the PowerCenter Server deleted trailing spaces in all string lookup columns unless you set the Treat CHAR as CHAR on Read option in the PowerCenter Server setup program to instruct the PowerCenter Server to retain trailing spaces when reading Char columns on a Microsoft SQL Server database. Effective with PowerCenter 6.0 and PowerMart 6.0, the PowerCenter Server reads trailing spaces in all string lookup columns and does not delete them. Also, the PowerCenter Server ignores the Treat CHAR as CHAR on Read option when it reads from a Microsoft SQL Server database.

Upgrading Lookup Transformations

281

Upgrading XML Definitions

Applicable Versions: 5.0 / 5.1 / 6.0 / 6.1 / 6.2 / 7.0

Effective with PowerCenter 7.0, Informatica provides support for XML schema validation for simple and complex datatypes and for namespaces. When you upgrade to version 7.1, the upgrade process makes the following changes to source and target XML definitions:

Namespaces. The upgrade process disables namespaces and removes prefixes associated with multiple namespaces in XML definitions. For more information, see Upgrading Namespaces on page 282. Circular references. The upgrade process upgrades XML definitions that contain circular references. In versions prior to 7.0, you specified the number of levels of recursion when creating XML definitions. The upgrade process upgrades these circular references as nonrecursive local elements. For more information, see Upgrading Circular References on page 283. Column names. The upgrade process converts relational column names to valid XML element names. For more information, see Upgrading Column Names on page 283. Datatypes. To accommodate schema support introduced in version 7.0, the upgrade process changes the datatypes in some XML definitions. For more information, see Upgrading XML Datatypes on page 283. Flush On Commit. When you upgrade MQSeries target XML definitions that have the Output XML on Flush/Commit attribute set, the upgrade process keeps this attribute set in 7.1. However, the PowerCenter Server fails any session that runs with this attribute. You must clear the attribute and use the On Commit attribute instead.

You cannot use namespaces for these upgraded XML definitions.

Upgrading Namespaces
Effective with version 7.0, PowerCenter supports XML schema namespaces. This allows you to use prefixes for elements and attributes. However, previous versions of PowerCenter/ PowerMart did not support namespaces and prefixes. When you upgrade to version 7.1, the upgrade process disables namespaces in upgraded XML source and target definitions, so the PowerCenter Server cannot validate these sources or targets against an XML schema. When you upgrade a repository with unsupported XML definitions from a previous version of PowerCenter/PowerMart, the repository issues a warning to the upgrade log. The upgrade process also removes prefixes from elements and attributes. Removing prefixes from an XML map can result in two or more identical XML maps. The upgrade process cannot upgrade the XML definition when it encounters identical XML maps and issues an error message to the upgrade log. Informatica recommends that you reimport the XML definitions after the repository upgrade to ensure that the data is valid.

282

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

If the upgrade process creates a circular reference when it removes prefixes from elements or attributes, PowerCenter considers the circular reference to be a new circular reference and you cannot use the XML definition.
Note: If you edit upgraded sources or targets containing prefixes or namespaces, you may get

unexpected results. If you need to edit upgraded sources or targets, Informatica recommends you reimport the definitions.

Upgrading Circular References

Effective with version 7.1, Informatica supports circular references. The upgrade process converts XML definitions with circular references differently depending on the version:

Version 7.0. In version 7.0, PowerCenter did not support the circular reference hierarchy in XML definitions. When you imported an XML file with circular references, PowerCenter supported the first level and dropped any other levels of recursion. Upgraded XML definitions containing circular references contain only the first level of the circular reference. If you want to use the elements as circular references, you must reimport the XML definition Versions 6.x and earlier. In versions prior to 7.0, you could import XML definitions with circular references if you specified the number of levels of recursion. When running a session, the PowerCenter Server dropped any levels of recursion that were not specified in the XML definition. When you upgrade XML definitions containing circular references, the upgrade process creates the circular references as non-recursive local declarations. If you want to use the circular references in the source file, you must reimport the XML definition.

Upgrading Column Names

Previous versions of PowerCenter allowed you to import any relational column names to generate XML schemas. Effective with version 7.0, the upgrade process converts relational column names to valid XML element names. If the upgrade process finds invalid characters in element names for an XML definition, it does not upgrade the definition. You must manually recreate the XML definition.

Upgrading XML Datatypes

The upgrade process converts datatypes for some XML definitions. It converts datatypes that PowerCenter no longer supports and datatypes that now map to a different transformation datatype. The changes in datatype conversion are as follows:

No longer supported. Effective in version 7.0, PowerCenter no longer supports some previously supported datatypes. To maintain valid mappings in version 7.1, the upgrade process converts these datatypes to the transformation datatype of the previous

Upgrading XML Definitions

283

PowerCenter version. For example, the XML Century datatype upgrades to the transformation string datatype.
Note : Binary datatype upgrades to string, rather than text.

Changed transformation datatype. Effective with version 7.0, PowerCenter associates different transformation datatypes with some XML datatypes. To maintain valid mappings in version 7.1, the upgrade process converts these XML datatypes to the newly mapped datatype.

If you import deprecated or upgraded XML datatypes from PowerCenter versions previous to 7.0, the import process converts the XML datatype to an upgraded datatype. Table 14-5 shows the XML datatypes that the upgrade process converts:
Table 14-5. Upgraded XML Datatypes XML Datatype Binary Boolean Century Date Long Month NegativeInteger NonNegativeInteger NonPositiveInteger Nstring Number PositiveInteger Recurring date Recurring day Recurring duration Time Time duration Time instant Time period Unsigned int UnsignedLong Upgraded Datatype String String String String Decimal String String String String String Decimal String String String String String String Date/Time Date/Time Decimal Decimal Reason for Conversion No longer supported. Changed transformation datatype. No longer supported. Changed transformation datatype. Changed transformation datatype. No longer supported. Changed transformation datatype. Changed transformation datatype. Changed transformation datatype. No longer supported. No longer supported. Changed transformation datatype. No longer supported. No longer supported. No longer supported. Changed transformation datatype. No longer supported. No longer supported. No longer supported. Changed transformation datatype. Changed transformation datatype.

284

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Table 14-5. Upgraded XML Datatypes XML Datatype uriReference Year Upgraded Datatype String String Reason for Conversion No longer supported. No longer supported.

For more information on XML and transformation datatypes, see Datatype Reference in the the XML User Guide.

Upgrading XML Definitions

285

Upgrading Transaction Control Mappings

Applicable Versions: 6.1 / 6.2

Effective with PowerCenter 7.0, the Designer no longer allows you to concatenate pipelines or pipeline branches containing a Transaction Control transformation. When you upgrade to version 7.1, the upgrade process does not invalidate mappings that contain concatenated pipeline branches with Transaction Control transformations. However, the PowerCenter Client invalidates these mappings when you validate or save the mapping or session. The PowerCenter Server fails sessions that use these mappings if you do not update the mapping to be valid. To create valid mappings, you need to move the Transaction Control transformation before or after the concatenation. If you want to import one of these mappings from version 6.0 to version 7.1, you must edit the mapping in version 6.0 before you export it. The following examples show how to update mappings with Transaction Control transformations that the upgrade process invalidated.

Example 1
The following mapping is invalid because it contains two concatenated pipeline branches with a Transaction Control transformation:

286

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

To make a valid mapping, you can create a single pipeline branch with no concatenation. You can place the Transaction Control transformation before or after the Expression transformation:

Example 2
The following mapping is also invalid because it contains multiple concatenated pipeline branches with a Transaction Control transformation:

To create a valid mapping, you can remove the Transaction Control transformation from the concatenated pipeline branch. The pipeline still has concatenated branches, but it does not contain a branch that concatenates a Transaction Control transformation:

Upgrading Transaction Control Mappings

287

288

Chapter 14: Upgrading Repository Metadata

Chapter 15

Connecting to Databases from Windows

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 290 Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database, 291 Connecting to an Informix Database, 293 Connecting to Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel, 295 Connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server Database, 296 Connecting to an Oracle Database, 298 Connecting to a Sybase Database, 300 Connecting to a Teradata Database, 302 Troubleshooting, 304

289

Overview
The Repository Server uses native drivers to communicate with the repository database. The PowerCenter Server uses either native drivers or ODBC to communicate with databases. Informatica recommends using native database drivers. The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC. For more information on ODBC connections, see Understanding Connectivity on page 59. For more information about ODBC calls, see ODBC Calls on page 327. The following sections provide guidelines for connecting to the supported databases from a Windows machine.

290

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database

You must install and configure database client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, use 32-bit database client libraries only. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with IBM DB2. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create an IBM DB2 repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with IBM DB2. PowerCenter Client. Install or verify you have installed IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) on each PowerCenter Client machine accessing IBM DB2. The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC to communicate with IBM DB2.

You must install the IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) version that is compatible with your IBM DB2 database server. To verify compatibility, contact IBM.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure native connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an IBM DB2 database: 1.

Verify that the following environment variable settings have been established by DB2 Client Application Enabler:
DB2HOME=C:\SQLLIB (directory where the client is installed) DB2INSTANCE = DB2 DB2CODEPAGE = 437 (Sometimes required. Use only if you encounter problems).

2.

Verify that the PATH environment variable includes the DB2 bin directory. For example:
PATH=C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32;C:\SQLLIB\BIN;...

3.

Configure the IBM DB2 client to connect to the database that you want to access.

Launch the Client Configuration Assistant. Add the database connection and BIND the connection.

4.

Verify that you can connect to the DB2 database. Run the DB2 Command Line Processor and issue the command:
CONNECT TO <dbalias> USER <username> USING <password>

Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database

291

If the connection is successful, disconnect and clean up with the TERMINATE command. If the connection fails, refer to your database documentation.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure ODBC. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an IBM DB2 database using ODBC: 1. 2.

Install the IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) and configure native connectivity. Create an ODBC data source using the driver provided by IBM. Do not use the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver for DB2 provided by Informatica. For specific instructions on creating an ODBC data source using the IBM DB2 ODBC driver, refer to your database documentation.

3.

Verify that you can connect to the DB2 database using the ODBC data source. If the connection fails, refer to your database documentation.

292

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

Connecting to an Informix Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, use 32-bit database client libraries only. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed ESQL for C, Informix Client SDK, or any other Informix client software on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. Also, install compatible versions of ESQL/runtime or iconnect. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Informix. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed ESQL for C, Informix Client SDK, or any other Informix client software on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create an Informix repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Informix. PowerCenter Client. Install or verify that you have installed ESQL for C, Informix Client SDK, or any other Informix client software on each PowerCenter Client machine accessing Informix. The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC to communicate with Informix.

You must install the ESQL/C version that is compatible with your Informix database server. To verify compatibility, contact Informix.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure native connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an Informix database: 1.

Set environment variables for INFORMIXDIR, DBDATE, and DBMONEY: INFORMIXDIR. Verify that the INFORMIXDIR environment variable is set. For example:
INFORMIXDIR=C:\Informix

DBDATE. Verify that DBDATE is set to the default value, MDY4/. DBMONEY. Set DBMONEY environment variable to ensure that Informix does not prefix the data with the dollar sign ($).
DBMONEY=' .' 2.

Verify that the PATH environment variable includes the INFORMIXDIR\bin directory. For example:
PATH=C:\Informix\bin;....

3.

Launch Informix SetNet32, and configure the Informix client to connect to the database that you want to access.
Connecting to an Informix Database 293

You may need to ask your Informix administrator for the following entries for the Server Information tab:

Protocol Name. Enter the protocol the Informix database server uses, usually onsoctcp. Service Name. Enter the service name the Informix server uses. The Informix server must also be defined in the services file. You might find the services file in the following location:
%WINDIR%\System32\Drivers\etc\Services

A sample entry in the services file might look like the following entry:
inflsnr 4. 1525/tcp

Ask your database administrator to enable transaction logging from each repository database. Perform a level-0 archive using ontape. Use the following syntax:
ontape -s -B <dbname>

This command performs the archive and turns buffered logging on at the same time. You can also create the database with logging turned on. You can set logging to buffered or unbuffered.
5.

Verify that you can connect to the Informix database. To connect to the database, launch dbping and enter the necessary information. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you correctly entered all of the connectivity information. The syntax for the connect string is dbname@servername. User names and database names may be case-sensitive.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure ODBC. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an Informix database using ODBC: 1. 2.

Install the Informix client and configure native connectivity. Create an ODBC data source using the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver for Informix provided by Informatica.

294

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

Connecting to Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed Microsoft Access or Excel on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. You must also create an ODBC data source to connect to a database. PowerCenter Client. Install or verify that you have installed Microsoft Access or Excel on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Client. You must also create an ODBC data source to connect to a database.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your Microsoft Access or Excel documentation.
To connect to an Access or Excel database: 1. 2.

Create an ODBC data source using the driver provided by Microsoft. To avoid using empty string or nulls, use the reserved words PmNullUser for the user name and PmNullPasswd for the password when you create a database connection in the Workflow Manager.

Connecting to Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel

295

Connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, use 32-bit database client libraries only. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed SQL Client, including the Microsoft OLE DB provider for Microsoft SQL Server, on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Microsoft SQL Server. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed SQL Client, including the Microsoft OLE DB provider, on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create a Microsoft SQL Server repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Microsoft SQL Server. PowerCenter Client. Install or verify that you have installed SQL Client, including the Microsoft OLE DB provider for Microsoft SQL Server, on each PowerCenter Client machine accessing Microsoft SQL Server. The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC to communicate with Microsoft SQL Server.

You must install an SQL Client version that is compatible with your Microsoft SQL Server database server. To verify compatibility, contact Microsoft.
Note: PowerCenter can communicate with Microsoft SQL Server 7.0, with Service Pack 1 or

later, and later versions of Microsoft SQL Server.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure native connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a Microsoft SQL Server database: 1. 2.

Verify that the Microsoft SQL Server home directory is set. Verify that the PATH environment variable includes the Microsoft SQL Server directory. For example:
PATH=C:\MSSQL\BIN;C:\MSSQL\BINN;....

3.

Configure the Microsoft SQL Server client to connect to the database that you want to access. Launch the Client Network Utility. On the General tab, verify that the Default Network Library matches the default network for your Microsoft SQL Server database.

4.

Verify that you can connect to the Microsoft SQL Server database.

296

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

To connect to the database, launch ISQL_w, and enter the connectivity information. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you correctly entered all of the connectivity information.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure ODBC. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to the Microsoft SQL Server documentation.
To connect to a Microsoft SQL Server database using ODBC: 1. 2.

Install the Microsoft SQL Server client and configure native connectivity. Create an ODBC data source using the driver provided by Microsoft. Do not use the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver for Microsoft SQL Server provided by Informatica. To ensure consistent data in Microsoft SQL Server repositories, clear the Create temporary stored procedures for prepared SQL statements option in the Create a New Data Source to SQL Server dialog box. Figure 15-1 shows the dialog box for the Microsoft SQL Server ODBC setup:
Figure 15-1. ODBC Microsoft SQL Server Setup

Clear Create temporary stored procedures for prepared SQL statements and drop the stored procedures.

If you have difficulty clearing the temporary stored procedures for prepared SQL statements options, see the Informatica Webzine for more information about configuring Microsoft SQL Server. You can access the webzine at http://my.Informatica.com.
3.

Verify that you can connect to the Microsoft SQL Server database using the ODBC data source. If the connection fails, refer to your database documentation.

Connecting to a Microsoft SQL Server Database

297

Connecting to an Oracle Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, use 32-bit database client libraries only. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Oracle client on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Oracle. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Oracle client on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create an Oracle repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Oracle. PowerCenter Client. Install or verify that you have installed the Oracle client on each PowerCenter Client machine accessing Oracle. The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC to connect to Oracle.

You must install compatible versions of the Oracle client and Oracle database server. You must also install the same version of the Oracle client on each machine hosting PowerCenter and the Oracle database server. To verify compatibility, contact Oracle.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure native connectivity using Oracle Net Services or Net8. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an Oracle database: 1.

Verify that the Oracle home directory is set. For example:

ORACLE_HOME=C:\Oracle

2.

Verify that the PATH environment variable includes the Oracle bin directory. For example, if you install Net8, your path might include the following entry:
PATH=C:\ORANT\BIN;

3.

Configure the Oracle client to connect to the database that you want to access. Launch SQL*Net Easy Configuration Utility or edit an existing tnsnames.ora file to the home directory and modify it as needed. The tnsnames.ora file is stored in the $ORACLE_HOME\network\admin directory. Enter the correct syntax for the Oracle connect string, typically databasename.world. Make sure the SID entered here matches the database server instance ID defined on the Oracle server.

298

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

Following is a sample tnsnames.ora. You need to enter the information for your database.
mydatabase.world = (DESCRIPTION (ADDRESS_LIST = (ADDRESS = (COMMUNITY = mycompany.world (PROTOCOL = TCP) (Host = mymachine) (Port = 1521) ) ) (CONNECT_DATA = (SID = MYORA7) (GLOBAL_NAMES = mydatabase.world) 4.

Set the NLS_LANG environment variable to the locale (language, territory, and character set) you want the database client and server to use with your login. The value of this variable depends on your configuration. For example, if the value is american_america.UTF8, you must set the variable as follows:
NLS_LANG=american_america.UTF8;

To determine the value of this variable, contact your Administrator.

5.

Verify that you can connect to the Oracle database. To connect to the database, launch SQL*Plus and enter the connectivity information. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you correctly entered all of the connectivity information. Use the connect string as defined in tnsnames.ora.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure ODBC. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an Oracle database using ODBC: 1. 2. 3.

Install the Oracle client and configure native connectivity. Create an ODBC data source using the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver for Oracle provided by Informatica. Verify that you can connect to the Oracle database using the ODBC data source.

Connecting to an Oracle Database

299

Connecting to a Sybase Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, use 32-bit database client libraries only. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed Open Client on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Sybase. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed Open Client on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create a Sybase repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Sybase.
Note: If you want to create, restore, or upgrade a Sybase repository, set allow nulls by default

to TRUE at the database level. Setting this option changes the default null type of the column to null in compliance with the SQL standard.

PowerCenter Client. Install or verify that you have installed Open Client on each PowerCenter Client machine accessing Sybase. The PowerCenter Client uses ODBC to communicate with Sybase.

You must install an Open Client version that is compatible with your Sybase database server. You must also install the same version of Open Client on the machines hosting the Sybase database and PowerCenter. To verify compatibility, contact Sybase.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure native connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a Sybase database: 1.

Verify that the SYBASE environment variable refers to the Sybase directory. For example:
SYBASE=C:\SYBASE

2.

Verify that the PATH environment variable includes the Sybase directory. For example:
PATH=C:\SYBASE\BIN;C:\SYBASE\DLL

3.

Configure Sybase Open Client to connect to the database that you want to access. Use SQLEDIT to configure the Sybase client, or copy an existing SQL.INI file (located in the %SYBASE%\INI directory) and make any necessary changes. Select NLWNSCK as the Net-Library driver and include the Sybase server name.

300

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

Enter the host name and port number for the Sybase server. If you do not know the host name and port number, check with your system administrator.
4.

Verify that you can connect to the Sybase database. To connect to the database, launch ISQL and enter the connectivity information. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you correctly entered all of the connectivity information. User names and database names are case-sensitive.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure ODBC. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a Sybase database using ODBC: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Install the Sybase client and configure native connectivity. Create an ODBC data source using the DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver for Sybase provided by Informatica. On the Performance tab, set Prepare Method to 2-Full. This ensures consistent data in the repository, optimizes performance, and reduces overhead on tempdb. Verify that you can connect to the Sybase database using the ODBC data source.

Connecting to a Sybase Database

301

Connecting to a Teradata Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, use 32-bit database client libraries only. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on Windows:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Teradata client, the Teradata ODBC driver, and any other Teradata client software you might need on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. You must also configure ODBC connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Teradata client, the Teradata ODBC driver, and any other Teradata client software you might need on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create a Teradata repository. You must also configure ODBC connectivity. PowerCenter Client. Install or verify that you have installed the Teradata client, the Teradata ODBC driver, and any other Teradata client software you might need on each PowerCenter Client machine accessing Teradata. You must also configure ODBC connectivity.

Note: Based on a recommendation from Teradata, Informatica uses ODBC to connect to

Teradata. ODBC is a native interface for Teradata.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a Teradata database: 1.

Create an ODBC data source for each Teradata database that you want to access. To create the ODBC data source, use the driver provided by Teradata. Create a System DSN if you start your Repository Server or PowerCenter Server service with a Local System account logon. Create a User DSN if you select the This account log on option to start your Repository Server or PowerCenter Server.

2.

Enter the name for the new ODBC data source and the name of the Teradata server or its IP address. To configure a connection to a single Teradata database, enter the DefaultDatabase name. To create a single connection to the default database, enter the user name and password. To connect to multiple databases, using the same ODBC data source, leave the DefaultDatabase field and the user name and password fields empty.

3. 4.

Configure Date Options in the Options dialog box. In the Teradata Options dialog box, specify AAA for DateTime Format. Configure Session Mode in the Options dialog box.

302

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

When you create a target data source, choose ANSI session mode. If you choose ANSI session mode, Teradata does not roll back the transaction when it encounters a row error. If you choose Teradata session mode, Teradata rolls back the transaction when it encounters a row error. In Teradata mode, The PowerCenter Server cannot detect the rollback, and does not report this in the session log.
5.

Verify that you can connect to the Teradata database. To test the connection, use a Teradata client program, such as WinDDI, BTEQ, Teradata Administrator, or Teradata SQL Assistant.

Connecting to a Teradata Database

303

Troubleshooting
PowerCenter Clients do not accurately display non-ASCII characters. Set the NLS_LANG environment variable to the locale (language, territory, and character set) you want the database client and server to use with your login. The value of this variable depends on your configuration. For example, if the value is american_america.UTF8, you must set the variable as follows:
NLS_LANG=american_america.UTF8;

To determine the value of this variable, contact your Administrator.

304

Chapter 15: Connecting to Databases from Windows

Chapter 16

Connecting to Databases from UNIX

This chapter includes the following topics:

Overview, 306 Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database, 307 Connecting to an Informix Database, 310 Connecting to an Oracle Database, 313 Connecting to a Sybase Database, 316 Connecting to a Teradata Database, 318 Connecting to an ODBC Data Source, 321

305

Overview
The Repository Server uses native drivers to communicate with the repository database. The PowerCenter Server uses either native drivers or ODBC to communicate with databases. Informatica recommends using native database drivers. You need to configure the Repository Server to communicate with the database server managing each repository database. You also need to configure the PowerCenter Server to communicate with each database that you want to access. To connect to a database, you must install and configure native database client connectivity software on the machine hosting the Repository Server or PowerCenter Server. To ensure compatibility between the PowerCenter Server, the Repository Server, and a repository database, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64-bit Platforms on page 70.
Note: On Linux, you can use native drivers to connect to IBM DB2, Oracle, or Sybase

databases. You can connect to other sources and targets using ODBC. You cannot connect to Teradata or Informix from Linux. The following sections provide guidelines for connecting to the supported databases from UNIX.

306

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64bit Platforms on page 70. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on UNIX:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with IBM DB2. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create an IBM DB2 repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with IBM DB2.

You must install the IBM DB2 Client Application Enabler (CAE) version that is compatible with your IBM DB2 database server. To verify compatibility, contact IBM.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a DB2 database: 1. 2.

To configure connectivity to the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server, log on to the machine as a user who can start the server process. Set the DB2INSTANCE, INSTHOME, DB2DIR, and PATH environment variables. The UNIX IBM DB2 software always has an associated user login, often db2admin, which serves as a holder for database configurations. This user holds the instance for DB2. The following environment variables enable access to the instance. DB2INSTANCE. The name of the instance holder. Using a Bourne shell:
$ DB2INSTANCE=db2admin; export DB2INSTANCE

Using a C shell:
$ setenv DB2INSTANCE db2admin

INSTHOME. This is db2admin home directory path. Using a Bourne shell:

$ INSTHOME=~db2admin

Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database

307

Using a C shell:
$ setenv INSTHOME ~db2admin>

DB2DIR. Set the variable to point to the IBM DB2 CAE installation directory. For example, if the client is installed in the /opt/IBMdb2/v6.1 directory: Using a Bourne shell:
$ DB2DIR=/opt/IBMdb2/v6.1; export DB2DIR

Using a C shell:
$ setenv DB2DIR /opt/IBMdb2/v6.1

PATH. To run the IBM DB2 command line programs, set the variable to include the DB2 bin directory. Using a Bourne shell:
$ PATH=${PATH}:$DB2DIR/bin; export PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv PATH ${PATH}:$DB2DIR/bin 3.

Set the shared library variable to include the DB2 lib directory. The IBM DB2 client software contains a number of shared library components that the PowerCenter Server and the Repository Server load dynamically. To locate the shared libraries during run time, set the shared library environment variable. The shared library path must also include the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server install directory (server_dir). Set the shared library environment variable based on the operating system. The following table lists the shared library variables for each operating system:
Operating System Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH

For example, use the following syntax for Solaris and Linux:

Using a Bourne shell:

$ LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$DB2DIR/lib; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$DB2DIR/lib

4.

Edit the .cshrc or .profile to include the complete set of shell commands. Save the file and either log out and log in again, or issue the source command.

308

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Using a Bourne shell:

$ source .profile

Using a C shell:
$ source .cshrc 5.

If the DB2 database resides on the same machine as the Repository Server or PowerCenter Server, configure the DB2 instance as a remote instance. Run the following command to verify if there is a remote entry for the database:
DB2 LIST DATABASE DIRECTORY

The command lists all the databases that the DB2 client can access and their configuration properties. If this command lists an entry for Directory entry type of Remote, go to step 6. If the database is not configured as remote, run the following command to verify whether or not a TCP/IP node is cataloged for the host:
DB2 LIST NODE DIRECTORY

If the node name is empty, you can create one when you set up a remote database. Use the following command to set up a remote database and, if needed, create a node:
db2 CATALOG TCPIP NODE <nodename> REMOTE <hostname_or_address> SERVER <port number>

Issue the following command to catalog the database:

db2 CATALOG DATABASE <dbname> as <dbalias> at NODE <nodename>

For more information about these commands, refer to your database documentation.
6.

Verify that you can connect to the DB2 database. Run the DB2 Command Line Processor and issue the command:
CONNECT TO <dbalias> USER <username> USING <password>

If the connection is successful, clean up with the CONNECT RESET or TERMINATE command.

Connecting to an IBM DB2 Universal Database

309

Connecting to an Informix Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64bit Platforms on page 70. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on UNIX:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed ESQL for C, Informix Client SDK, or any other Informix client software on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. Also, install compatible versions of ESQL/runtime or iconnect. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Informix. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed ESQL for C, Informix Client SDK, or any other Informix client software on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create an Informix repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Informix.

You must install the ESQL/C version that is compatible with your Informix database server. To verify compatibility, contact Informix.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an Informix database: 1. 2.

To configure connectivity to the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server, log on to the machine as a user who can start the server process. Set the INFORMIXDIR, INFORMIXSERVER, DBMONEY, and PATH environment variables. INFORMIXDIR. Set the variable to the directory where the database client is installed. For example, if the client is installed in the /databases/informix directory: Using a Bourne shell:
$ INFORMIXDIR=/databases/informix; export INFORMIXDIR

Using a C shell:
$ setenv INFORMIXDIR /databases/informix

INFORMIXSERVER. Set the variable to the name of the server. For example, if the name of the Informix server is INFSERVER: Using a Bourne shell:
$ INFORMIXSERVER=INFSERVER; export INFORMIXSERVER

310

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Using a C shell:
$ setenv INFORMIXSERVER INFSERVER

DBMONEY. Set the variable so Informix does not prefix the data with the dollar sign ($) for money datatypes. Using a Bourne shell:
$ DBMONEY=' .'; export DBMONEY

Using a C shell:
$ setenv DBMONEY=' .'

PATH. To run the Informix command line programs, set the variable to include the Informix bin directory. Using a Bourne shell:
$ PATH=${PATH}:$INFORMIXDIR/bin; export PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv PATH ${PATH}:$INFORMIXDIR/bin 3.

Set the shared library path to include the Informix lib directory. The Informix client software contains a number of shared library components that the PowerCenter Server and the Repository Server load dynamically. To locate the shared libraries during run time, set the shared library environment variable. The shared library path must also include the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server install directory (server_dir). Set the shared library environment variable based on the operating system. The following table lists the shared library variables for each operating system:
Operating System Solaris AIX HP-UX Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH

For example, use the following syntax for Solaris:

Using a Bourne shell:

$ LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$INFORMIXDIR/ lib:$INFORMIXDIR/lib/esql; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/ server_dir:$INFORMIXDIR/lib:$INFORMIXDIR/lib/esql

4.

Ask your database administrator to enable transaction logging for each repository database. Perform a level-0 archive using ontape. The syntax is:
ontape -s -B <dbname>

Connecting to an Informix Database

311

This command performs the archive and turns buffered logging on at the same time.
5. 6. 7.

Optionally, set the $ONCONFIG environment variable to the Informix configuration file name. If you plan to call Informix stored procedures in mappings, set all of the date parameters to the Informix datatype Datetime year to fraction(5). Make sure the DBDATE environment variable is not set. For example, to check if DBDATE is set, you might type the following at a UNIX prompt:
$ env | grep -i DBDATE

If DBDATE=MDY2/ appears, unset DBDATE by typing:

$ unsetenv DBDATE 8.

Edit the .cshrc or .profile to include the complete set of shell commands. Save the file and either log out and log in again, or issue the source command. Using a Bourne shell:
$ source .profile

Using a C shell:
$ source .cshrc 9. 10.

Verify that the Informix server name is defined in the $INFORMIXDIR/etc/sqlhosts file. Verify that the Service (last column entry for the server named in the sqlhosts file) is defined in the services file (usually /etc/services). If not, define the Informix Services name in the Services file. Enter the Services name and port number. The default port number is 1525, which should work in most cases. See your Informix and UNIX documentation for details.

11.

Verify that you can connect to the Informix database. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you have correctly entered all the information.

312

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Connecting to an Oracle Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64bit Platforms on page 70. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on UNIX:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Oracle client on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Oracle. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Oracle client on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create an Oracle repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Oracle.

You must install compatible versions of Oracle client and Oracle database server. You must also install the same version of the Oracle client on each machine hosting PowerCenter and the Oracle database server. To verify compatibility, contact Oracle.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to connect to an Oracle database through Oracle Net Services or Net8. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to an Oracle database: 1. 2.

To configure connectivity to the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server, log on to the machine as a user who can start the server process. Set the ORACLE_HOME, NLS_LANG, TNS_ADMIN, and PATH environment variables. ORACLE_HOME. Set the variable to the Oracle client installation directory. For example, if the client is installed in the /HOME2/oracle directory: Using a Bourne shell:
$ ORACLE_HOME=/HOME2/oracle; export ORACLE_HOME

Using a C shell:
$ setenv ORACLE_HOME /HOME2/oracle

NLS_LANG. Set the variable to the locale (language, territory, and character set) you want the database client and server to use with your login. The value of this variable depends on your configuration. For example, if the value is american_america.UTF8, you must set the variable as follows: Using a Bourne shell:
$ NLS_LANG=american_america.UTF8; export NLS_LANG

Connecting to an Oracle Database

313

Using a C shell:
$ NLS_LANG american_america.UTF8

To determine the value of this variable, contact your Administrator. TNS_ADMIN. Set the variable to the directory where the tnsnames.ora file resides. For example, if the file is in the /HOME2/oracle/network/admin directory: Using a Bourne shell:
$ TNS_ADMIN=$HOME2/oracle/network/admin; export TNS_ADMIN

Using a C shell:
$ setenv TNS_ADMIN=$HOME2/oracle/network/admin

Setting the TNS_ADMIN is optional, and might vary depending on your configuration. PATH. To run the Oracle command line programs, set the variable to include the Oracle bin directory. Using a Bourne shell:
$ PATH=${PATH}:$ORACLE_HOME/bin; export PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv PATH ${PATH}:ORACLE_HOME/bin 3.

Set the shared library environment variable. The Oracle client software contains a number of shared library components that the PowerCenter Server and the Repository Server load dynamically. To locate the shared libraries during run time, set the shared library environment variable. The shared library path must also include the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server install directory (server_dir). Set the shared library environment variable based on the operating system. The following table lists the shared library variables for each operating system:
Operating System Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH

For example, use the following syntax for Solaris and Linux:

Using a Bourne shell:

$ LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$ORACLE_HOME/lib; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

314

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Using a C shell:
$ setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/ server_dir:$ORACLE_HOME/lib

4.

Edit the .cshrc or .profile to include the complete set of shell commands. Save the file and either log out and log in again, or issue the source command. Using a Bourne shell:
$ source .profile

Using a C shell:
$ source .cshrc 5.

Verify that the Oracle client is configured to access the database. Use the SQL*Net Easy Configuration Utility or copy an existing tnsnames.ora file to the home directory and modify it as needed. The tnsnames.ora file is stored in the $ORACLE_HOME/network/admin directory. Enter the correct syntax for the Oracle connect string, typically databasename.world. Here is a sample tnsnames.ora. You need to enter the information for your database.
mydatabase.world = (DESCRIPTION (ADDRESS_LIST = (ADDRESS = (COMMUNITY = mycompany.world (PROTOCOL = TCP) (Host = mymachine) (Port = 1521) ) ) (CONNECT_DATA = (SID = MYORA7) (GLOBAL_NAMES = mydatabase.world)

6.

Verify that you can connect to the Oracle database. To connect to the Oracle database, launch SQL*Plus and enter the connectivity information. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you correctly entered all of the connectivity information. Enter the correct user name and connect string as defined in tnsnames.ora.

Connecting to an Oracle Database

315

Connecting to a Sybase Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64bit Platforms on page 70. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on UNIX:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed Open Client on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. The PowerCenter Server uses either native connectivity or ODBC to communicate with Sybase. Informatica recommends using native connectivity. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed Open Client on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create a Sybase repository. The Repository Server uses native connectivity to communicate with Sybase.
Note: If you want to create, restore, or upgrade a Sybase repository, set allow nulls by default

to TRUE at the database level. Setting this option changes the default null type of the column to null in compliance with the SQL standard. You must install Open Client version that is compatible with your Sybase database server. You must also install the same version of Open Client on the machines hosting the Sybase database and PowerCenter. To verify compatibility, contact Sybase.

Configuring Native Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to connect to a Sybase database. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a Sybase database: 1. 2.

To configure connectivity to the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server, log on to the machine as a user who can start the server process. Set the SYBASE and PATH environment variables. SYBASE. Set the variable to the Sybase Open Client installation directory. For example if the client is installed in the /usr/sybase directory: Using a Bourne shell:
$ SYBASE=/usr/sybase; export SYBASE

Using a C shell:
$ setenv SYBASE /usr/sybase

PATH. To run the Sybase command line programs, set the variable to include the Sybase bin directory. Using a Bourne shell:
$ PATH=${PATH}:/usr/sybase/bin; export PATH

316

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Using a C shell:
$ setenv PATH ${PATH}:/usr/sybase/bin 3.

Set the shared library environment variable. The Sybase Open Client software contains a number of shared library components that the PowerCenter Server and the Repository Server load dynamically. To locate the shared libraries during run time, set the shared library environment variable. The shared library path must also include the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server install directory (server_dir). Set the shared library environment variable based on the operating system. The following table lists the shared library variables for each operating system.
Operating System Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH

For example, use the following syntax for Solaris and Linux:

Using a Bourne shell:

$ LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$SYBASE/lib; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$SYBASE/lib

4.

Edit the .cshrc or .profile to include the complete set of shell commands. Save the file and either log out and log in again, or issue the source command. Using a Bourne shell:
$ source .profile

Using a C shell:
$ source .cshrc 5. 6.

Verify the Sybase server name in the Sybase interfaces file (stored in the $SYBASE directory). Verify that you can connect to the Sybase database. To connect to the Sybase database, launch ISQL and enter the connectivity information. If you fail to connect to the database, verify that you correctly entered all of the connectivity information. User names and database names are case-sensitive.

Connecting to a Sybase Database

317

Connecting to a Teradata Database

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64bit Platforms on page 70. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on UNIX:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Teradata BTEQ client software, the Teradata ODBC driver, and any other Teradata client software you may need on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. Repository Server. Install or verify that you have installed the Teradata BTEQ client software, the Teradata ODBC driver, and any other Teradata client software you may need on the machine hosting the Repository Server if you create a Teradata repository.

Note: Based on recommendation from Teradata, Informatica uses ODBC to connect to

Teradata. ODBC is a native interface for Teradata. Teradata does not have an ODBC driver for Linux.

Configuring ODBC Connectivity

Use the following steps as a guideline to configure connectivity. For specific connectivity instructions, refer to your database documentation.
To connect to a Teradata database on UNIX: 1. 2.

To configure connectivity to the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server, log on to the machine as a user who can start the server process. Set the TERADATA_HOME, ODBCHOME, and PATH environment variables. TERADATA_HOME. Set the variable to the Teradata driver installation directory. The defaults are as follows: Using a Bourne shell:
$ TERADATA_HOME=/teradata/usr; export TERADATA_HOME

Using a C shell:
$ setenv TERADATA_HOME /teradata/usr

ODBCHOME. Set the variable to the ODBC installation directory. For example: Using a Bourne shell:
$ ODBCHOME=/usr/odbc; export ODBCHOME

Using a C shell:
$ setenv ODBCHOME /usr/odbc

318

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

PATH. To run the ivtestlib utility, to verify that the UNIX ODBC manager can load the driver files, set the variable as follows: Using a Bourne shell:
PATH="${PATH}:$ODBCHOME/bin:$TERADATA_HOME/bin"

Using a C shell:
$ setenv PATH ${PATH}:$ODBCHOME/bin:$TERADATA_HOME/bin 3.

Set the shared library environment variable. The Teradata software contains a number of shared library components that the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server load dynamically. To locate the shared libraries during run time, set the shared library environment variable. The shared library path must also include the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server install directory (server_dir). Set the shared library environment variable based on the operating system. The following table lists the shared library variables for each operating system:
Operating System Solaris AIX HP-UX Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH

For example, use the following syntax for Solaris:

Using a Bourne shell:

$ LD_LIBRARY_PATH="${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$ODBCHOME/ lib:$TERADATA_HOME/lib:$TERADATA_HOME/odbc/lib"; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH "${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$ODBCHOME/ lib:$TERADATA_HOME/lib:$TERADATA_HOME/odbc/lib"

4.

Edit the existing odbc.ini file or copy the odbc.ini file to the home directory and edit it. This file exists in $ODBCHOME directory.
$ cp $ODBCHOME/odbc.ini $HOME/.odbc.ini

Add an entry for the Teradata data source under the section [ODBC Data Sources] and configure the data source. For example:
MY_TERADATA_SOURCE=Teradata Driver [MY_TERADATA_SOURCE] Driver=/u01/app/teradata/td-tuf611/odbc/drivers/tdata.so Description=NCR 3600 running Teradata V1R5.2 DBCName=208.199.59.208 Connecting to a Teradata Database 319

DateFormat=AAA SessionMode=ANSI DefaultDatabase= Username= Password= 5. 6.

Set the DateFormat to AAA in the Teradata data ODBC configuration. Optionally, set the SessionMode to ANSI. When you use ANSI session mode, Teradata does not roll back the transaction when it encounters a row error. If you choose Teradata session mode, Teradata rolls back the transaction when it encounters a row error. In Teradata mode, the PowerCenter Server cannot detect the rollback, and does not report this in the session log. To configure connection to a single Teradata database, enter the DefaultDatabase name. To create a single connection to the default database, enter the user name and password. To connect to multiple databases, using the same ODBC DSN, leave the DefaultDatabase field empty. For more information about Teradata connectivity, consult the Teradata ODBC driver documentation. For a sample odbc.ini file, see Sample odbc.ini file on page 323.

7.

8.

Verify that the last entry in the odbc.ini is InstallDir and set it to the odbc installation directory. For example:
InstallDir=/usr/odbc

9.

Edit the .cshrc or .profile to include the complete set of shell commands. Save the file and either log out and log in again, or issue the source command. Using a Bourne shell:
$ source .profile

Using a C shell:
$ source .cshrc 10.

For each data source you use, make a note of the file name under the Driver=<parameter> in the data source entry in odbc.ini. Use the ivtestlib utility to verify that the UNIX ODBC manager can load the driver file. For example, if you have the driver entry:
Driver=/u01/app/teradata/td-tuf611/odbc/drivers/tdata.so

issue the following command:

ivtestlib /u01/app/teradata/td-tuf611/odbc/drivers/tdata.so 11.

Test the connection using BTEQ or another Teradata client tool.

320

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Connecting to an ODBC Data Source

You must install and configure native client software on the machine hosting PowerCenter. To ensure compatibility between the Informatica products and databases, you must use the appropriate database client libraries. For more information, see Working with 32-bit and 64bit Platforms on page 70. To connect the PowerCenter Server to each ODBC database, you must install and configure any underlying client access software needed by the ODBC driver. If you want to access sources in a Windows environment, such as Microsoft Excel or Access, you must install PowerChannel. For more information about PowerChannel, see the PowerChannel User Guide. You must configure connectivity to the following PowerCenter components on UNIX:

PowerCenter Server. Install or verify that you have already installed the DataDirect ODBC for UNIX package (AIX, HP-UX, Linux, or Solaris) on the machine hosting the PowerCenter Server. This package is provided on the PowerCenter installation CD.

Note: The PowerCenter Server uses the System DSN to specify an ODBC data source.

Use the following steps as a guideline to connect an ODBC data source.

To connect to an ODBC data source: 1. 2.

To configure connectivity to the PowerCenter Server, log in to the machine as a user who can start the server process. Set the ODBCHOME and PATH environment variables. ODBCHOME. Set to the Data Direct ODBC installation directory. For example, if the install directory is /opt/odbc: Using a Bourne shell:
$ ODBCHOME=/opt/odbc; export ODBCHOME

Using a C shell:
$ setenv ODBCHOME /opt/odbc

PATH. To run the ODBC command line programs, like ivtestlib, set the variable to include the odbc bin directory. Using a Bourne shell:
$ PATH=${PATH}:$ODBCHOME/bin; export PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv PATH ${PATH}:$ODBCHOME/bin

Run the ivtestlib utility to verify that the UNIX ODBC manager can load the driver files.
3.

Set the shared library environment variable.

Connecting to an ODBC Data Source

321

The ODBC software contains a number of shared library components that the PowerCenter Server and Repository Server load dynamically. To locate the shared libraries during run time, set the shared library environment variable. The shared library path must also include the PowerCenter Server or Repository Server install directory (server_dir). Set the shared library environment variable based on the operating system. The following table lists the shared library variables for each operating system:
Operating System Solaris Linux AIX HP-UX Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH

For example, use the following syntax for Solaris and Linux:

Using a Bourne shell:

$ LD_LIBRARY_PATH=${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$ODBCHOME/lib; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH

Using a C shell:
$ setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:$HOME/server_dir:$ODBCHOME/ lib

4.

Edit the existing odbc.ini file or copy the odbc.ini file to the home directory and edit it. This file exists in $ODBCHOME directory.
$ cp $ODBCHOME/odbc.ini $HOME/.odbc.ini

Add an entry for the ODBC data source under the section [ODBC Data Sources] and configure the data source. For example:
MY_MSSQLSERVER_ODBC_SOURCE=<Driver name or Data source description> [MY_SQLSERVER_ODBC_SOURCE] Driver=<path to ODBC drivers> Description=DataDirect 4.10 SQL Server Wire Protocol Database=<SQLServer_host_name> LogonID=<username> Password=<password> Address=<TCP/IP address>,<port number> QuoteId=No AnsiNPW=No ApplicationsUsingThreads=1

322

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

This file might already exist, if you have configured one or more ODBC data sources. For a sample odbc.ini file, see Sample odbc.ini file on page 323.
5.

Verify that the last entry in the odbc.ini is InstallDir and set it to the odbc installation directory. For example:
InstallDir=/usr/odbc

6.

If you are using the odbc.ini file in the home directory, set the ODBCINI environment variable. Using a Bourne shell:
$ ODBCINI=/$HOME/.odbc.ini; export ODBCINI

Using a C shell:
$ setenv ODBCINI $HOME/.odbc.ini 7.

Edit the .cshrc or .profile to include the complete set of shell commands. Save the file and either log out and log in again, or issue the source command. Using a Bourne shell:
$ source .profile

Using a C shell:
$ source .cshrc 8.

Use the ivtestlib utility to verify that the UNIX ODBC manager can load the driver file you specified for your data source in the odbc.ini file. For example, if you have the driver entry:
Driver = /opt/odbc/lib/DWxxxx.so

issue the following command:

ivtestlib /opt/odbc/lib/DWxxxx.so 9.

Install and configure any underlying client access software needed by the ODBC driver.
Note: While some ODBC drivers are self-contained and have all information inside the

.odbc.ini file, most are not. For example, if you want to use an ODBC driver to access Oracle, you must install the Oracle SQL*NET software and set the appropriate environment variables. Verify such additional software configuration separately before using ODBC.

Sample odbc.ini file

The odbc.ini file looks similar to the following:
[ODBC Data Sources] dBase=DataDirect 4.2 dBase Driver Sybase11=DataDirect 4.2 Sybase 11 Driver Oracle8=DataDirect 4.2 Oracle 8 Driver Informix9=DataDirect 4.2 Informix 9 Driver

Connecting to an ODBC Data Source

323

OpenIngres=DataDirect 4.2 OpenIngres 1.2 Driver OpenIngres20=DataDirect 4.2 OpenIngres 2.0 Driver DB2=DataDirect 4.2 DB2 Driver MSSQLServer=DataDirect 4.2 SQL Server Wire Protocol Text=DataDirect 4.2 Text Driver [dBase] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWdbf13.so Description=dBase Database=/usr/lpp/odbc/demo [Sybase11] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWsyb1113.so Description=Sybase11 Database=odbc ServerName=SYBASE WorkstationID=id LogonID=odbc01 Password=odbc01 OptimizePrepare=2 SelectMethod=1 [Oracle8] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWor813.so Description=Oracle8 ServerName=oraclehost LogonID=odbc01 Password=odbc01 [Informix9] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWinf913.so Description=Informix9 Database=odbc HostName=informixhost LogonID=odbc01 Password=odbc01 [DB2] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWdb213.so Description=DB2 Database=ODBC [OpenIngres] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWoing13.so Description=OpenIngres1 ServerName=ingreshost Database=odbc LogonID=odbc01 Password=odbc01 Workarounds=1

324

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

[OpenIngres20] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWoi213.so Description=OpenIngres2.0 ServerName=ingreshost Database=odbc LogonID=odbc01 Password=odbc01 Workarounds=1 [Text] Driver=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/DWtxt13.so Description=Text driver Database=/usr/lpp/odbc/demo MY_TERADATA_SOURCE=Teradata Driver MY_TERADATA_SOURCE] Driver=/u01/app/teradata/td-tuf611/odbc/drivers/tdata.so Description=NCR 3600 running Teradata V1R5.2 DBCName=208.199.59.208 DateFormat=AAA SessionMode=ANSI DefaultDatabase= Username= Password= [MS_SQLSERVER] Driver=/home/gcook/odbc410/dwmsss18.so Description=DataDirect 4.10 SQL Server Wire Protocol Database=<SQLServer_host_name> LogonID=<username> Password=<password> Address=<TCP/IP address>,<port number> QuoteId=No AnsiNPW=No ApplicationsUsingThreads=1 [ODBC] Trace=0 TraceFile=odbctrace.out TraceDll=/usr/lpp/odbc/lib/odbctrac.so InstallDir=/usr/lpp/odbc

Connecting to an ODBC Data Source

325

326

Chapter 16: Connecting to Databases from UNIX

Appendix A

ODBC Calls
This appendix provides function calls that the PowerCenter Client and PowerCenter Server can make to connect to supported ODBC drivers. Topics include:

Client ODBC Calls, 328 Server ODBC Calls, 330

327

Client ODBC Calls

The PowerCenter Client makes function calls when communicating with databases. Table A-1 describes the core function calls the PowerCenter Client makes to connect to ODBC drivers:
Table A-1. PowerCenter Client ODBC Function Calls Function SQLAllocConnect SQLAllocStmt SQLBindCol SQLBindParam SQLBindParameter SQLCancel SQLColumns Description Allocates resources for a connection. Allocates resources for a statement. Binds a result column. Binds a parameter. Binds a parameter. Cancels a query. Called with the table name and the owner name. NULL is never passed for the owner name or table name. The owner name is obtained from the results of SQLTables. Connects. Retrieves column information for a prepared query. Disconnects. Errors. Executes a statement. Executes a statement. Fetches row by row. Called with the table name and the owner name. NULL is never passed for the owner name or table name. The owner name is obtained from the results of SQLTables above. This is called twice: - With the FROM table as NULL - With the TO table as NULL Frees the resources allocated by connect. Frees resources allocated by a statement. Called to see if the driver supports SQLForeignKeys before calling it. SQLForeignKeys is called only if the driver supports it. The DataDirect 4.x Informix driver does not support SQLForeignKeys. Retrieves specified number of result columns from a query. Parses a SQL statement.

SQLConnect SQLDescribe SQLDisconnect SQLError SQLExecDirect SQLExecute SQLFetch SQLForeignKeys

SQLFreeConnect SQLFreeStmt SQLGetFunctions

SQLNumResultsCols SQLPrepare

328

Appendix A: ODBC Calls

Table A-1. PowerCenter Client ODBC Function Calls Function SQLPrimaryKeys Description Called with the table name and the owner name. NULL is never passed for the owner name or table name. The owner name is obtained from the results of SQLTables. Called with the procedure name and the owner name. NULL is never passed for the owner name or procedure name. The owner name is obtained from the results of SQLProcedures. Called with the supplied owner name or NULL if all owners are requested. Retrieves the number of rows affected by a query. Sets connection options. Sets a parameter. Called with the supplied owner name or NULL if all owners are requested. This is called a total of five times, once for each of the following: - TABLE - SYSTEM TABLE - VIEW - ALIAS - SYNONYM The Import dialog box displays the union of all returned rows. Turns on/off the auto commit feature.

SQLProcedureColumns

SQLProcedures SQLRowCount SQLSetConnectOption SQLSetParam SQLTables

SQLTransact

Client ODBC Calls

329

Server ODBC Calls

The PowerCenter Server on UNIX and Windows can access databases through ODBC drivers.
Note: When you use Stored Procedure and Lookup transformations in a mapping, the

PowerCenter Server uses ODBC calls to communicate with databases. Table A-2 describes the core function calls the PowerCenter Server makes to connect to ODBC drivers:
Table A-2. PowerCenter Server ODBC Function Calls Function SQLAllocConnect SQLAllocStmt SQLBindCol SQLBindParameter SQLConnect SQLDisconnect SQLError SQLExecDirect SQLExecute SQLFetch SQLFreeConnect SQLFreeStmt SQLParamOptions SQLPrepare SQLSetConnectOption SQLSetParam SQLSetStmtAttr SQLTransact SQLSetStmtOption SQLExtendedFetch SQLGetInfo SQLGetFunctions Description Allocates resources for a connection. Allocates resources for a statement. Binds a result column. Binds a parameter. Connects. Disconnects. Errors. Executes a statement. Executes a statement. Fetches row by row. Frees the resources allocated by connect. Frees resources allocated by a statement. Sets number of parameter rows to run. Parses a SQL statement. Sets connection options. Sets a parameter. Sets statement handle attributes. Turns on/off the auto commit feature. Sets the options for a statement to control how to read and how many rows to read. Fetches arrays. Gets information about the ODBC driver. Gets supported ODBC driver functions.

330

Appendix A: ODBC Calls

Table A-2. PowerCenter Server ODBC Function Calls Function SQLGetStmtOptions SQLRowCount Description Gets attributes from the statement in the connection. Returns the number of rows affected by the SQLExecute command.

Server ODBC Calls

331

332

Appendix A: ODBC Calls

Appendix B

Code Pages
This appendix documents code pages and their compatibility in PowerCenter. Topics include:

Supported Code Pages, 334 Code Page Reference, 336 Informatica Code Page Relationships, 340 Code Page Compatibility, 342

333

Supported Code Pages

PowerCenter supports code pages for internationalization. Table B-1 displays available code pages, including the code page name, description, and code page ID:
Table B-1. Code Page Descriptions Name EuroShift-JIS IBM037 IBM273 IBM280 IBM285 IBM297 IBM500 IBM930 IBM935 IBM937 IBM939 ISO-8859-10 ISO-8859-15 ISO-8859-2 ISO-8859-3 ISO-8859-4 ISO-8859-5 ISO-8859-6 ISO-8859-7 ISO-8859-8 ISO-8859-9 JapanEUC* JEF JEF-kana JIPSE JIPSE-kana Description Test code page, Shift-JIS with European characters IBM EBCDIC US English IBM EBCDIC German IBM EBCDIC Italian IBM EBCDIC UK English IBM EBCDIC French IBM EBCDIC International Latin-1 IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Simplified Chinese IBM EBCDIC Traditional Chinese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 (Nordic) ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 (Western European) ISO 8859-2 Eastern European ISO 8859-3 Southeast European ISO 8859-4 Baltic ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic ISO 8859-6 Arabic ISO 8859-7 Greek ISO 8859-8 Hebrew ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (Turkish) Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212) Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese ID 9999 2028 2030 2035 2038 2040 2044 930 935 937 939 13 201 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 9000 9005 9002 9007

334

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-1. Code Page Descriptions Name KEIS KEIS-kana Latin1* MELCOM MELCOM-kana MS1250 MS1251 MS1252* MS1253 MS1254 MS1255 MS1256 MS1257 MS1258 MS1361 MS874 MS932* MS936 MS949 MS950 UNISYS UNISYS-kana US-ASCII* UTF-8 Description HITACHI KEIS Japanese HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese ISO 8859-1 Western European MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese MS Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe) MS Windows Cyrillic (Slavic) MS Windows Latin1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1 MS Windows Greek MS Windows Latin 5 (Turkish), superset of ISO 8859-9 MS Windows Hebrew MS Windows Arabic MS Windows Baltic Rim MS Windows Vietnamese MS Windows Korean (Johab) MS-DOS Thai, superset of TIS 620 MS Windows Japanese, Shift-JIS MS Windows Simplified Chinese, superset of GB 231280, EUC encoding MS Windows Korean, superset of KS C 5601-1992 MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5 UNISYS Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese 7-bit ASCII UTF-8 encoding of Unicode ID 9001 9006 4 9004 9009 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 1361 874 2024 936 949 950 9003 9008 1 106

* PowerCenter uses these code pages.

Note: Select IBM EBCDIC as your source database connection code page only if you access

EBCDIC data, such as data from a mainframe extract file. When you enable data code page validation, PowerCenter supports UTF-8 for target code pages only.

Supported Code Pages

335

Code Page Reference

Each language might have multiple associated code pages.
Note: The code pages listed are the most appropriate for English. However, all code pages

include the US-ASCII characters. Table B-2 lists the territories, code pages, and sort orders most appropriate for each language:
Table B-2. Code Pages by Language Language Albanian Territory Albania Code Page ISO-8859-2 MS1250 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 ISO-8859-6 MS1256 UTF-8 ISO-8859-5 MS1251 UTF-8 ISO-8859-5 MS1251 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 IBM297 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 ISO-8859-5 MS1251 UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 Sort Order Default Binary

Arabic

Saudi Arabia

Default Binary Default Binary Default Binary Default Binary

Belorussian

Belarus

Bulgarian

Bulgaria

Canadian French

French-Canada

Catalan

Catalonia

Default Binary

Croatian

Croatia

Croatian Binary Default Binary Czech Binary

Cyrillic Serbian

Yugoslavia

Czech

Czech Republic

336

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-2. Code Pages by Language Language Danish Territory Denmark Code Page Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 IBM037 US-ASCII Latin1 MS1252 UTF-8 IBM037 IBM285 ISO-8859-4 ISO-8859-10 MS1257 UTF-8 ISO-8859-6 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 IBM297 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 IBM273 ISO-8859-7 MS1253 UTF-8 ISO-8859-8 MS1255 UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 Sort Order Danish Binary

Dutch

Netherlands Dutch-Belgium

Default Binary

English

United States Australia Canada New Zealand South Africa United Kingdom Estonia

Binary Default

Estonian

Estonian Binary

Farsi Finnish

Iran Finland

Default Binary Finnish Binary

French

France French-Belgium French-Canada French-Switzerland Germany Austria German-Switzerland

Default Binary

German

Default Binary

Greek

Greece

Default Binary Default Binary Hungarian Binary

Hebrew

Israel

Hungarian

Hungary

Code Page Reference

337

Table B-2. Code Pages by Language Language Italian Territory Italy Italian-Switzerland Code Page Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 IBM280 JapanEUC MS932 UTF-8 IBM930 IBM939 JEF JEF-kana KEIS KEIS-kana JIPSE JIPSE-kana UNISYS UNISYS-kana MELCOM MELCOM-kana MS949 MS1361 UTF-8 ISO-8859-4 ISO-8859-10 MS1257 UTF-8 ISO-8859-4 ISO-8859-10 MS1257 UTF-8 ISO-8859-5 MS1251 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 IBM037 Sort Order Default Binary

Japanese

Japan

Binary

Korean

Korea

Binary

Latvian

Latvia

Latvian Binary

Lithuanian

Lithuania

Lithuanian Binary

Macedonian

Macedonia

Default Binary Danish Binary

Norwegian

Norway

Polish Portuguese

Poland Portugal Brazil

Default Binary Default Binary

338

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-2. Code Pages by Language Language Romanian Territory Romania Code Page ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 ISO-8859-5 MS1251 UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 MS936 UTF-8 IBM935 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 ISO-8859-2 MS1250 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 Latin1 MS1252 ISO-8859-9 UTF-8 MS874 UTF-8 ISO-8859-9 ISO-8859-3 MS1254 UTF-8 ISO-8859-5 MS1251 UTF-8 MS1258 UTF-8 Sort Order Romanian Binary Default Binary Default Binary Binary

Russian

Russia

Serbian

Yugoslavia

Simplified Chinese

China

Slovak

Slovakia

Slovak

Slovenian

Slovenia

Slovenian Binary Spanish Traditional Spanish Binary Swedish Binary

Spanish

Spain Argentina Chile Mexico Sweden

Swedish

Thai Turkish

Thailand Turkey

Thai Binary Turkish Binary

Ukrainian

Ukraine

Ukrainian Binary Vietnamese Binary

Vietnamese

Vietnam

Code Page Reference

339

Informatica Code Page Relationships

For accurate data movement and transformation, make sure the code pages of each PowerCenter component have the correct relationships with each other. One code page can be a subset or superset of another. For accurate data movement, the target code page must be a superset of both the source code page and PowerCenter Server code page. In addition, the PowerCenter Server code page must be a superset of the source code page. If the source database code page is a superset of the target code page, the PowerCenter Server cannot process characters in the source because they are not encoded in the target code page. When you run session, target may contain incorrect or missing data. For example, Latin1 is a superset of US-ASCII. It contains all US-ASCII character encoding in addition to its own character set encoding. If you select US-ASCII for the source code page, Latin1 for the target code page, and the PowerCenter Server code page is Latin 1, the PowerCenter Server writes accurate data to the target. However, if you select US-ASCII for the target code page while the PowerCenter Server uses the Latin1 code page, the PowerCenter Server might write incorrect or incomplete data to the target. When two code pages are compatible, the characters encoded in the two code pages are identical. For example, the IBM EBCDIC US English and Latin1 code pages contain identical character sets and are compatible with each other. The repository and PowerCenter Server can each use one these code pages and can pass data back and forth without data loss.
Note: When you create or upgrade a repository, do not select IBM EBCDIC for the code page.

Table B-3 summarizes code page compatibility between PowerCenter components:

Table B-3. Code Page Compatibility Component Code Page Source (including relational, flat file, and Application) Target (including relational and flat file) Code Page Compatibility Subset of target. Subset of PowerCenter Server. Superset of source. Superset of PowerCenter Server. External Loader data and control files are created using the target flat file code page. Superset of source. Subset of target. Identical to PowerCenter Server operating system and machine hosting pmcmd. Compatible with repository, PowerCenter Client, Lookup, and Stored Procedure transformation. Compatible with the PowerCenter Client code page. Compatible with the PowerCenter Server code page. Compatible with the Repository Server code page. Compatible with local repository. Can also be a subset of local repository. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and Server.

PowerCenter Server

Repository Server

Global repository

340

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-3. Code Page Compatibility Component Code Page Local repository Code Page Compatibility Compatible with global repository. Can also be a superset of global repository. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and Server. Compatible with PowerCenter Client and Server. Compatible with PowerCenter Server and repository. Identical to PowerCenter Server.

Standalone repository PowerCenter Client pmcmd

For details on code page compatibility between components, see Globalization Overview on page 25.

Informatica Code Page Relationships

341

Code Page Compatibility

To allow greater flexibility in using code pages, Informatica considers some code pages compatible, although they do not contain identical character sets. Table B-4 describes the code pages Informatica considers compatible with each other:
Table B-4. Compatible Code Pages Code Page IBM037 IBM EBCDIC US English* Latin1 (ISO-8859-1)* MS1252 MS Latin1 MS1250 MS Latin 2 ISO-8859-2 Eastern European* JapanEUC Compatible with Latin1 (ISO-8859-1)* MS1252 MS Latin1 IBM037 IBM EBCDIC US English* MS1252 MS Latin1 Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) IBM037 IBM EBCDIC US English ISO-8859-2 Eastern European MS1250 MS Latin 2 IBM 930 IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM 939 IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 MS932 MS Shift JIS Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese IBM930 IBM EBCDIC Japanese JapanEUC IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese

MS932 MS Shift JIS

342

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-4. Compatible Code Pages Code Page IBM930 IBM EBCDIC Japanese Compatible with JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese

IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939

Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu

Code Page Compatibility

343

Table B-4. Compatible Code Pages Code Page HITACHI KEIS Japanese Compatible with JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese

NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese

UNISYS Japanese

344

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-4. Compatible Code Pages Code Page MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Compatible with JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese

Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu

HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese

Code Page Compatibility

345

Table B-4. Compatible Code Pages Code Page NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese Compatible with JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese JapanEUC MS932 MS Shift JIS IBM EBCDIC Japanese IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939 Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese UNISYS Japanese MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese UNISYS-Kana Japanese

UNISYS-Kana Japanese

MITSUBISHI MELCOM-Kana Japanese

*No character loss occurs during code page conversion.

Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages

Table B-5 on page 347 lists all supported code pages. Each supported code page has a corresponding column for each of the following code pages:

Code pages compatible with the specified code page Code pages that are supersets of the specified code page

346

Appendix B: Code Pages

Code pages that are subsets of the specified code page

Because a code page that is compatible with another code page can also act as superset or subset of that code page, each compatible code page appears at the top of the list of supersets and subsets. All other superset and subset code pages appear alphabetically below compatible code pages. For example, the first row of the table lists related code pages for the IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) code page. IBM037 has three compatible code pages:

IBM037 (itself ) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) MS Latin1 (MS1252)

All three code pages are also supersets and subsets of IBM037 and appear at the top of those columns. In addition, the Supersets column contains UTF-8, indicating it contains all critical characters in the IBM037 code page. The Subsets column contains US-ASCII, indicating IBM037 contains all critical US-ASCII characters.
Note: You can use the IBM EBCDIC code page for the PowerCenter Server when you install it

on a mainframe system. You cannot install the PowerCenter Client or repository on mainframe systems, so you cannot use the IBM EBCDIC code page for PowerCenter Client or repository installations. Table B-5 describes supported and compatible code pages:
Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) Compatible Code Page IBM037 IBM EBCDIC US English) Latin1(ISO 8859-1 Western European) MS 1252 (MS Windows Latin1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) Subsets IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) MS 1252 (MS Windows Latin1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM273 (IBM EBCDIC German UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM280 (IBM EBCDIC Italian) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM285 (IBM EBCDIC UK English) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

IBM273 (IBM EBCDIC German)

IBM273 (IBM EBCDIC German)

IBM273 (IBM EBCDIC German US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM280 (IBM EBCDIC Italian) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM285 (IBM EBCDIC UK English) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII)

IBM280 (IBM EBCDIC Italian)

IBM280 (IBM EBCDIC Italian)

IBM285 (IBM EBCDIC UK English)

IBM285 (IBM EBCDIC UK English)

Code Page Compatibility

347

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page IBM297 (IBM EBCDIC French) Compatible Code Page IBM297 (IBM EBCDIC French) Subsets IBM297 (IBM EBCDIC French) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM500 (IBM EBCDIC International Latin-1) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM935 (IBM EBCDIC Simplified Chinese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM937 (IBM EBCDIC Traditional Chinese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-2 (ISO 8859-2 Eastern European) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-3 (ISO 8859-3 Southeast European) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets IBM297 (IBM EBCDIC French) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM500 (IBM EBCDIC International Latin-1) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM935 (IBM EBCDIC Simplified Chinese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM937 (IBM EBCDIC Traditional Chinese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-2 (ISO 8859-2 Eastern European) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-3 (ISO 8859-3 Southeast European) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

IBM500 (IBM EBCDIC International Latin-1)

IBM500 (IBM EBCDIC International Latin-1)

IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese)

IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939)

IBM935 (IBM EBCDIC Simplified Chinese)

IBM935 (IBM EBCDIC Simplified Chinese)

IBM937 (IBM EBCDIC Traditional Chinese)

IBM937 (IBM EBCDIC Traditional Chinese)

IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939)

IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese)

ISO-8859-2 (ISO 8859-2 Eastern European)

ISO-8859-2 (ISO 8859-2 Eastern European) MS1250 Latin 2 (Central European) ISO-8859-3 (ISO 8859-3 Southeast European)

ISO-8859-3 (ISO 8859-3 Southeast European)

348

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page ISO-8859-4 (ISO 8859-4 Baltic) Compatible Code Page ISO-8859-4 (ISO 8859-4 Baltic) Subsets ISO-8859-4 (ISO 8859-4 Baltic) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-5 (ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-6 (ISO 8859-6 Arabic) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-7 (ISO 8859-7 Greek) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-8 (ISO 8859-8 Hebrew) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-9 (ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (Turkish)) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-10 (ISO 885910 Latin 6 (Nordic)) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) ISO-8859-15 (ISO 885915 Latin 9 (Western European)) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets ISO-8859-4 (ISO 8859-4 Baltic) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-5 (ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-6 (ISO 8859-6 Arabic) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-7 (ISO 8859-7 Greek) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-8 (ISO 8859-8 Hebrew) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-9 (ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (Turkish)) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-10 (ISO 885910 Latin 6 (Nordic)) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) ISO-8859-15 (ISO 885915 Latin 9 (Western European)) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

ISO-8859-5 (ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic)

ISO-8859-5 (ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic)

ISO-8859-6 (ISO 8859-6 Arabic)

ISO-8859-6 (ISO 8859-6 Arabic)

ISO-8859-7 (ISO 8859-7 Greek)

ISO-8859-7 (ISO 8859-7 Greek)

ISO-8859-8 (ISO 8859-8 Hebrew)

ISO-8859-8 (ISO 8859-8 Hebrew)

ISO-8859-9 (ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (Turkish))

ISO-8859-9 (ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (Turkish))

ISO-8859-10 (ISO 885910 Latin 6 (Nordic))

ISO-8859-10 (ISO 885910 Latin 6 (Nordic))

ISO-8859-15 (ISO 885915 Latin 9 (Western European))

ISO-8859-15 (ISO 885915 Latin 9 (Western European))

Code Page Compatibility

349

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) Compatible Code Page JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) Subsets JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu)

JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

350

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) Compatible Code Page JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) Subsets JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese)

JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese)

JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese)

KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

Code Page Compatibility

351

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) Compatible Code Page KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) Subsets KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European)

Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1)

MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese)

MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese)

MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

352

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page MS874 (MS-DOS Thai, superset of TIS 620) Compatible Code Page MS874 (MS-DOS Thai, superset of TIS 620) Subsets MS874 (MS-DOS Thai, superset of TIS 620) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS936 (MS Windows Simplified Chinese, superset of GB 2312-80, EUC encoding) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS949 (MS Windows Korean, superset of KS C 5601-1992) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets MS874 (MS-DOS Thai, superset of TIS 620) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS936 (MS Windows Simplified Chinese, superset of GB 2312-80, EUC encoding) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS949 (MS Windows Korean, superset of KS C 5601-1992) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS)

MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JIS X 0212)) JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese)

MS936 (MS Windows Simplified Chinese, superset of GB 2312-80, EUC encoding)

MS936 (MS Windows Simplified Chinese, superset of GB 2312-80, EUC encoding)

MS949 (MS Windows Korean, superset of KS C 5601-1992)

MS949 (MS Windows Korean, superset of KS C 5601-1992)

Code Page Compatibility

353

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page MS950 (MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5) Compatible Code Page MS950 (MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5) Subsets MS950 (MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1250 (MS Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe)) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1251 (MS Windows Cyrillic (Slavic)) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1253 (MS Windows Greek) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1254 (MS Windows Latin 5 (Turkish), superset of ISO 8859-9) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1255 (MS Windows Hebrew) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1256 (MS Windows Arabic) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1257 (MS Windows Baltic Rim) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets MS950 (MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1250 (MS Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe)) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1251 (MS Windows Cyrillic (Slavic)) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1253 (MS Windows Greek) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1254 (MS Windows Latin 5 (Turkish), superset of ISO 8859-9) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1255 (MS Windows Hebrew) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1256 (MS Windows Arabic) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1257 (MS Windows Baltic Rim) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

MS1250 (MS Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe))

MS1250 (MS Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe))

MS1251 (MS Windows Cyrillic (Slavic))

MS1251 (MS Windows Cyrillic (Slavic))

MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1)

MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European)

MS1253 (MS Windows Greek)

MS1253 (MS Windows Greek)

MS1254 (MS Windows Latin 5 (Turkish), superset of ISO 8859-9)

MS1254 (MS Windows Latin 5 (Turkish), superset of ISO 8859-9)

MS1255 (MS Windows Hebrew)

MS1255 (MS Windows Hebrew)

MS1256 (MS Windows Arabic)

MS1256 (MS Windows Arabic)

MS1257 (MS Windows Baltic Rim)

MS1257 (MS Windows Baltic Rim)

354

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page MS1258 (MS Windows Vietnamese) Compatible Code Page MS1258 (MS Windows Vietnamese) Subsets MS1258 (MS Windows Vietnamese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) MS1361 (MS Windows Korean (Johab)) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets MS1258 (MS Windows Vietnamese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) MS1361 (MS Windows Korean (Johab)) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode) US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) IBM273 (IBM EBCDIC German) IBM280 (IBM EBCDIC Italian) IBM285 (IBM EBCDIC UK English) IBM297 (IBM EBCDIC French) IBM500 (IBM EBCDIC International Latin-1) IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) IBM935 (IBM EBCDIC Simplified Chinese)

MS1361 (MS Windows Korean (Johab))

MS1361 (MS Windows Korean (Johab))

UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese)

UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese)

UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese)

UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (including JIS X 0212)) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese)

US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII)

US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII)

Code Page Compatibility

355

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Compatible Code Page US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Subsets US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets IBM937 (IBM EBCDIC Traditional Chinese) IBM 939 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese CP939) ISO-8859-2 (ISO 8859-2 Eastern European) ISO-8859-3 (ISO 8859-3 Southeast European) ISO-8859-4 (ISO 8859-4 Baltic) ISO-8859-5 (ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic) ISO-8859-6 (ISO 8859-6 Arabic) ISO-8859-7 (ISO 8859-7 Greek) ISO-8859-8 (ISO 8859-8 Hebrew) ISO-8859-9 (ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 (Turkish)) ISO-8859-15 (ISO 885915 Latin 9 (Western European)) JapanEUC (Japanese Extended UNIX Code (incl. JEF (Japanese EBCDIC Fujitsu) JEF-kana (Japanese EBCDIC-Kana Fujitsu) JIPSE (NEC ACOS JIPSE Japanese) JIPSE-kana (NEC ACOS JIPSE-Kana Japanese) JIS X 0212)) KEIS (HITACHI KEIS Japanese) KEIS-kana (HITACHI KEIS-Kana Japanese) Latin1 (ISO 8859-1 Western European) MELCOM (MITSUBISHI MELCOM Japanese) MELCOM-kana (MITSUBISHI MELCOMKana Japanese)

356

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-5. Supported Code Pages and Related Code Pages Supported Code Page US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Compatible Code Page US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Subsets US-ASCII (7-bit ASCII) Supersets MS874 (MS-DOS Thai, superset of TIS 620) MS932 (MS Windows Japanese, superset of Shift-JIS) MS936 (MS Windows Simplified Chinese, superset of GB 2312-80, EUC encoding) MS949 (MS Windows Korean, superset of KS C 5601-1992) Korean (Johab)) MS950 (MS Windows Traditional Chinese, superset of Big 5) MS1250 (MS Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe)) MS1251 (MS Windows Cyrillic (Slavic)) MS1252 (MS Windows Latin 1 (ANSI), superset of Latin1) MS1253 (MS Windows Greek) MS1254 (MS Windows Latin 5 (Turkish), superset of ISO 8859-9) MS1255 (MS Windows Hebrew) MS1256 (MS Windows Arabic) MS1257 (MS Windows Baltic Rim) MS1361 (MS Windows Korean (Johab)) UNISYS (UNISYS Japanese) UNISYS-kana (UNISYSKana Japanese) UTF-8 (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode)

When you select code pages that Informatica considers compatible, keep in mind that some characters do not convert from one code page to another. These characters are unlikely to be in your source data. For a complete list of characters you might lose during code page conversions, see the following sections.

Code Page Compatibility

357

Converting from MS Latin1 to Latin1

Table B-6 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from MS Latin1 to Latin1:
Table B-6. MS Latin1 to Latin1 Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS1252 MS Latin1 to Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) 338 (LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE) 339 (LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE) 352 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON) 353 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON) 376 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS) 381 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 382 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 402 (LATIN SMALL LETTER F WITH HOOK) 710 (MODIFIER LETTER CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT) 732 (SMALL TILDE) 8211 (EN DASH) 8212 (EM DASH) 8216 (LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8217 (RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8218 (SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK) 8220 (LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK) 8221 (RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK) 8222 (DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK) 8224 (DAGGER) 8225 (DOUBLE DAGGER) 8226 (BULLET) 8230 (HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS) 8240 (PER MILLE SIGN) 8249 (SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8250 (SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8364 (EURO SIGN) 8482 (TRADE MARK SIGN)

Converting from Latin1 to MS Latin1

Table B-7 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from Latin1 to MS Latin1:
Table B-7. Latin1 to MS Latin1 Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) to MS1252 MS Latin1 128 (<control character>) 129 (<control character>) 130 (<control character>) 131 (<control character>) 132 (<control character>) 133 (<control character>) 134 (<control character>) 144 (<control character>) 145 (<control character>) 146 (<control character>) 147 (<control character>) 148 (<control character>) 149 (<control character>) 150 (<control character>)

358

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-7. Latin1 to MS Latin1 Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) to MS1252 MS Latin1 135 (<control character>) 136 (<control character>) 137 (<control character>) 138 (<control character>) 139 (<control character>) 140 (<control character>) 141 (<control character>) 142 (<control character>) 143 (<control character>) 151 (<control character>) 152 (<control character>) 153 (<control character>) 154 (<control character>) 155 (<control character>) 156 (<control character>) 157 (<control character>) 158 (<control character>) 159 (<control character>)

Converting from MS Latin 2 to ISO-8859-2

Table B-8 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from MS Latin 2 to ISO-8859-2:
Table B-8. MS Latin 2 to ISO-8859-2 Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS Latin 2 (MS1250) to ISO-8859-2 127 (<control>) 166 (BROKEN BAR) 169 (COPYRIGHT SIGN) 171 (LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 172 (NOT SIGN) 174 (REGISTERED SIGN) 177 (PLUS-MINUS SIGN) 181 (MICRO SIGN) 182 (PILCROW SIGN) 183 (MIDDLE DOT) 187 (RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8211 (EN DASH) 8212 (EM DASH) 8216 (LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8217 (RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8218 (SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK) 8220 (LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK) 8221 (RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK) 8222 (DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK) 8224 (DAGGER) 8225 (DOUBLE DAGGER) 8226 (BULLET) 8230 (HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS) 8240 (PER MILLE SIGN) 8249 (SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8250 (SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8364 (EURO SIGN) 8482 (TRADE MARK SIGN)

Code Page Compatibility

359

Converting from IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin 1

Table B-9 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin1 :
Table B-9. IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin1 Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) to Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) 338 (LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE) 339 (LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE) 352 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON) 353 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON) 376 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS) 381 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 382 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 402 (LATIN SMALL LETTER F WITH HOOK) 710 (MODIFIER LETTER CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT) 732 (SMALL TILDE) 8211 (EN DASH) 8212 (EM DASH) 8216 (LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8217 (RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8218 (SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK) 8220 (LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK) 8221 (RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK) 8222 (DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK) 8224 (DAGGER) 8225 (DOUBLE DAGGER) 8226 (BULLET) 8230 (HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS) 8240 (PER MILLE SIGN) 8249 (SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8250 (SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK) 8364 (EURO SIGN) 8482 (TRADE MARK SIGN)

Converting from Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English

Table B-10 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English:
Table B-10. Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) to IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) 128 (<control character>) 129 (<control character>) 130 (<control character>) 131 (<control character>) 132 (<control character>) 144 (<control character>) 145 (<control character>) 146 (<control character>) 147 (<control character>) 148 (<control character>)

360

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-10. Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) to IBM037 (IBM EBCDIC US English) 133 (<control character>) 134 (<control character>) 135 (<control character>) 136 (<control character>) 137 (<control character>) 138 (<control character>) 139 (<control character>) 140 (<control character>) 141 (<control character>) 142 (<control character>) 143 (<control character>) 149 (<control character>) 150 (<control character>) 151 (<control character>) 152 (<control character>) 153 (<control character>) 154 (<control character>) 155 (<control character>) 156 (<control character>) 157 (<control character>) 158 (<control character>) 159 (<control character>)

Converting from MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC

Table B-11 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC:
Table B-11. MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS932 (MS Shift JIS) to JapanEUC 8481 (TELEPHONE SIGN) 8544 (ROMAN NUMERAL ONE) 8545 (ROMAN NUMERAL TWO) 8546 (ROMAN NUMERAL THREE) 8547 (ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR) 8548 (ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE) 8549 (ROMAN NUMERAL SIX) 8550 (ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN) 8551 (ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT) 8552 (ROMAN NUMERAL NINE) 8553 (ROMAN NUMERAL TEN) 8560 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL ONE) 8561 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TWO) 8562 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL THREE) 13095 (SQUARE TON) 13099 (SQUARE PAASENTO) 13110 (SQUARE HEKUTAARU) 13115 (SQUARE PEEZI) 13129 (SQUARE MIRI) 13130 (SQUARE MIRIBAARU) 13133 (SQUARE MEETORU) 13137 (SQUARE RITTORU) 13143 (SQUARE WATTO) 13179 (SQUARE ERA NAME HEISEI) 13180 (SQUARE ERA NAME SYOUWA) 13181 (SQUARE ERA NAME TAISYOU) 13182 (SQUARE ERA NAME MEIZI) 13198 (SQUARE MG)

Code Page Compatibility

361

Table B-11. MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS932 (MS Shift JIS) to JapanEUC 8563 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR) 8564 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE) 8565 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SIX) 8566 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN) 8567 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT) 8568 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL NINE) 8569 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TEN) 8721 (N-ARY SUMMATION) 8735 (RIGHT ANGLE) 8741 (PARALLEL TO) 8750 (CONTOUR INTEGRAL) 8895 (RIGHT TRIANGLE) 9312 (CIRCLED DIGIT ONE) 9313 (CIRCLED DIGIT TWO) 9314 (CIRCLED DIGIT THREE) 9315 (CIRCLED DIGIT FOUR) 9316 (CIRCLED DIGIT FIVE) 9317 (CIRCLED DIGIT SIX) 9318 (CIRCLED DIGIT SEVEN) 9319 (CIRCLED DIGIT EIGHT) 9320 (CIRCLED DIGIT NINE) 9321 (CIRCLED NUMBER TEN) 9322 (CIRCLED NUMBER ELEVEN) 9323 (CIRCLED NUMBER TWELVE) 9324 (CIRCLED NUMBER THIRTEEN) 9325 (CIRCLED NUMBER FOURTEEN) 9326 (CIRCLED NUMBER FIFTEEN) 9327 (CIRCLED NUMBER SIXTEEN) 9328 (CIRCLED NUMBER SEVENTEEN) 9329 (CIRCLED NUMBER EIGHTEEN) 9330 (CIRCLED NUMBER NINETEEN) 13199 (SQUARE KG) 13212 (SQUARE MM) 13213 (SQUARE CM) 13214 (SQUARE KM) 13217 (SQUARE M SQUARED) 13252 (SQUARE CC) 13261 (SQUARE KK) 63785 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F929) 63964 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F9DC) 64014 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0E) 64015 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0F) 64016 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA10) 64017 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA11) 64018 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA12) 64019 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA13) 64020 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA14) 64021 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA15) 64022 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA16) 64023 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA17) 64024 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA18) 64025 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA19) 64026 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1A) 64027 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1B) 64028 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1C) 64029 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1D) 64030 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1E) 64031 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1F) 64032 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA20) 64033 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA21) 64034 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA22) 64035 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA23)

362

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-11. MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS932 (MS Shift JIS) to JapanEUC 9331 (CIRCLED NUMBER TWENTY) 12317 (REVERSED DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK) 12319 (LOW DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK) 12849 (PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH STOCK) 12850 (PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH HAVE) 12857 (PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH REPRESENT) 12964 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH HIGH) 12965 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH CENTRE) 12966 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH LOW) 12967 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH LEFT) 12968 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH RIGHT) 13059 (SQUARE AARU) 13069 (SQUARE KARORII) 13076 (SQUARE KIRO) 13080 (SQUARE GURAMU) 13090 (SQUARE SENTI) 13091 (SQUARE SENTO) 13094 (SQUARE DORU) 64036 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA24) 64037 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA25) 64038 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA26) 64039 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA27) 64040 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA28) 64041 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA29) 64042 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2A) 64043 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2B) 64044 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2C) 64045 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2D) 65282 (FULLWIDTH QUOTATION MARK) 65287 (FULLWIDTH APOSTROPHE) 65293 (FULLWIDTH HYPHEN-MINUS) 65504 (FULLWIDTH CENT SIGN) 65505 (FULLWIDTH POUND SIGN) 65506 (FULLWIDTH NOT SIGN) 65508 (FULLWIDTH BROKEN BAR)

Converting from JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS

Table B-12 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS:
Table B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 161 (INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK) 162 (CENT SIGN) 163 (POUND SIGN) 164 (CURRENCY SIGN) 166 (BROKEN BAR) 169 (COPYRIGHT SIGN) 323 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE) 324 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE) 325 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH CEDILLA) 326 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CEDILLA) 327 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH CARON) 328 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON)

Code Page Compatibility

363

Table B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 170 (FEMININE ORDINAL INDICATOR) 172 (NOT SIGN) 174 (REGISTERED SIGN) 175 (MACRON) 184 (CEDILLA) 186 (MASCULINE ORDINAL INDICATOR) 191 (INVERTED QUESTION MARK) 192 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE) 193 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE) 194 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 195 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE) 196 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS) 197 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE) 198 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE) 199 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA) 200 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE) 201 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE) 202 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 203 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS) 204 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH GRAVE) 205 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH ACUTE) 206 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 207 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS) 209 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE) 210 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE) 211 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE) 212 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 213 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE) 214 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS) 216 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE) 329 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N PRECEDED BY APOSTROPHE) 330 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ENG) 331 (LATIN SMALL LETTER ENG) 332 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH MACRON) 333 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH MACRON) 336 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 337 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 338 (LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE) 339 (LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE) 340 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH ACUTE) 341 (LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH ACUTE) 342 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH CEDILLA) 343 (LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH CEDILLA) 344 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH CARON) 345 (LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH CARON) 346 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE) 347 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE) 348 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 349 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 350 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA) 351 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA) 352 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON) 353 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON) 354 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH CEDILLA) 355 (LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH CEDILLA) 356 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH CARON) 357 (LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH CARON) 358 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH STROKE) 359 (LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH STROKE) 360 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH TILDE)

364

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 217 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE) 218 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE) 219 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 220 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS) 221 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE) 222 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN) 223 (LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S) 224 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE) 225 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE) 226 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 227 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE) 228 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS) 229 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE) 230 (LATIN SMALL LETTER AE) 231 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA) 232 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE) 233 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE) 234 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 235 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS) 236 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH GRAVE) 237 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH ACUTE) 238 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 239 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS) 240 (LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH) 241 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE) 242 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE) 243 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE) 244 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 245 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE) 246 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS) 361 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH TILDE) 362 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH MACRON) 363 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH MACRON) 364 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH BREVE) 365 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH BREVE) 366 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE) 367 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE) 368 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 369 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 370 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH OGONEK) 371 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH OGONEK) 372 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 373 (LATIN SMALL LETTER W WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 374 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 375 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 376 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS) 377 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE) 378 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE) 379 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE) 380 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE) 381 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 382 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 461 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CARON) 462 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CARON) 463 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CARON) 464 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CARON) 465 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CARON) 466 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CARON) 467 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CARON) 468 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CARON)

Code Page Compatibility

365

Table B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 248 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE) 249 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE) 250 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE) 251 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 252 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS) 253 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE) 254 (LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN) 255 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS) 256 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH MACRON) 257 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH MACRON) 258 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH BREVE) 259 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH BREVE) 260 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK) 261 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK) 262 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE) 263 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE) 264 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 265 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 266 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH DOT ABOVE) 267 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH DOT ABOVE) 268 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CARON) 269 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CARON) 270 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH CARON) 271 (LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH CARON) 272 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE) 273 (LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE) 469 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND MACRON) 470 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND MACRON) 471 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND ACUTE) 472 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND ACUTE) 473 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND CARON) 474 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND CARON) 475 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND GRAVE) 476 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND GRAVE) 501 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH ACUTE) 711 (CARON) 728 (BREVE) 729 (DOT ABOVE) 730 (RING ABOVE) 731 (OGONEK) 733 (DOUBLE ACUTE ACCENT) 900 (GREEK TONOS) 901 (GREEK DIALYTIKA TONOS) 902 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ALPHA WITH TONOS) 904 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER EPSILON WITH TONOS) 905 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ETA WITH TONOS) 906 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA WITH TONOS) 908 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMICRON WITH TONOS) 910 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON WITH TONOS) 911 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA WITH TONOS) 912 (GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA WITH DIALYTIKA AND TONOS) 938 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA WITH DIALYTIKA)

366

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 274 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH MACRON) 275 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH MACRON) 278 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DOT ABOVE) 279 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DOT ABOVE) 280 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK) 281 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK) 282 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CARON) 283 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON) 284 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 285 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 286 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH BREVE) 287 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH BREVE) 288 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH DOT ABOVE) 289 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH DOT ABOVE) 290 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH CEDILLA) 292 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 293 (LATIN SMALL LETTER H WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 294 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H WITH STROKE) 295 (LATIN SMALL LETTER H WITH STROKE) 296 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH TILDE) 297 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH TILDE) 298 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH MACRON) 299 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH MACRON) 302 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH OGONEK) 303 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH OGONEK) 304 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DOT ABOVE) 305 (LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I) 306 (LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE IJ) 307 (LATIN SMALL LIGATURE IJ) 939 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON WITH DIALYTIKA) 940 (GREEK SMALL LETTER ALPHA WITH TONOS) 941 (GREEK SMALL LETTER EPSILON WITH TONOS) 942 (GREEK SMALL LETTER ETA WITH TONOS) 943 (GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA WITH TONOS) 944 (GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON WITH DIALYTIKA AND TONOS) 962 (GREEK SMALL LETTER FINAL SIGMA) 970 (GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA WITH DIALYTIKA) 971 (GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON WITH DIALYTIKA) 972 (GREEK SMALL LETTER OMICRON WITH TONOS) 973 (GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON WITH TONOS) 974 (GREEK SMALL LETTER OMEGA WITH TONOS) 1026 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DJE) 1027 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER GJE) 1028 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER UKRAINIAN IE) 1029 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DZE) 1030 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER BYELORUSSIANUKRAINIAN I) 1031 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YI) 1032 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER JE) 1033 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER LJE) 1034 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER NJE) 1035 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TSHE) 1036 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER KJE) 1038 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHORT U) 1039 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DZHE) 1106 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DJE) 1107 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER GJE) 1108 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER UKRAINIAN IE) 1109 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DZE)

Code Page Compatibility

367

Table B-12. JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 308 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 309 (LATIN SMALL LETTER J WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 310 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K WITH CEDILLA) 311 (LATIN SMALL LETTER K WITH CEDILLA) 312 (LATIN SMALL LETTER KRA) 313 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH ACUTE) 314 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH ACUTE) 315 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH CEDILLA) 316 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH CEDILLA) 317 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH CARON) 318 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH CARON) 319 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH MIDDLE DOT) 320 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH MIDDLE DOT) 321 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE) 322 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE) 1110 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER BYELORUSSIANUKRAINIAN I) 1111 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YI) 1112 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER JE) 1113 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER LJE) 1114 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER NJE) 1115 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TSHE) 1116 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER KJE) 1118 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHORT U) 1119 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DZHE) 8214 (DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE) 8482 (TRADE MARK SIGN) 8722 (MINUS SIGN) 12316 (WAVE DASH) 40869 (<CJK Ideograph Last>)

Converting from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC

Table B-13 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC:
Table B-13. IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) to JapanEUC 128 (<control character>) 129 (<control character>) 130 (<control character>) 131 (<control character>) 132 (<control character>) 133 (<control character>) 134 (<control character>) 135 (<control character>) 136 (<control character>) 8562 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL THREE) 8563 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR) 8564 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE) 8565 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SIX) 8566 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN) 8567 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT) 8568 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL NINE) 8569 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TEN) 12849 (PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH STOCK)

368

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-13. IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) to JapanEUC 137 (<control character>) 138 (<control character>) 139 (<control character>) 140 (<control character>) 141 (<control character>) 142 (<control character>) 143 (<control character>) 144 (<control character>) 145 (<control character>) 146 (<control character>) 147 (<control character>) 148 (<control character>) 149 (<control character>) 150 (<control character>) 151 (<control character>) 152 (<control character>) 153 (<control character>) 154 (<control character>) 155 (<control character>) 156 (<control character>) 157 (<control character>) 158 (<control character>) 159 (<control character>) 165 (YEN SIGN) 8212 (EM DASH) 8254 (OVERLINE) 8481 (TELEPHONE SIGN) 8544 (ROMAN NUMERAL ONE) 8545 (ROMAN NUMERAL TWO) 8546 (ROMAN NUMERAL THREE) 8547 (ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR) 57344 (<Private Use First>) 63785 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F929) 63964 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-F9DC) 64015 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0F) 64016 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA10) 64018 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA12) 64019 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA13) 64020 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA14) 64021 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA15) 64022 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA16) 64023 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA17) 64024 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA18) 64025 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA19) 64026 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1A) 64027 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1B) 64028 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1C) 64029 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1D) 64030 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1E) 64031 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA1F) 64032 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA20) 64033 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA21) 64034 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA22) 64035 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA23) 64036 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA24) 64037 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA25) 64038 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA26) 64039 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA27) 64040 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA28) 64041 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA29) 64042 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2A) 64043 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2B)

Code Page Compatibility

369

Table B-13. IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) to JapanEUC 8548 (ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE) 8549 (ROMAN NUMERAL SIX) 8550 (ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN) 8551 (ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT) 8552 (ROMAN NUMERAL NINE) 8553 (ROMAN NUMERAL TEN) 8560 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL ONE) 8561 (SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TWO) 64044 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2C) 64045 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA2D) 65282 (FULLWIDTH QUOTATION MARK) 65287 (FULLWIDTH APOSTROPHE) 65504 (FULLWIDTH CENT SIGN) 65505 (FULLWIDTH POUND SIGN) 65506 (FULLWIDTH NOT SIGN)

Converting from JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese

Table B-14 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese:
Table B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 161 (INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK) 164 (CURRENCY SIGN) 169 (COPYRIGHT SIGN) 170 (FEMININE ORDINAL INDICATOR) 174 (REGISTERED SIGN) 175 (MACRON) 184 (CEDILLA) 186 (MASCULINE ORDINAL INDICATOR) 191 (INVERTED QUESTION MARK) 192 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE) 193 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE) 194 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 195 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE) 196 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS) 197 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE) 198 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE) 325 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH CEDILLA) 326 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CEDILLA) 327 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH CARON) 328 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON) 329 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N PRECEDED BY APOSTROPHE) 330 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ENG) 331 (LATIN SMALL LETTER ENG) 332 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH MACRON) 333 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH MACRON) 336 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 337 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 338 (LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE) 339 (LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE) 340 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH ACUTE) 341 (LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH ACUTE) 342 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH CEDILLA)

370

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 199 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA) 200 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE) 201 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE) 202 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 203 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS) 204 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH GRAVE) 205 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH ACUTE) 206 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 207 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS) 209 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE) 210 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE) 211 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE) 212 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 213 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE) 214 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS) 216 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE) 217 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE) 218 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE) 219 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 220 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS) 221 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE) 222 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN) 223 (LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S) 224 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE) 225 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE) 226 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 227 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE) 228 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS) 229 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE) 230 (LATIN SMALL LETTER AE) 231 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA) 343 (LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH CEDILLA) 344 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH CARON) 345 (LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH CARON) 346 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE) 347 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE) 348 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 349 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 350 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA) 351 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA) 352 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON) 353 (LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON) 354 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH CEDILLA) 355 (LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH CEDILLA) 356 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH CARON) 357 (LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH CARON) 358 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH STROKE) 359 (LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH STROKE) 360 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH TILDE) 361 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH TILDE) 362 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH MACRON) 363 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH MACRON) 364 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH BREVE) 365 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH BREVE) 366 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE) 367 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE) 368 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 369 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE) 370 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH OGONEK) 371 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH OGONEK) 372 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 373 (LATIN SMALL LETTER W WITH CIRCUMFLEX)

Code Page Compatibility

371

Table B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 232 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE) 233 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE) 234 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 235 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS) 236 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH GRAVE) 237 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH ACUTE) 238 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 239 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS) 240 (LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH) 241 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE) 242 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE) 243 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE) 244 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 245 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE) 246 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS) 248 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE) 249 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE) 250 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE) 251 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 252 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS) 253 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE) 254 (LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN) 255 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS) 256 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH MACRON) 257 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH MACRON) 258 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH BREVE) 374 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 375 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 376 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS) 377 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE) 378 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE) 379 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE) 380 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE) 381 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 382 (LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON) 461 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CARON) 462 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CARON) 463 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CARON) 464 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CARON) 465 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CARON) 466 (LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CARON) 467 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CARON) 468 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CARON) 469 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND MACRON) 470 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND MACRON) 471 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND ACUTE) 472 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND ACUTE) 473 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND CARON) 474 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND CARON) 475 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND GRAVE) 476 (LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND GRAVE) 501 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH ACUTE)

372

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 259 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH BREVE) 260 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK) 261 (LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK) 262 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE) 263 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE) 264 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 265 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 266 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH DOT ABOVE) 267 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH DOT ABOVE) 268 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CARON) 269 (LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CARON) 270 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH CARON) 271 (LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH CARON) 272 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE) 273 (LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE) 274 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH MACRON) 275 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH MACRON) 278 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DOT ABOVE) 279 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DOT ABOVE) 280 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK) 281 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK) 282 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CARON) 283 (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON) 284 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 285 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 286 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH BREVE) 287 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH BREVE) 288 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH DOT ABOVE) 289 (LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH DOT ABOVE) 711 (CARON) 728 (BREVE) 729 (DOT ABOVE) 730 (RING ABOVE) 731 (OGONEK) 733 (DOUBLE ACUTE ACCENT) 900 (GREEK TONOS) 901 (GREEK DIALYTIKA TONOS) 902 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ALPHA WITH TONOS) 904 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER EPSILON WITH TONOS) 905 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ETA WITH TONOS) 906 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA WITH TONOS) 908 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMICRON WITH TONOS) 910 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON WITH TONOS) 911 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA WITH TONOS) 912 (GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA WITH DIALYTIKA AND TONOS) 938 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA WITH DIALYTIKA) 939 (GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON WITH DIALYTIKA) 940 (GREEK SMALL LETTER ALPHA WITH TONOS) 941 (GREEK SMALL LETTER EPSILON WITH TONOS) 942 (GREEK SMALL LETTER ETA WITH TONOS) 943 (GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA WITH TONOS) 944 (GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON WITH DIALYTIKA AND TONOS) 962 (GREEK SMALL LETTER FINAL SIGMA) 970 (GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA WITH DIALYTIKA) 971 (GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON WITH DIALYTIKA) 972 (GREEK SMALL LETTER OMICRON WITH TONOS) 973 (GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON WITH TONOS) 974 (GREEK SMALL LETTER OMEGA WITH TONOS)

Code Page Compatibility

373

Table B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 290 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH CEDILLA) 292 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 293 (LATIN SMALL LETTER H WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 294 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H WITH STROKE) 295 (LATIN SMALL LETTER H WITH STROKE) 296 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH TILDE) 297 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH TILDE) 298 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH MACRON) 299 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH MACRON) 302 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH OGONEK) 303 (LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH OGONEK) 304 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DOT ABOVE) 305 (LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I) 306 (LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE IJ) 307 (LATIN SMALL LIGATURE IJ) 308 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 309 (LATIN SMALL LETTER J WITH CIRCUMFLEX) 310 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K WITH CEDILLA) 311 (LATIN SMALL LETTER K WITH CEDILLA) 312 (LATIN SMALL LETTER KRA) 313 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH ACUTE) 314 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH ACUTE) 315 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH CEDILLA) 316 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH CEDILLA) 317 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH CARON) 318 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH CARON) 319 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH MIDDLE DOT) 320 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH MIDDLE DOT) 321 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE) 322 (LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE) 1026 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DJE) 1027 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER GJE) 1028 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER UKRAINIAN IE) 1029 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DZE) 1030 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER BYELORUSSIANUKRAINIAN I) 1031 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YI) 1032 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER JE) 1033 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER LJE) 1034 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER NJE) 1035 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TSHE) 1036 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER KJE) 1038 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHORT U) 1039 (CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DZHE) 1106 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DJE) 1107 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER GJE) 1108 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER UKRAINIAN IE) 1109 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DZE) 1110 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER BYELORUSSIANUKRAINIAN I) 1111 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YI) 1112 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER JE) 1113 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER LJE) 1114 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER NJE) 1115 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TSHE) 1116 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER KJE) 1118 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHORT U) 1119 (CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DZHE) 8213 (HORIZONTAL BAR) 8470 (NUMERO SIGN) 8482 (TRADE MARK SIGN) 40869 (<CJK Ideograph Last>)

374

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-14. JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from JapanEUC to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 323 (LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE) 324 (LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE) 65374 (FULLWIDTH TILDE)

Converting from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS

Table B-15 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS:
Table B-15. IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) to MS932 (MS Shift JIS) 128 (<control character>) 129 (<control character>) 130 (<control character>) 131 (<control character>) 132 (<control character>) 133 (<control character>) 134 (<control character>) 135 (<control character>) 136 (<control character>) 137 (<control character>) 138 (<control character>) 139 (<control character>) 140 (<control character>) 141 (<control character>) 142 (<control character>) 143 (<control character>) 144 (<control character>) 145 (<control character>) 146 (<control character>) 147 (<control character>) 148 (<control character>) 149 (<control character>) 150 (<control character>) 151 (<control character>) 152 (<control character>) 153 (<control character>) 154 (<control character>) 155 (<control character>) 156 (<control character>) 157 (<control character>) 158 (<control character>) 159 (<control character>) 162 (CENT SIGN) 163 (POUND SIGN) 165 (YEN SIGN) 166 (BROKEN BAR) 172 (NOT SIGN) 8212 (EM DASH) 8214 (DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE) 8254 (OVERLINE) 8722 (MINUS SIGN) 12316 (WAVE DASH) 57344 (<Private Use First>)

Code Page Compatibility

375

Converting from MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese

Table B-16 lists all characters by character ID and description that do not convert from MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese:
Table B-16. MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS932 (MS Shift JIS) to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 8213 (HORIZONTAL BAR) 8470 (NUMERO SIGN) 8721 (N-ARY SUMMATION) 8735 (RIGHT ANGLE) 8741 (PARALLEL TO) 8750 (CONTOUR INTEGRAL) 8895 (RIGHT TRIANGLE) 9312 (CIRCLED DIGIT ONE) 9313 (CIRCLED DIGIT TWO) 9314 (CIRCLED DIGIT THREE) 9315 (CIRCLED DIGIT FOUR) 9316 (CIRCLED DIGIT FIVE) 9317 (CIRCLED DIGIT SIX) 9318 (CIRCLED DIGIT SEVEN) 9319 (CIRCLED DIGIT EIGHT) 9320 (CIRCLED DIGIT NINE) 9321 (CIRCLED NUMBER TEN) 9322 (CIRCLED NUMBER ELEVEN) 9323 (CIRCLED NUMBER TWELVE) 9324 (CIRCLED NUMBER THIRTEEN) 9325 (CIRCLED NUMBER FOURTEEN) 9326 (CIRCLED NUMBER FIFTEEN) 9327 (CIRCLED NUMBER SIXTEEN) 9328 (CIRCLED NUMBER SEVENTEEN) 9329 (CIRCLED NUMBER EIGHTEEN) 9330 (CIRCLED NUMBER NINETEEN) 9331 (CIRCLED NUMBER TWENTY) 12317 (REVERSED DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK) 12968 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH RIGHT) 13059 (SQUARE AARU) 13069 (SQUARE KARORII) 13076 (SQUARE KIRO) 13080 (SQUARE GURAMU) 13090 (SQUARE SENTI) 13091 (SQUARE SENTO) 13094 (SQUARE DORU) 13095 (SQUARE TON) 13099 (SQUARE PAASENTO) 13110 (SQUARE HEKUTAARU) 13115 (SQUARE PEEZI) 13129 (SQUARE MIRI) 13130 (SQUARE MIRIBAARU) 13133 (SQUARE MEETORU) 13137 (SQUARE RITTORU) 13143 (SQUARE WATTO) 13179 (SQUARE ERA NAME HEISEI) 13180 (SQUARE ERA NAME SYOUWA) 13181 (SQUARE ERA NAME TAISYOU) 13182 (SQUARE ERA NAME MEIZI) 13198 (SQUARE MG) 13199 (SQUARE KG) 13212 (SQUARE MM) 13213 (SQUARE CM) 13214 (SQUARE KM) 13217 (SQUARE M SQUARED) 13252 (SQUARE CC)

376

Appendix B: Code Pages

Table B-16. MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese Character Conversion Characters lost when converting from MS932 (MS Shift JIS) to IBM930 (IBM EBCDIC Japanese) 12319 (LOW DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK) 12850 (PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH HAVE) 12857 (PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH REPRESENT) 12964 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH HIGH) 12965 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH CENTRE) 12966 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH LOW) 12967 (CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH LEFT) 13261 (SQUARE KK) 64014 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA0E) 64017 (CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH-FA11) 65293 (FULLWIDTH HYPHEN-MINUS) 65374 (FULLWIDTH TILDE) 65508 (FULLWIDTH BROKEN BAR)

Code Page Compatibility

377

378

Appendix B: Code Pages

Appendix C

Glossary
This appendix includes the following topics:

PowerCenter Glossary Terms, 380

379

PowerCenter Glossary Terms

This appendix lists definitions of terms introduced in the PowerCenter documentation.

A
Administration Console

See Repository Server Administration Console on page 385.

active source

An active source is an active transformation the PowerCenter Server uses to generate rows.

B
backward compatibility

The compatibility between the latest version of the repository and an earlier version of the repository and client applications.
blocking

The suspension of the data flow into an input group of a multiple input group transformation.

C
cache partitioning

A caching process that the PowerCenter Server uses to create a separate cache for each partition. Each partition works with only the rows needed by that partition. The PowerCenter Server can partition caches for the Aggregator, Joiner, Lookup, and Rank transformations.
child object

A dependent object used by another object, the parent object.

child dependency

A dependent relationship between two objects in which the child object is used by the parent object.
client application

See repository client application on page 384.

380

Appendix C: Glossary

commit source

An active source that generates commits for a target in a source-based commit session.
compatible version

An earlier version of a client application or a local repository that you can use to access the latest version repository.
connection pool

The maximum number of connections the Repository Agent process can use to connect to the repository database. You can specify the size of the pool. If the repository is using all connections in the pool, it times out additional connection requests from repository client applications.
Custom transformation

A transformation that you bind to a procedure developed outside of the Designer interface to extend PowerCenter functionality. You can create Custom transformations with multiple input and output groups.
Custom transformation procedure

A C procedure you create using the functions provided with PowerCenter that defines the transformation logic of a Custom transformation.
Custom XML view

An XML view that you define instead of allowing the XML Wizard to choose the default root and columns in the view. You can create custom views using the XML Editor and the XML Wizard in the Designer.

D
database partitioning

A partition type that allows you to improve load performance when loading data to multinode IBM DB2 targets. You can use this partition type for DB2 targets.
denormalized view

An XML view that contains more than one multiple-occurring element.

dependent object

An object used by another object. A dependent object is a child object.

deployment group

A global object that contains references to other objects from multiple folders across the repository. You can copy the objects referenced in a deployment group to multiple target
PowerCenter Glossary Terms 381

folders in another repository. When you copy objects in a deployment group, the target repository creates new versions of the objects. You can create a static or dynamic deployment group.
dynamic deployment group

A deployment group that is associated with an object query. When you copy a dynamic deployment group, the source repository runs the query and then copies the results to the target repository.

E
effective Transaction Control transformation

A Transaction Control transformation that does not have a downstream transformation that drops transaction boundaries.
effective transaction generator

A transaction generator that does not have a downstream transformation that drops transaction boundaries.

G
group

A set of ports that defines a row of incoming or outgoing data. A group is analogous to a table in a relational source or target definition.

I
incompatible object

An object that a compatible client application cannot access in the latest version repository.
ineffective Transaction Control transformation

A Transaction Control transformation that has a downstream transformation that drops transaction boundaries, such as an Aggregator transformation with Transaction transformation scope.
ineffective transaction generator

A transaction generator that has a downstream transformation that drops transaction boundaries, such as an Aggregator transformation with Transaction transformation scope.

382

Appendix C: Glossary

input group

See group on page 382.

L
label

A user-defined object that you can associate with any versioned object or group of versioned objects in the repository.

M
mapping

A set of source and target definitions linked by transformation objects that define the rules for data transformation.
master server

The PowerCenter Server that starts a workflow in a server grid. The master server distributes sessions to worker servers in a server grid.
metadata explosion

The expansion of referenced or multiple-occurring elements in an XML definition. The relationship model you choose for an XML definition determines if metadata is limited or exploded to multiple areas within the definition. Limited data explosion reduces data redundancy.

N
normalized view

An XML view that contains no more than one multiple-occurring element. Normalized XML views reduce data redundancy.

O
object query

A user-defined object you use to search for versioned objects that meet specific conditions.
one-way mapping

A mapping that uses a web service client for the source. The PowerCenter Server loads data to a target, often triggered by a real-time event through a web service request.

PowerCenter Glossary Terms

383

open transaction

A set of rows that are not bound by commit or rollback rows.

output group

See group on page 382.

P
parent object

An object that uses a dependent object, the child object.

parent dependency

A dependent relationship between two objects in which the parent object uses the child object.
pipeline

See source pipeline on page 385.

pipeline branch

A segment of a pipeline between any two specified sources, transformations, or targets.

pipeline stage

The section of a pipeline executed between any two partition points.

pmrepagent

A command line program for UNIX and Windows that installs in the Repository Server installation directory. Use pmrepagent to perform repository functions, such as restoring and deleting repositories.
port dependency

The relationship between an output or input/output port and one or more input or input/ output ports.

R
recovery

See session recovery on page 385.

repository client application

Any PowerCenter application that connects to the repository. This includes the PowerCenter Client, PowerCenter Server, pmcmd, pmrep, and MX SDK.
384 Appendix C: Glossary

Repository Server Administration Console

An application that allows you to create and administer the repository through the Repository Server. The Repository Server Administration Console uses Microsoft Management Console (MMC) technology. MMC is a console framework for server and network management applications called snap-ins. The Administration Console is a snap-in for MMC.
request-response mapping

A mapping that uses a web service source and target. When you create a request-response mapping, you use source and target definitions imported from the same WSDL file.
reserved words file

A file named reswords.txt that you create and maintain in the PowerCenter Server installation directory. The PowerCenter Server searches this file and places quotes around reserved words when it executes SQL against source, target, and lookup databases.

S
server grid

A user-defined object that allows you to automate the distribution of sessions across multiple servers. You can use a server grid to balance workload and increase performance.
service mapping

A mapping that processes web service requests. A service mapping can contain source or target definitions imported from a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file containing a web service operation. It can also contain flat file or XML source or target definitions.
service workflow

A workflow that contains exactly one web service input message source and at most one type of web service output message target. Configure service properties in the service workflow.
session recovery

The process that the PowerCenter Server uses to complete failed sessions. When the PowerCenter Server runs a recovery session that writes to a relational target in normal mode, it resumes writing to the target database table at the point at which the previous session failed. For other target types, the PowerCenter Server performs the entire writer run again.
source pipeline

A source qualifier and all of the transformations and target instances that receive data from that source qualifier.
stage

See pipeline stage on page 384.

PowerCenter Glossary Terms

385

static deployment group

A deployment group that you must manually add objects to. See also deployment group on page 381.

T
target load order group

The collection of source qualifiers, transformations, and targets linked together in a mapping.
task release

A process the Workflow Monitor uses to remove older tasks from memory so you can monitor a PowerCenter Server in online mode without exceeding memory limits.
transaction

A set of rows bound by commit or rollback rows.

transaction boundary

A row, such as a commit or rollback row, that defines the rows in a transaction. Transaction boundaries originate from transaction control points.
transaction control

The ability to define commit and rollback points through an expression in the Transaction Control transformation and session properties.
transaction control point

A transformation that defines or redefines the transaction boundary by dropping any incoming transaction boundary and generating new transaction boundaries.
Transaction Control transformation

A transformation used to define conditions to commit and rollback transactions from relational, XML, and dynamic IBM MQSeries targets.
transaction control unit

The group of targets connected to an active source that generates commits or an effective transaction generator. A transaction control unit may contain multiple target connection groups.
transaction generator

A transformation that generates both commit and rollback rows. Transaction generators drop incoming transaction boundaries and generate new transaction boundaries downstream. Transaction generators are Transaction Control transformations and Custom transformation configured to generate commits.
386 Appendix C: Glossary

U
user-defined commit

A commit strategy that the PowerCenter Server uses to commit and roll back transactions defined in a Transaction Control transformation or a Custom transformation configured to generate commits.

V
version

Any one of multiple copies of a versioned object stored in the repository. The repository uses version numbers to differentiate versions.
versioned object

Any object that you can store multiple versions of in a repository enabled for version control.
versioning object

An object that contains properties you can apply to multiple versioned objects in your repository.
view root

The element in an XML view that is a parent to all the other elements in the view.
view row

The column in an XML view that triggers the PowerCenter Server to generate a row of data for the view in a session.

W
worker server

The PowerCenter Server in a server grid that runs sessions assigned to it by a master server.
Workflow Wizard

A wizard that creates a workflow with a Start task and sequential Session tasks based on the mappings you choose.

PowerCenter Glossary Terms

387

X
XML group

A set of ports in an XML definition that defines a row of incoming or outgoing data. An XML view becomes a group in a PowerCenter definition.
XML view

A portion of any arbitrary hierarchy in an XML definition. An XML view contains columns that are references to the elements and attributes in the hierarchy.

388

Appendix C: Glossary

Index

A
Absolute Time upgrading 245, 249 Access97 See Microsoft Access97 active source definition 380 adding schedules to reports 222 Administration Console HTML view 9 List view 9 Main window 9 Advanced External Procedure transformation changes to version 6.0 266 upgrading 268 aggregate functions upgrading 238 Aggregate treat nulls as zero setting on UNIX 164 setting on Windows 140 Aggregate treat rows as insert setting on UNIX 164 setting on Windows 140 AggregateTreatNullAsZero option on UNIX 164 AggregateTreatRowAsInsert option on UNIX 164

Aggregator transformation setting up for prior version compatibility 140, 164 treating nulls as zero 140, 164 treating rows as insert 140, 164 upgrading 238, 277 AIX shared library environment variable 160 Allow mapping/session debugging option on Windows 135 ANSI code page (Windows) definition 33 application server obtaining license 208 Application sources code page 38 Application targets code page 38 ASCII See also Unicode mode 8-bit ASCII 29 overview 29 setting ASCII data movement mode on UNIX 163 setting ASCII data movement mode on Windows 142 audit trail configuration setting 122, 199

389

B
backup domain controller PowerCenter Server installation guidelines 129 backward compatibility definition 380 batches upgrading 244 upgrading concurrent 246 upgrading disabled batches 246, 250, 251 upgrading nested batches 247, 248 upgrading sequential batches 246 blocking definition 380 bulk loading upgrading 275

C
cache files permissions 171 cache partitioning definition 380 cached reports prepackaged schedules 222 Character data sets See also Designer Guide handling options for Microsoft SQL Server and PeopleSoft on Oracle 140 character sizes double byte 34 multibyte 34 single byte 34 CheckinCommentsRequired repository configuration 122, 199 child dependency definition 380 child object definition 380 client application definition 380 client tools See PowerCenter Client ClientStore option on UNIX 167 COBOL connectivity 67 code page relaxation configuring the PowerCenter Server 44

code pages advanced external procedure 37 ANSI (Windows) 33 Application sources 38, 340 Application targets 38 character loss during conversions 357 choosing 34 compatibility 342 compatibility between components 341 compatibility diagram 39 compatibility overview 34 configuring UNIX Server 158 configuring Windows Server 128 converting from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC 368 converting from IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS 375 converting from IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin1 359 converting from JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese 370 converting from JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS 363 converting from Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English 360 converting from Latin1 to MS Latin1 358 converting from MS Latin1 to Latin1 358 converting from MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese 376 converting from MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC 361 external procedure 37 flat file sources 36, 38, 340 flat file targets 36, 38, 340 global repository 340 local repository 341 lookup database 37 OEM code page (Windows) 33 overview 32 pmcmd 37, 341 PowerCenter Client 35, 36, 341 PowerCenter Server 36, 179, 340 reference 336 related languages 336 related sort orders 336 related territories 336 relational sources 36, 38, 340 relational targets 36, 38, 340 relaxed validation for sources and targets 44 repository 36, 37, 341 setting for repository configuration 119, 195 sort order overview 37 stored procedure database 37

390

Index

subsets defined 340 supersets defined 340 supported code pages 334 UNIX 32 validation 40 verifying compatibility 347 Windows 33 commit source definition 381 compatibility between code pages 34, 342 compatible version definition 381 concurrent batches upgrading 245 configuring PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 162 PowerCenter Server (Windows) 133 connect string examples 61 syntax 61 connecting Microsoft Excel to PowerCenter Server 295 PowerCenter Client to Informix 302 PowerCenter Server to IBM DB2 (UNIX) 307 PowerCenter Server to IBM DB2 (Windows) 291 PowerCenter Server to Informix (UNIX) 310 PowerCenter Server to Informix (Windows) 293 PowerCenter Server to Microsoft Access 295 PowerCenter Server to Microsoft SQL Server 296 PowerCenter Server to ODBC data sources (UNIX) 321 PowerCenter Server to Oracle (UNIX) 313 PowerCenter Server to Oracle (Windows) 298 PowerCenter Server to Sybase SQL Server (UNIX) 316 PowerCenter Server to Sybase SQL Server (Windows) 300 PowerCenter Server to Teradata (Windows) 302 to UNIX databases 170, 306 to Windows databases 147, 290 connection pool definition 381 connections database pool 6 TCP/IP 179 upgrading connection name 242 connectivity COBOL 67 connect string examples 61 diagram of 60 native drivers 67

overview 5, 60 PowerCenter Client 64 ConnectString setting for repository configuration 119, 195 control file permissions 171 conversions IBM EBCDIC Japanese to JapanEUC code pages 368 IBM EBCDIC Japanese to MS Shift JIS code pages 375 IBM EBCDIC US English to Latin1 code pages 359 JapanEUC to IBM EBCDIC Japanese code pages 370 JapanEUC to MS Shift JIS code pages 363 Latin1 to IBM EBCDIC US English code pages 360 Latin1 to MS Latin1 code pages 358 MS Latin1 to Latin1 code pages 358 MS Shift JIS to IBM EBCDIC Japanese code pages 376 MS Shift JIS to JapanEUC code pages 361 Create Indicator Files setting on Windows 143 CreateIndicatorFiles option on UNIX 165 creating data sources 218 repositories 115 Creation Mode setting for repository configuration 118, 194 Custom transformation changes to version 7.1 270 definition 381 Custom transformation procedure definition 381

D
Dashboard.xml file usage 210 dashboards importing 216 data connector adding the Metadata Reporter data source 220 data connectors primary data source 221 properties 221 data movement mode changing 30 setting on UNIX 163 setting on Windows 142

Index

391

data sources adding to data connector 220 primary in data connector 221 setting up 218 switching 227 database connections description 6 database partitioning definition 381 DatabaseArrayOperationSize configuration setting 122, 199 setting for repository configuration 122, 199 DatabaseConnectionTimeout setting for repository configuration 122, 199 DatabasePoolSize database connections overview 6 setting for repository configuration 122, 198 databases connecting to (UNIX) 170, 306 connecting to (Windows) 147, 290 connecting to IBM DB2 291, 307 connecting to Informix 293, 310 connecting to Microsoft Access 295 connecting to Microsoft SQL Server 296 connecting to Oracle 298, 313 connecting to Sybase SQL Server 300, 316 connecting to Teradata (UNIX) 318 connecting to Teradata (Windows) 302 connection pool overview 6 connectivity overview 178 source code page 36 target code page 36 DatabaseType setting for repository configuration 119, 195 DataDirect ODBC drivers platform-specific drivers required 63 Date Display Format setting on UNIX 164 setting on Windows 143 Date Handling 4.0 Compatibility option on UNIX 164 setting on Windows 140 DateDisplayFormat setting for repository configuration 121, 198 setting on UNIX 164 dates setting up prior version compatibility (UNIX) 164 setting up prior version compatibility (Windows) 140 DB2 See IBM DB2

DBPassword setting for repository configuration 119, 195 DBUser setting for repository configuration 119, 195 deadlock retries setting number of (UNIX) 166 setting number of (Windows) 141 Deadlock Sleep Before Retry setting on Windows 141 DeadlockSleep option on UNIX 166 Debugger Instance Data window 15 Target Data window 15 DECODE function upgrading 236 Delete upgrading dependency window overview 11 dependent object definition 381 deployment group definition 381 Designer installing 77 Instance Data window 15 Mapping Designer 14 Mapplet Designer 14 Navigator 15 output window 15 overview window 15 Source Analyzer 14 status bar 15 Target Data window 15 Transformation Developer 14 Warehouse Designer 14 workspace 15 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) avoiding use with PowerCenter Server 128, 158 directories data cache 181 indexes 181 PowerCenter Server 129, 159 root 181 server defaults 179 server variables 179 dispatch function upgrading 266 documentation conventions xxxi

392

Index

description xxx online xxxi, 77 dynamic deployment group definition 382 DynamicConfigRefreshInterval setting for repository configuration 122, 198

F
FailSessionIfMaxSessionsReached option on Windows 135 setting on UNIX 163 flat files connectivity 67 directory for targets 130, 159 source code page 36, 38, 340 target code page 36, 38, 340 folder versions upgrading 255 functions upgrading 234

E
effective Transaction Control transformation definition 382 effective transaction generator definition 382 Enable Version Control setting for repository configuration 118 environment variables LANG_C 32 LC_ALL 32 LC_CTYPE 32 NLS_LANG 55 PM_HOME 162 SHLIB_PATH 160 Error Severity Level for Log Files setting on Windows 135 ErrorSeverityLevel option on UNIX 164 setting for repository configuration 121, 198 event logs filename for 163 event-based scheduling upgrading 243 Excel See Microsoft Excel Export Session Log Lib Name setting on Windows 143 ExportSessionLogLibName option on UNIX 163 expressions upgrading 234 External Procedure transformation changes to version 6.0 266 upgrading 263 external procedures See also Designer Guide directory for 130, 159 upgrading 263

G
Global Data Repository setting for repository configuration 117 global repositories See also repositories code page 340 definition 3, 114 promoting 124 global variables importing 213 XML files for databases 214 globalization overview 26 GlobalVariables.xml file usage 210 group definition 382

H
HP-UX shared library environment variable 160 HTML view Administration Console 9 HTTP proxy domain setting on UNIX 168 HTTP proxy password setting on UNIX 167, 168 HTTP proxy port setting on UNIX 167 HTTP proxy server setting on UNIX 167

Index

393

I
IBM DB2 connect string syntax 61 connecting to PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 307 connecting to PowerCenter Server (Windows) 291 setting DB2CODEPAGE 291 setting DB2INSTANCE 291 setting TablespaceName 119, 196 tablespace name 125 IIF expressions upgrading 236 IIF function upgrading 236 importing dashboards 216 global variables 213 PowerCenter Metadata Reporter objects 210217 reports 214 schedules 212 schema 210 incompatible object definition 382 incremental aggregation upgrading cache files 276 indicator files configuring PowerCenter Server to create (Windows) 143 ineffective Transaction Control transformation definition 382 ineffective transaction generator definition 382 Informatica documentation xxx Webzine xxxii Informix connect string syntax 61 connecting to PowerCenter Client 302 connecting to PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 310 connecting to PowerCenter Server (Windows) 293 installing DataDirect ODBC drivers 83 input locales configuring 28 installation minimum system requirements 70 overview 70 steps for upgrade 73 installing licenses for PowerCenter Server 132, 160 licenses for Repository Server 88, 91, 104, 105 ODBC drivers on PowerCenter Client 83
394 Index

ODBC drivers on PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 173 PowerCenter Client 77, 192 PowerCenter components 192 PowerCenter Server (Windows) 131 Repository Server 192 troubleshooting (Windows) 99, 152 Windows guidelines for 129 Instance Data window 15 interface for PowerCenter Metadata Reporter 19 IS_DATE function upgrading 235 IS_NUMBER function upgrading 235 IS_SPACES function upgrading 235 ISO 8859-1 definition 29

J
JBoss Application Server license 208 JCEProvider option on UNIX 167 Joiner transformation setting up for prior version compatibility 140, 165 upgrading 277 JoinerSourceOrder6xCompatibility option on UNIX 165 JVMClassPath option on UNIX 167 JVMDIIPath option on UNIX 167 JVMMaxMemory option on UNIX 167 JVMMinMemory option on UNIX 167

K
KeepAliveTimeout setting for repository configuration 122, 198 keys required to run PowerCenter Server 137

L
label definition 383 LANG_C environment variable setting locale in UNIX 32 language code page reference 336 LC_ALL environment variable setting locale in UNIX 32 license obtaining for application server 208 obtaining for PowerAnalyzer 209 license file on PowerCenter Server 166 license files pmlic 174 updating PowerCenter Server 138 license keys installing 91, 105, 132, 160 upgrading repositories 200 Linux shared library environment variable 160 List view Administration Console 9 LMSharedMem setting on UNIX 163 Load Manager Load Manager Allow Debugging (UNIX) 163 Load Manager Shared Memory (UNIX) 163 LoadManagerAllowDebugging option on UNIX 165 local repositories See also repositories code page 341 definition 3, 114 promoting to global 124 locales overview 28 LogFileName option on UNIX 163 setting for repository configuration 122, 198 Lookup databases setting maximum number of connections (Windows) 140 Lookup transformation upgrading 277, 281

M
main window Administration Console 9 overview 11 mapping definition 383 mappings See also Designer Guide description 13 process 14 upgrading 240 mapplets description 13 master server definition 383 Max Lookup/SP DB Connections setting on Windows 140 Max LookupSPDBConnections option on UNIX 166 Max MSSQL Connections setting on Windows 141 Max No. of Concurrent Sessions setting on Windows 135 Max Sessions setting on UNIX 163 Max Sybase Connections setting on Windows 141 MaximumConnections setting for repository configuration 121, 198 MaximumLocks setting for repository configuration 122, 198 MaxMSSQLConnections option on UNIX 166 MaxSybaseConnections option on UNIX 166 MBCS (Multibyte Character Set) definition 29 MessageReceiveTimeOut setting for repository configuration 120, 197 MessageSendTimeout setting for repository configuration 120, 197 metadata description of PowerCenter 13 multi-dimensional 13 metadata explosion definition 383 Metadata Reporter See PowerCenter Metadata Reporter Microsoft Access connecting to PowerCenter Server 295

Index

395

Microsoft Excel connecting to PowerCenter Server 295 using PmNullPasswd 295 using PmNullUser 295 Microsoft SQL Server connect string syntax 61 connecting to PowerCenter Server 296 determining code page and sort order 50 setting Char handling options 140 setting maximum number of connections (Windows) 141 minimum system requirements 70 MS Exchange Profile option for post-session email 143 setting on Windows 143 MX views using with PowerCenter Metadata Reporter 19

N
native connect string See connect string Navigator overview 11, 15 NLS_LANG setting locale 55 normalized view definition 383 Number of Deadlock Retries setting on Windows 141 NumberofDeadlockRetries option on UNIX 166 numeric functions upgrading 238 numeric operations upgrading converting strings to numbers 238

O
object queries upgrading 233 object query definition 383 ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) DataDirect driver issues 63 definition 83 diagram of 62 installing drivers on PowerCenter Client 83 installing on PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 173 overview 62
396 Index

requirement for PowerCenter Client 64 ODBC calls PowerCenter Client 328 PowerCenter Server 330 ODBC data sources connecting to (UNIX) 321 odbc.ini file sample 323 OEM code page (Windows) definition 33 one-way mapping definition 383 online help PowerCenter Client 77 open transaction definition 384 optimizing IBM DB2 EEE repositories 125 options on UNIX AggregateTreatNullAsZero 164 AggregateTreatRowAsInsert 164 ClientStore 167 CreateIndicatorFiles 165 DateHandling40Compatibility 164 DeadlockSleep 166 ErrorSeverityLevel 164 ExportSessionLogLibName 163 FailSessionIfMaxSessionsReached 163 JCEProvider 167 JoinerSourceOrder6xCompatibility 165 JVMClassPath 167 JVMDIIPath 167 JVMMaxMemory 167 JVMMinMemory 167 LoadManagerAllowDebugging 165 LogFileName 163 Max LookupSPDBConnections 166 MaxMSSQLConnections 166 MaxSybaseConnections 166 NumberofDeadlockRetries 166 OutputMetaDataForFF 165 PMServer3XCompatibility 164 SybaseIQLocalToPrnServer 166 TimeStampWorkflowLogMessages 163 TrustStore 167 WriterWaitTimeOut 165 XMLWarnDupRows 165 options on Windows Allow mapping/session debugging 135 FailSessionIfMaxSessionsReached 135 Output to Event Log 136

Output to File 136 TCP/IP Host Address 135 Time Stamp Workflow Log 135 Oracle connect string syntax 61 connecting to PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 313 connecting to PowerCenter Server (Windows) 298 displaying non-ASCII characters 304 installing DataDirect ODBC drivers 83 setting locale with NLS_LANG 55 tips 126 Oracle Net Services using to connect PowerCenter Server to Oracle (NT) 298 using to connect PowerCenter Server to Oracle (UNIX) 313 output files permissions 171 Output Metadata for Flat File Target setting on Windows 143 Output to Event Log option on Windows 136 Output to File option on Windows 136 Output window overview 11 OutputMetaDataForFF option on UNIX 165

P
parent dependency definition 384 parent object definition 384 password entering repository (UNIX) 162 entering repository (Windows) 137 PeopleSoft on Oracle setting Char handling options 140 performance detail files permissions 171 permissions output and log files 171 pipeline branch definition 384 pipeline partitioning upgrading 260 pipeline stage definition 384

PIVOT function upgrading 239 platforms 32-bit 70 64-bit 70 PM Password setting on UNIX 162 PM Server 3.X aggregate compatibility setting on UNIX 164 setting on Windows 140 PM Server 6.X Joiner source order compatibility setting on UNIX 165 setting on Windows 140 PM User setting on UNIX 162 PM_HOME configuring on UNIX 162 pmcmd code page issues 37, 341 communicating with PowerCenter Server 37 shutdownserver command 151, 172 upgrading 258 pmconfig using 162 pmlic overview 174 PmNullPasswd reserved word 68 PmNullUser reserved word 68 pmrep See also Repository Guide Delete command upgrading 258 upgrading folder versions 259 upgrading Restore command 258 upgrading Updatedbconfig commands 258 pmrepagent definition 384 pmrepagent upgrading folder versions 259 pmserver starting server (UNIX) 171 PMServer 4.0 date handling compatibility setting on UNIX 164 setting on Windows 140 pmserver.cfg file configuring the PowerCenter Server 162 PMServer3XCompatibility option on UNIX 164

Index

397

port dependency definition 384 post-session email configuring on Windows 143 upgrading 244 post-session shell command upgrading 244 PowerAnalyzer obtaining license 209 PowerCenter administration tasks 22 connectivity 60 installation steps 72 minimum system requirements 70 repository version number 186 upgrading 73 PowerCenter Client See also PowerCenter Server code page 35, 36, 341 connecting to databases 85 connectivity requirements 64 installing 77, 192 overview 4 system requirements 70 PowerCenter components installing 192 PowerCenter Metadata Reporter interface 19 setting up 207 PowerCenter repositories switching 227 PowerCenter repository connectivity requirements 66 PowerCenter Server See also PowerCenter Client automatically starting (Windows) 150 changing servers 182 code page 36, 179, 340 configuring (UNIX) 162 configuring ErrorSeverityLevel (UNIX) 164 configuring export session log lib name (UNIX) 163 configuring fail session if max sessions reached (UNIX) 163 configuring log file name (UNIX) 163 configuring Repository Server host name (UNIX) 162 configuring server name (UNIX) 162 configuring UNIX Server 158 configuring Windows Server 128 connectivity overview 178 connectivity requirements 67 data movement mode (UNIX) 163

data movement mode (Windows) 142 date display format (UNIX) 164 date display format (Windows) 143 description 5 file directories 181 installation guidelines (Windows) 129 installing (UNIX) 160 installing (Windows) 131 installing multiple (UNIX) 160 license keys 132, 160 pmlic 174 registering 179, 181, 182 root directory 181 selecting a code page 179 starting (UNIX) 171 starting from control panel (Windows) 148 stopping (Windows) 149 system requirements 70 troubleshooting installation (Windows) 152 user types (Windows) 129 variable directories 129, 159 variables for 179 pre-session shell command upgrading 244 primary data sources data connector 221 primary domain controller PowerCenter Server installation guidelines 129 privileges registering PowerCenter Server 178 product license keys installing PowerCenter Server 132, 160 installing Repository Server 91, 105

R
Rank transformation upgrading 277 recovery files permissions 171 registering PowerCenter Server 179, 181, 182 reject file permissions 171 relaxed code page validation troubleshooting 45 release notes installing 77 reports adding schedules 222

398

Index

cached 222 importing 214 Reports.xml file usage 210 repositories changing a code page 115 code page 36, 37, 341 connectivity 64 creating 115 entering name for PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 162 entering name for PowerCenter Server (Windows) 137 global 114 licenses 115 local 114 login information 115 open architecture 114 overview 114 properties 66 restricted characters for repository name 117, 194 size requirements 70, 73 standalone 114 system requirements 70 tips 126 types of 114 version number 186 versioned 114 Repository Agent description 4 repository client application definition 384 repository configuration CheckinCommentsRequired 122, 199 creating global repositories 117 database connection 66 enabling version control 118 general properties 66 network properties 66 setting Code Page 195 setting code page 119 setting ConnectString 119, 195 setting Creation Mode 118, 194 setting DatabaseArrayOperationSize 122, 199 setting DatabaseConnectionTimeout 122, 199 setting DatabasePoolSize 122, 198 setting DatabaseType 119, 195 setting DateDisplayFormat 121, 198 setting DBPassword 119, 195 setting DBUser 119, 195 setting DynamicConfigRefreshInterval 122, 198 setting ErrorSeverityLevel 121, 198 setting KeepAliveTimeout 122, 198

setting LogFileName 122, 198 setting MaximumConnections 121, 198 setting MaximumLocks 122, 198 setting MessageReceiveTimeOut 120, 197 setting MessageSendTimeOut 120, 197 setting Repository Name 194 setting RepositoryName 117 setting SecurityAuditTrail 122, 199 setting TablespaceName 119, 196 setting ThreadWaitTimeout 122, 198 setting Trusted Connection 119, 196 Repository Manager dependency window 11 installing 77 main window 11 Navigator 11 Output window 11 using 11 repository metadata upgrading 230 Repository Name setting for repository configuration 194 repository objects overview 13 Repository Password setting on UNIX 162 setting on Windows 137 Repository Server configuration (UNIX) 107 configuration (Windows) 92 connecting to databases 94, 109 connectivity requirements 66 description 4 installation (UNIX) 105 installation (Windows) 90 installing 192 pre-installation tasks (UNIX) 104 pre-installation tasks (Windows) 88 setting Administrative Password (Windows) 93 setting AdminPasswd (UNIX) 107 setting Backup Directory (Windows) 93 setting BackupDir (UNIX) 107 setting ConfigDir (UNIX) 107 setting Configuration Directory (Windows) 93 setting ErrorSeverityLevel (UNIX) 108 setting LogFileName (UNIX) 108 setting Maximum Port Number (Windows) 93 setting Minimum Port Number (Windows) 93 setting Output to Event Log (Windows) 93 setting Output to File (Windows) 93 setting PluginDir (UNIX) 107

Index

399

setting RaMaxPort (UNIX) 107 setting RaMinPort (UNIX) 107 setting Server Port Number (Windows) 93 setting ServerPort (UNIX) 107 setting Severity Level (Windows) 93 starting (Windows) 95 starting on UNIX 110 stopping from Repository Manager 98, 111 stopping from the UNIX command prompt 111 stopping from Windows command prompt 98 stopping from Windows Control Panel 98 troubleshooting installation (Windows) 99 UNIX installation guidelines 104 user accounts (Windows) 89 Windows installation guidelines 88 Repository Server Administration Console definition 385 overview 8 Repository Server Host Name setting on Windows 137 Repository Server Port Number setting on Windows 137 Repository Server Timeout setting on Windows 137 Repository User setting on UNIX 162 setting on Windows 137 RepositoryName setting for repository configuration 117 setting on UNIX 162 setting on Windows 137 RepServerHostName setting on UNIX 162 RepServerPortNumber setting on UNIX 162 RepServerTimeout setting on UNIX 163 request-response mapping definition 385 requirements for PowerCenter Metadata Reporter 19, 208 reserved words file definition 385 response file creating 79 Restore command upgrading 258 reusable transformations description 13 root directory entering 181

server variable 181 row error log files permissions 171 Run If Previous Completed upgrading 246, 251 upgrading nested batch 252 upgrading single-level batch 252 Run Once upgrading 245 running schedules 225

S
samples odbc.ini file 323 Schedule.xml file usage 210 schedules adding to reports 222 for cached reports 222 importing 212 running 225 scheduling upgrading 249 schema importing 210 schemas description 13 Schemas.xml file usage 210 SecurityAuditTrail setting for repository configuration 122, 199 sequential batches upgrading 245 server See also database-specific server See PowerCenter Server server grid definition 385 Server Name setting on UNIX 162 setting on Windows 135 server variables description 179 directories on Windows 129, 159 list 180 session log 179 service mapping definition 385

400

Index

service workflow definition 385 Session Log in UTF8 setting on Windows 142 session logs directory for 129, 159 permissions 171 server variable for 179 session recovery definition 385 SessionLogInUTF8 setting on UNIX 163 sessions description 13 setting maximum (UNIX) 163 sort order 37 upgrading 242 upgrading disabled session in a batch 251 upgrading disabled sessions 243, 245, 250 upgrading session name 242 upgrading standalone sessions 242 setting up data sources 218 PowerCenter Metadata Reporter 207 Shared Memory setting on Windows 135 shutdownserver command description 172 silent installation creating a response file 79 description 79 procedure 80 result codes 81 setup.exe syntax 79 64-bit platforms overview 70 Solaris shared library environment variable 160 sort order code page 37 code page reference 336 $Source upgrading 272 Source Analyzer Designer 14 source databases code page 36, 38, 340 connecting through ODBC (UNIX) 321 connectivity 64 source definitions See also Designer Guide

description 13 source pipeline definition 385 sources supported 2 SQL scripts installing 77 standalone repositories description 114 starting PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 171 PowerCenter Server (Windows) 148 PowerCenter Server automatically (Windows) 150 static deployment group definition 386 stopping PowerCenter Server (Windows) 149 Stored Procedure databases setting number of connections (Windows) 140 Stored Procedure transformation upgrading 262 stored procedures upgrading 262 string conversion upgrading 238 subset defined for code page compatibility 34 superset defined for code page compatibility 34 switching PowerCenter repositories 227 Sybase SQL Server connect string syntax 61 connecting to PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 316 connecting to PowerCenter Server (Windows) 300 installing DataDirect ODBC drivers 83 setting maximum connections (Windows) 141 SybaseIQLocaltoPmServer options on UNIX 166 system locales definition 28 system requirements minimum installation requirements 70

T
tablespace name overview 125 TablespaceName setting for IBM DB2 119, 196

Index

401

setting for repository configuration 119, 196 $Target upgrading 272 Target Data window 15 target databases code page 36, 38, 340 connecting through ODBC (UNIX) 321 connectivity 64 target definitions See also Designer Guide description 13 target load order group definition 386 target-based commit WriterWaitTimeout 143 targets supported 3 Task Developer description 16 task release definition 386 TCP/IP Host Address option on Windows 135 TCP/IP network protocol configuration restrictions 158 connection requirement 179 host address 135 requirement for PowerCenter Server 64 server settings 183 temporary files directory for 130, 159 Teradata connect string syntax 61 connecting to PowerCenter Server (UNIX) 318 connecting to PowerCenter Server (Windows) 302 territory code page reference 336 Test Formatted Date setting on Windows 143 testing date display formats 143 32-bit platforms overview 70 ThreadWaitTimeout setting for repository configuration 122, 198 Time Stamp Workflow Log options on Windows 135 TimeStampWorkflowLogMessages option on UNIX 163

TO_DATE function upgrading 235 TO_DECIMAL function upgrading 235 TO_FLOAT function upgrading 235 TO_INTEGER function upgrading 235 TO_NUMBER function upgrading 239 transaction definition 386 transaction boundary definition 386 transaction control definition 386 transaction control point definition 386 Transaction Control transformation definition 386 upgrading 286 transaction control unit definition 386 transaction generator definition 386 Transformation Developer Designer 14 transformation expressions upgrading 234 Treat Char as Char on read (Microsoft SQL Server and PeopleSoft on Oracle) setting on Windows 140 Treat Null in Comparison Operators As setting on Windows 143 TreatDatabasePartitioning As Pass Through setting on Windows 143 TreatNullInComparisonOperatorAs setting on UNIX 165 troubleshooting installation (Windows) 99, 152 relaxed code page validation 45 upgrading repositories 202 Trusted Connection setting for repository configuration 119, 196 TrustStore option on UNIX 167 tutorials See also Getting Started installing 77

402

Index

U
Unicode mode See also ASCII overview 29 setting data movement mode (UNIX) 163 setting on Windows 142 UNIX configuring the PowerCenter Server 162 connecting the PowerCenter Server to databases 170 connecting to ODBC data sources 321 installing the PowerCenter Server 160 pmconfig program 162 pmserver.cfg 162 starting PowerCenter Server 171 stopping PowerCenter Server 171 UNIX environment variables LANG_C 32 LC_ALL 32 LC_CTYPE 32 UNIX settings PowerCenter Server 162 Updatedbconfig command upgrading 258 updating license files with pmlic 174 PowerCenter Server license files 138 upgrading Advanced External Procedure transformations 268 aggregate functions 238 Aggregator transformations 277 batch name 245 batches 241, 244 bulk loading 275 concurrent batch in sequential batch 247 concurrent batches 245, 246 connection name 242 DECODE 236 disabled batches 246, 250, 251 disabled session in a batch 251 disabled sessions 243, 245, 250 event-based scheduling 243 expressions using RTRIM 237 External Procedure transformations 263 folder versions 255 functions 234 IIF 236 incremental aggregation cache files 276 IS_DATE 235 IS_NUMBER 235 IS_SPACES 235

Joiner transformations 277 Lookup transformations 277, 281 mappings 240 namespaces 282 nested batches 245 numeric functions 238 object queries 233 overview 73 partitioning 260 PIVOT 239 pmcmd script 258 pmrep script 258 post-session email 244 pre- or post-session commands 244 preparing the domain 189 preparing the repository 189 Rank transformations 277 repositories 191 repository metadata 230 requirements 187 rules 233, 245 Run If Previous Completed 246, 251 Run Once 245 sequential batch in concurrent batch 248 sequential batches 245, 246 session name 242 sessions 241, 242 standalone sessions 242 Stored Procedure transformations 262 strings 238 supported versions 186 TO_DATE 235 TO_DECIMAL 235 TO_FLOAT 235 TO_INTEGER 235 TO_NUMBER 239 Transaction Control transformations 286 transformation expressions 234 troubleshooting repository 202 upgrade process 193 Use Absolute Time 245, 249 XML datatypes 283 usage Dashboard.xml file 210 GlobalVariables.xml file 210 Reports.xml file 210 Schedule.xml file 210 Schemas.xml file 210 user locales definition 28

Index

403

user-defined commit definition 387 users types for PowerCenter Server (Windows) 129 UTF-8 definition 29

V
Validate Data Code Pages setting on UNIX 163 setting on Windows 142 variables server 179 verifying PowerCenter Server starts (Windows) procedure 149 version definition 387 versioned object definition 387 versioned repository definition 114 versioning object definition 387 versions handling Aggregator transformation (UNIX) 164 handling Aggregator transformation (Windows) 140 handling Joiner transformation (UNIX) 165 handling Joiner transformation (Windows) 140 view root definition 387 view row definition 387

service start account (Windows 2000) 99 starting PowerCenter Server 148, 152 stopping PowerCenter Server 149 user accounts 129 verifying PowerCenter Server starts 149 windows Workflow Manager default 16 Windows settings PowerCenter Server 133 worker server definition 387 Workflow Designer description 16 workflow logs permissions 171 Workflow Manager installing 77 overview 16, 178 registering the PowerCenter Server 179, 182 stopping server (Windows) 150 Task Developer 16 windows 16 Workflow Monitor overview 16 Workflow wizard definition 387 workflows description 13 Worklet Designer description 16 workspace Designer 15 WriterWaitTimeOut option on UNIX 165 setting on Windows 143

W
Warehouse Designer uses 14 Warn about duplicate XML rows setting on Windows 142 Websphere Application Server license 208 webzine xxxii Windows automatically starting PowerCenter Server 150 backup domain controller 129 connecting PowerCenter Server to databases 85 installing PowerCenter Client 77 installing PowerCenter Server 131 primary domain controller 129
404 Index

X
XML group definition 388 XML view definition 388 XMLWarnDupRows option on UNIX 165